Talks on the Path of Occultism - Vol. II
By
Annie Besant
and C. W. Leadbeater
The Theosophical Publishing House
Adyar, Madras 600 020, India Wheaton, III., USA
First Edition 1926
FOREWORD
THIS book is merely a record of talks by Mr. C. W. Leadbeater and myself on
three famous books—books small in size but great in contents. We both hope that
they will prove useful to aspirants, and even to those above that stage, since
the talkers were older than the listeners, and had more experience in the life
of discipleship.
The talks were not given at one place only; we chatted to our friends, at
different times and places. chiefly at Adyar, London and Sydney. A vast quantity
of notes were taken by the listeners. All that were available of these were
collected and arranged. They were then condensed, and repetitions were
eliminated.
Unhappily there were, found to be very few notes on The Voice of the Silence,
Fragment I, so we have utilized notes made at a class held by our good
colleague, Mr. Ernest Wood, in Sydney, and incorporated these into Bishop
Leadbeater's talks in that section. No notes of my own talks on this book were
available; though I have spoken much upon it, those talks are not recoverable.
None of these talks have been published before, except some of Bishop
Leadbeater's addresses to selected students on At the Feet of the Master. A book
entitled Talks on "At the Feet of the Master" was published a few years ago,
containing imperfect reports of some of these talks of his. That book will not
be reprinted; the essential material in it finds its place here, carefully
condensed and edited.
May this book help some of our younger brothers to understand more of these
priceless teachings. The more they are studied and lived, the more will be found
in them.
ANNIE BESANT
|
FRAGMENT
I: THE VOICE OF THE SILENCE |
1 |
1. |
The Preface |
3 |
2. |
The Higher and the Lower Powers |
25 |
3. |
The Slayer of the Real |
43 |
4. |
The Real and the Unreal |
54 |
5. |
The Warning Voice |
62 |
6. |
Self and All-Self |
75 |
7. |
The Three Halls |
89 |
8. |
The World's Mother |
108 |
9. |
The Seven Sounds |
121 |
10. |
Become the Path |
134 |
11. |
The One Road |
146 |
12. |
The Last Steps |
157 |
13. |
The Goal |
168 |
|
FRAGMENT II: THE TWO PATHS |
175 |
1. |
The Open Gate. |
177 |
2. |
Head-Learning and Soul-Wisdom |
189 |
3. |
The Life of Action |
200 |
4. |
The Secret Path |
216 |
5. |
The Wheel of Life |
225 |
6. |
The Way of the Arhat |
236 |
|
FRAGMENT III: THE SEVEN PORTALS |
253 |
1. |
The Paramita Heights |
255 |
2. |
Tuning the Heart |
274 |
3. |
The First Three Gates |
293 |
4. |
The Fourth Gate |
304 |
5. |
The Fifth and Sixth Gates |
325 |
6. |
The Seventh Gate |
342 |
7. |
The Arya Path |
363 |
8. |
The Three Vestures |
375 |
FRAGMENT- I
THE
PREFACE
C.W.L.—Even from the superficial and wholly physical
point of view, The Voice of the Silence is one of the most remarkable books in
our Theosophical literature, whether we consider its contents, its style, or the
manner of its production; and when we look a little deeper and call to our aid
the power of clairvoyant investigation, our admiration is by no means
diminished. Not that we should make the mistake of regarding it as a
sacred-scripture, every word of which must be accepted without question. It is
by no means that, for, as we shall presently see, various minor errors and
misunderstandings have crept into it; but anyone who on that account regards it
as unreliable or carelessly put together will be making an even less excusable
mistake in the opposite direction.
Madame Blavatsky was always very ready to admit, and
even to emphasize, the fact that inaccuracies were to be found in all her works;
and in the early days, when we came across some especially improbable statement
of hers we not unnaturally laid it reverently aside as perhaps one of those
inaccuracies. It was surprising in what a number of such cases further study
showed us that Madame Blavatsky was after all correct, so that
4
presently, taught by experience, we grew much more
wary in this matter, and learnt to trust her extraordinarily wide and minute
knowledge upon all sorts of out-of-the-way subjects. Still there is no reason to
suspect a hidden meaning in an obvious misprint, as some too credulous students
have done; and we need not hesitate to admit that our great Founder's profound
knowledge in occult matters did not prevent her from sometimes misspelling a
Tibetan word, or even misusing an English one.
She gives us in her preface some information as to
the origin of the book—information which at first seemed to involve some serious
difficulties, but in the light of recent investigations becomes much more
comprehensible. Much of what she wrote has been commonly understood in a wider
sense than she intended it, and in that way it has been made to appear that she
put forward extravagant claims; but when the facts of the case are stated it
will be seen that there is no foundation for such a charge.
She says: '' The following pages are derived from The
Book of the Golden Precepts, one of the works put into the hands of mystic
students in the East. The knowledge of them is obligatory in that school the
teachings of which are accepted by many Theosophists. Therefore, as I know many
of these Precepts by heart, the work of translating has been relatively an easy
task for me." And, further on: " The work from which I here translate forms part
of the same series as that from which the stanzas of The Book of Dzyan were
taken, on which The Secret Doctrine is based." She
5
also says: " The Book of the Golden Precepts . . .
contains about ninety distinct little treatises."
In early days we read into this more than she meant,
and we supposed that this work was put into the hands of .all mystic students in
the East, and that "the school in which the knowledge of them is obligatory "
meant the school of the Great White Brotherhood itself.1 Hence when we met with
advanced occultists who had never heard of The Book of the Golden Precepts we
were much surprised and a little inclined to look askance at them and doubt
gravely whether they could have come altogether along the right lines, but since
then we have learnt many things, and among them somewhat more of perspective
than we had at first.
In due course, too, we acquired further information
about the Stanzas of Dzyan, and the more we learnt about them and their unique
position the clearer it became to us that neither The Voice of the Silence nor
any other book could possibly have in any real sense the same origin as they.
The original of The Book of Dzyan is in the hands of
the august Head of the Occult Hierarchy, and has been seen by none. None knows
how old it is, but it is rumoured that the earlier part of it (consisting of the
first six stanzas), has an origin altogether anterior to this world, and even
that it is not a history, but a series of directions—rather a formula for
creation than an account of it. A copy of it is kept in the museum of the
Brotherhood,
1 This term is used to denote a great Brotherhood of
Adepts, and is not related to color.
6
and it is that copy (itself probably the oldest book
produced on this planet) which Madame Blavatsky and several of her pupils have
seen—which she describes so graphically in The Secret Doctrine. The book has,
however, several peculiarities which she does not there mention. It appears to
be very highly magnetized, for as soon as a man takes a page into his hand he
sees passing before his eyes a vision of the events which it is intended to
portray, while at the same time he seems to hear a sort of rhythmic description
of them in his own language, so far as that language will convey the ideas
involved. Its pages contain no words whatever—-nothing but symbols.
When we came to know this fully, it was somewhat
startling to find another book claiming the same origin as the sacred Stanzas,
and our first impulse was to suppose that some strange mistake must have arisen.
Indeed, it was this extraordinary discrepancy that first led to our
investigating the question of the real authorship of The Book of the Golden
Precepts; and when this was done, the explanation proved to be exceedingly
simple.
We read in the various biographies of Madame
Blavatsky that she once spent a period of some three years in Tibet, and also
that on another occasion she made ah unsuccessful attempt to penetrate into that
forbidden land. On one or other of these visits she seems to have stayed for
some considerable time at a certain monastery in the Himalayas, the head of
which at that time was a pupil of the Master Morya. The place seems to me to be
in Nepal rather than in Tibet, but it is difficult to be sure of this. There she
studied with great assiduity
7
and also gained considerable psychic development; and
it is at this period of her history that she learnt by heart the various
treatises of which she makes mention in the Preface. The learning of them is
obligatory upon the students of that particular monastery, and the book from
which they are taken is regarded there as of exceeding value and holiness.
This monastery is of great age. It was founded in the
early centuries of the Christian era by the great preacher and reformer of
Buddhism who is commonly known as Aryasanga. I think a claim is made that the
building had already existed for two or three centuries before his time; but,
however that may be, its history as far as we are concerned begins with his
temporary occupancy of it. He was a man of great power and learning, already far
advanced along the Path of Holiness; He had in a previous birth as Dharmajyoti
been one of the immediate followers of the Lord Buddha, and after that, under
the name of Kleinias, one of the leading disciples of our Master Kuthumi in his
birth as Pythagoras. After the death of Pythagoras, Kleinias founded a school
for the study of his philosophy at Athens—an opportunity of which several of our
present Theosophical members took advantage. Centuries later He took birth at
Peshawar, which was then called Purushapura, under the name of Vasubandhu
Kanushika. When he was admitted to the order of monks He took the name of
Asanga—•" the man without hindrance "—and later in his life his admiring
followers lengthened this to-Aryasanga, by which he is chiefly known as author
and
8
preacher. He is said to have lived to a very great
age —nearly a hundred and fifty years, if tradition speaks truly—and to have
died at Rajagriha.
He was a voluminous writer: the principal work of his
of which we hear is the Yogacharya Bhumishastra. He was the founder of the
Yogacharya school of Buddhism, which seems to have begun with an attempt to fuse
with Buddhism the great Yoga system of philosophy, or perhaps rather to adopt
from the latter what could be used and interpreted Buddhistically. He travelled
much and was a mighty force in the reform of Buddhism; in fact, his fame reached
so high a level that his name is joined with those of Nagarjuna and Aryacleva,
and these men have been called the three suns of Buddhism, because of their
activity in pouring forth its light and glory upon the world. The date of
Aryasanga is given vaguely as a thousand years after the Lord Buddha; European
scholars seem uncertain as to when he lived, but none assign him a later date
than the seventh century after Christ. To us in the Theosophical Society he is
known in this life as a specially kind, patient and helpful teacher, the Master
Djwal Kul—one who has for us an unique position, in that when some of us had the
honour of knowing him about forty years ago, he had not yet taken the step which
is the goal of human evolution— the Aseka Initiation. So that among our Masters
he is the only one whom we knew in this present incarnation before he became an
Adept, when he was still the head pupil of the Master Kuthumi. The fact that as
Aryasanga he carried Buddhism into Tibet may be the
9
reason why in this life he has chosen to take a
Tibetan body; there may have been karmic associations or links of which he
wished to dispose before taking the final initiation as Adept.
In the course of one of his great missionary journeys
in his life as Aryasanga he came to this Himalayan monastery and took up his
abode there. He stayed there for nearly a year, teaching the monks, organizing
the religion generally over a very large section of the country, and making this
monastery a kind of headquarters for the reformed faith, and he left upon the
place an impression and a tradition which last until the present time. Among
other relics of his is preserved a book, which is regarded with the greatest
reverence; and this is the scripture to which Madame Blavatsky refers as The
Book of the Golden Precepts. Aryasanga seems to have commenced it as a sort of
common place book, or a book of extracts, in which he wrote down anything that
he thought would be useful to his pupils, and he began with the Stanzas of
Dzyan—not in symbol, as in the original, but in written words. Many other
extracts he made—-some from the works of Nagarjuna, as Madame Blavatsky
mentions. After his departure his pupils added to the book a number of reports
(or perhaps rather abstracts) of his lectures or sermons to them, and these are
the " little treatises" to which Madame Blavatsky refers.
It was Alcyone, in his last life, who prepared and
added to The Book of the Golden Precepts the reports of the discourses of
Aryasanga, three of which form our
10
present subject of study. So we owe this priceless
little volume to his care in reporting, just as in this life we owe to him our
possession of the exquisite companion volume At the Feet of the Master. That
life of Alcyone began in A.D. 624, and was spent in Northern India. In it
Alcyone entered the order of Buddhist monks at an early age and became deeply
attached to Aryasanga, who took him with him to the monastery in Nepal, and left
him there to help and direct the studies of the community which he had
re-organized—a service that Alcyone performed with distinguished success for
about two years.1
It is in this sense, and in this sense only, that The
Voice of the Silence claims the same origin as the Stanzas of Dzyan—that the two
are copied in the same book. We must not forget also that though we have
undoubtedly much of Aryasanga's teaching in these treatises, it cannot but be
coloured considerably by the prepossessions of those who reported it; and it is
probable that at least in some passages they misunderstood him and failed to
convey his real meaning. As we examine the work in detail we shall find verses
here and there which express sentiments that Aryasanga could hardly have held,
and show ignorance which for him would have been impossible.
It will be noticed that Madame Blavatsky speaks of
translating the precepts—a remark which raises some interesting questions, since
we know that she was unacquainted with any Oriental tongue except Arabic. The
book is written in a script with which I am 1 See The Lives of Alcyone.
11
unfamiliar, nor do I know what language is used. The
latter may be Sanskrit, Pali, or some Prakrit dialect, or possibly Nepalese or
Tibetan; but the script is not any of those now commonly employed to write those
languages. It is at any rate reasonably certain that on the physical plane
neither script nor language could have been known to Madame Blavatsky.
For one who can function freely in the mental body
there are methods of getting at the meaning of a book, quite apart from the
ordinary process of reading it. The simplest is to read from the mind of one who
has studied it; but this is open to the objection that one gets not the real
meaning of the work, but that student's conception of the meaning, which may be
by no means the same thing. A second plan is to examine the aura of the book—a
phrase which needs a little explanation for those not practically acquainted
with the hidden side of things, An ancient manuscript stands in this respect in
a somewhat different position from a modern book. If it is not the original work
of the author himself, it has at any rate been copied word by word by some
person of a certain education and understanding, who knew the subject of the
book, and had his own opinions about it. It must be remembered that copying,
done usually with a stylus, is almost as slow and emphatic as engraving; so that
the writer inevitably impresses his thought strongly on his handiwork.
Any manuscript, therefore, even a new one, has always
some sort of thought-aura about it which conveys its general meaning, or rather,
one man's idea of its meaning
12
and his estimate of its value. Every time the book is
read by any one an addition is made to that thought-aura, and if it be carefully
studied the addition is naturally large and valuable. A book which has passed
through many hands has an aura which is usually better balanced, rounded off and
completed by the divergent views brought to it by its many readers; consequently
the psychometrization of such a book generally yields a fairly full
comprehension of its contents, though with a considerable fringe of opinions not
expressed in the book, but held by its various readers.
With a printed book the case is much the same, except
that there is no original copyist, so that at the beginning of its career it
usually carries nothing but disjointed fragments of the thoughts of the binder
and the bookseller. Also few readers at the present day seem to study so
thoughtfully and thoroughly as did the men of old, and for that reason the
thought-forms connected with a modern book are rarely so precise and clear-cut
as those which surround the manuscripts of the past.
A third plan, requiring somewhat higher powers, is to
go behind the book or manuscript altogether and get at the mind of the author.
If the book is in some foreign language, its subject entirely unknown, and there
is no aura round it to give any helpful suggestion, the only way is to follow
back its history, to see from what it was copied (or set up in type, as the case
may be) and so to trace out the line of its descent until one reaches its
author. If the subject of the work is known, a less tedious method is to
psychometrize that subject, get into
I
13
the general current of thought about it, and so find
the particular writer required, and see what he thinks. There is a sense in
which all the ideas connected with a given subject may be said to be local—to be
concentrated round a certain point in space, so that by mentally visiting that
point one can come into touch with all the converging streams of thought about
that subject, though of course these are linked by millions of lines with all
sorts of other subjects.
Supposing her clairvoyant powers to have been at that
time sufficient, Madame Blavatsky may have adopted any of these methods of
getting at the meaning of the treatises from The Book of the Golden Precepts,
though it would be a little misleading to describe any of them as translations
without qualifying the statement. The only other possibilities are somewhat
remote. There is at present no one in that Himalayan monastery who speaks any
European language, but since it is probably at least forty years since Madame
Blavatsky was there, there must have been many changes. It is recorded that
Indian students have occasionally, though very rarely, come to drink from that
fount of archaic learning, and if we may assume that the visit of some such
student coincided with hers, it might also be that he happened to know both
English and the language of the manuscript, or at least the language of other
inmates of the monastery who could read the manuscript for themselves, and so
could translate for her.
Strangely enough, there is also just a possibility
that she may have been taught in her own native tongue. In
14
European Russia, on the banks of the Volga, there is
a fairly large settlement of Buddhist tribes, probably Tartar in their origin;
and it appears that these people, though so far removed on the physical plane
from Tibet, still regard it as their holy land and occasionally undertake
pilgrimages to it. Such pilgrims sometimes remain for years as pupils in Tibetan
or Nepalese monasteries, and as one of them might very well know Russian as well
as his own Mongolian dialect, it is obvious that we have here another possible
method by which Madame Blavatsky may have communicated with her hosts.
In any case it is obvious that we must not expect an
exact verbal reproduction of what Aryasanga originally said to his disciples.
Even in the archaic book itself we have not his words, but his pupils'
recollection of them, and of that recollection we have now before us either a
translation of a translation, or the recording of a general mental impression of
the meaning. It would of course be quite easy for one of our Masters or for the
author himself to make a direct and accurate translation into English; but as
Madame Blavatsky distinctly claims the work of translation as her own, this
evidently was not the plan adopted.
At the same time, the account which we have from an
eyewitness of the speed with which it was written down, does certainly seem to
suggest the idea that some assistance was given to her, even though it may have
been unconsciously to herself. Dr. Besant writes on this subject:
She wrote it at Fontainebleau, and the greater part
was done when I was with her, and I sat in the room while she was writing
15
it. I know that she did not write it referring to any
books, but she wrote it down steadily, hour after hour, exactly as though she
were writing either from memory or from reading it where no book was. She
produced in the evening that manuscript that I saw her write as I sat with her,
and asked me and others to correct it for English, for she said that she had
written it so quickly that it was sure to be bad. We did not alter in that more
than a few words, and it remains as a specimen of marvelously beautiful literary
work.
Another possibility is that she may have done the
translation into English beforehand while at the monastery, and that at
Fontaineblcau she may really have been reading it at a distance, just as Dr.
Besant says she appeared to be. I have often seen her do that very thing on
other occasions.
The six schools of Hindu philosophy to which she
refers on the first page of the preface are the Nyaya, Vaiseshika, Sankhya,
Yoga, Mimamsa and Vedanta. She states that every Indian teacher has his own
system of training, which he usually keeps very secret. It is natural that he
should keep it secret, for he does not desire the responsibility of the results
that would follow if it were tried (as, if known, it certainly would be), by all
sorts of unsuitable, ill-regulated people. No real teacher in India will take
charge of a pupil unless he can have him under his eye, so that when he
prescribes for him a certain exercise, he can watch its effect and check the man
instantly if he sees that anything is going wrong. That has been the immemorial
custom in these occult matters, and unquestionably it is the only way in which
real progress can be made with rapidity and safety. The first and most difficult
task of the pupil is to reduce to order the chaos in himself—to eliminate the
16
host of minor interests, and control the wandering
thoughts, and this must be achieved by a steady pressure of the will exercised
upon all his vehicles through a long period of years.
Our author tells us that if the systems of
instruction differ on this side of the Himalayas in the esoteric schools, on
the other side they are all the same. We must emphasize here the word
esoteric, for we know that in the exoteric religion the corruptions and evil
magical practices are worse on the northern side of the mountains than on the
southern. We may perhaps even understand the expression " beyond the
Himalayas " rather in a symbolical than in a strictly geographical sense, and
many suppose that it is in the schools owing allegiance to our Masters that the
teaching does not differ. This is very true in a certain sense—-the most
important of all senses; but capable of misleading the reader if not carefully
explained. The sense in which all are the same is that all recognize the
virtuous life as the only path leading to occult development, and the conquest
of desire as the only way of getting rid of it. There are schools of occult
knowledge which hold that the virtuous life imposes unnecessary limitations.
They teach certain forms of psychic development, but they care nothing for the
use which their pupils may afterwards make of the information given to them.
There are others who hold that desire of all sorts should be indulged to the
utmost, in order that through satiety indifference may be attained. But no
school holding either of these doctrines is under the direction of the
17
Great White Brotherhood; in every establishment even
remotely connected with it, purity of life and nobleness of aim are
indispensable prerequisites.
The next paragraph in the Preface happens to contain
two of the trifling inaccuracies to which I have referred. Our author mentions "
the great mystic work called Paramartha, supposed to have been delivered to
Nagarjuna by the Nagas ". Nagarjuna's great book was not called Paramartha, but
Prajna Paramita—-the wisdom which brings to the further shore; but it is very
true that the subject treated in that book is the paramartha satya, that
consciousness of the sage which vanquishes illusion. Nagarjuna, as already
mentioned, was one of the three great Buddhist teachers of the earlier centuries
of the Christian era; he is supposed to have died A.D). 180. He is now known to
Theosophists under the name of the Master Kuthumi. Exoteric writers some-times
describe Aryasanga as his rival, but, knowing as we do their intimate relation
in an earlier birth in Greece, and now again in this present life, we see at
once that this cannot have been so. It is quite possible that, after their
death, their pupils may have tried to set up the teaching of one against that of
the other, as pupils in their undiscriminating zeal so often do; but that they
themselves were in perfect accord is shown by the fact that Aryasanga treasured
much of Nagarjuna's work and copied it into his book of extracts for the use of
his disciples.
It is not, however, certain that the Prajna Paramita
was the work of Nagarjuna, for the legend seems to be
18
to the effect that the book was delivered to him by
the Nagas or serpents. Madame Blavatsky interprets this as a name given to the
ancient Initiates, and that may well be so, though there is another very
interesting possibility. I have found that the name of Nagas or serpents was
given by the Aryans to one of the great tribes or clans of the Toltec sub-race
of the Atlanteans, because they carried before them as a standard when going
into battle a golden snake coiled round a staff. This may well have been some
totem or tribal symbol, or perhaps merely the crest of a great family. This
tribe or family must have taken a prominent part in the original Atlantean
colonization of India and the lands which then existed to the south-east of it.
We find the Nagas mentioned as among the original inhabitants of Ceylon, found
when Vijaya and his companions landed there. So a possible interpretation of
this legend might be that Nagarjuna received this book from an earlier race— in
other words, that it is an Atlantean scripture. And if, as has been suspected,
certain of the Upanishads came from the same source, there would be little
reason to wonder at the identity of teaching to which Madame Blavatsky refers on
the same page.
The Gnyaneshwari (transliterated Dhyaneshwari in the
first edition) is not a Sanskrit work, but was written in Marathi in the
thirteenth century of our era.
On the next page we find a reference to the
Yoga-charya (or more accurately Yogachara) school of the Mahayana. I have
already mentioned the attempt made by Aryasanga, but a few words should perhaps
be
19
said as to the vexed question of the Yanas. The
Buddhist Church presents itself to us to-day in two great divisions, the
Northern and the Southern. The former includes China, Japan, and Tibet; the
latter reigns in Ceylon, Siam, Burma and Cambodia. It is usually stated that the
Northern Church adopts the Mahayana and the Southern Church the Hlnayana,1 but
whether even this much may be safely said depends upon the shade of meaning
which we attach to a much-disputed word. Yana means vehicle, and it is agreed
that it is to be applied to the Dhamma or Law as the vessel which conveys us
across the sea of life to Nirvana, but there are at least five theories as to
the exact sense in which it is to be taken:
1. That it refers simply to the language in which
the Law is written, the Greater Vehicle being by this hypothesis Sanskrit,
and the Lesser Vehicle Pali—-a theory which seems to me untenable.
2. Hina may apparently be taken as signifying mean
or easy, as well as small. One interpretation therefore considers the Hinayana
as the meaner or easier road to liberation—the irreducible minimum of knowledge
and conduct required to attain it—while the Mahayana is the fuller and
more philosophical doctrine which includes much additional
knowledge about higher realms of nature. Needless to say, this
interpretation comes from a Mahayana source.
3. That Buddhism, in its unfailing courtesy
towards other religions, accepts them all as ways of liberation,
1 Usually known as Theravada.
20
though it regards the method taught by its Founder as
offering the shortest and surest route. According to this view, Buddhism is the
Mahayana, and the Hinayana includes Brahmanism, Zoroastrianism, Jainism and any
other religions which were existing at the time when the definition was
formulated.
4. That the two doctrines are simply two stages of
one doctrine—the Theravada for the Shravakas or hearers, and the
Mahayana for more advanced students.
5. That the word Yana is to be understood not
exactly in its primary sense of " vehicle," but rather in a secondary sense
nearly equivalent to the English word " career ". According to this
interpretation the Mahayana puts before a man the "grand career" of becoming a
Bodhisattva and devoting himself to the welfare of the world, while the
Theravada shows him only the "smaller career " of so living as to attain Nirvana
for himself.
The Northern and Southern Buddhist Churches are
related somewhat as are the Catholics and Protestants among the Christians. The
Northern resembles the Catholic Church. It has added to the teachings of the
Lord Buddha. For instance, it adopted much of the aboriginal worship which it
found in the country—such ceremonies as those in honour of nature-spirits or
deified forces of nature. When Christian missionaries went among the Northern
Buddhists, they found ceremonies so similar to their own that they said it was
plagiarism due to the work of the devil, and when it was conclusively proved
that these ceremonies antedated the Christian era, they said it was " plagiarism
by anticipation " !
21
In the Buddhist, as in all other scriptures, there
are contradictory statements; so the Southern Church has founded itself on
certain texts; anxious to avoid excrescences, it ignores the others, or calls
them interpolations. This has made it narrower in its scope than the Northern
Church. To take one example. The Lord Buddha preached constantly against the
idea that was evidently prevalent in his time, of the continuation of the
person-alky. That notion is common also among Christians—-that our personalities
survive to all eternity. But while he taught that nothing of all that with which
men generally identify themselves lasts for ever, he made most unequivocal
statements about the successive lives of men. He gave examples of preceding
lives; and when some King asked him what it was like to recover the memory of
former lives, he. said it was like remembering what one had done yesterday and
on preceding days when visiting this village or that. Yet the Southern Church
now teaches that only karma persists, not an ego; as though man in one life made
a certain amount of karma, and then died, and nothing was left of him, but
another person was born, and had to bear the karma which he did not make.
Still, while the Southern Buddhists teach that only
the karma survives, they speak at the same time of the attainment of Nirvana; so
that if you ask a monk why he wears the yellow robe, he will answer you: "To
attain Nirvana," and if you say: " In this life? " he will reply at once: " Oh,
no, it will need many lives." So also, after every sermon that a monk preaches
he blesses
22
his congregation with the words: '' May you attain
Nirvana "; and again, if you asked him whether they could attain it in this
life, he would say, " No, they will need many lives." So a practical belief in
the continued existence of an individual persists, in spite of the formal
teaching to the contrary.
Madame Blavatsky devotes a couple of pages to the
question of the various forms of writing adopted in the Himalayan monasteries.
In Europe and America the Roman alphabet is so widely spread, so almost
universally employed, that it is perhaps well, for the sake of our Western
readers, to explain that in the East a very different condition of affairs
prevails. Each of the numerous Oriental languages—Tamil, Telugu, Sinhalese,
Malayalam, Hindi, Gujarati, Canarese, Bengali, Burmese, Nepalese, Tibetan,
Siamese, and many others —has its own alphabet and method of writing, and a
writer in one of them, when quoting a foreign language, expresses that language
in his own characters, just as an English writer, if he had to quote a German or
Russian sentence would probably write it not in German or Russian type, but in
Roman. So that in dealing with an oriental manuscript we have always two points
to consider—the language and the script, and these two are by no means always
the same.
If I take up a palm-leaf book in Ceylon, it is almost
certain to be written in the beautiful Sinhalese script, but it does not at all
follow that it is in the Sinhalese language. It is quite as likely to be in
Pali, Sanskrit or Elu. The same is true of any of the other scripts.
23
So that when Madame Blavatsky says that the precepts
are sometimes written in Tibetan, she may very likely mean only in Tibetan
characters, and not necessarily in the Tibetan language. I have not seen any
instances of the curious cryptographs which she describes, in which colours and
animals are made to represent letters. She speaks in the same paragraph of the
thirty simple letters of the Tibetan alphabet. These are universally recognized,
but it is not clear what is meant by the reference a little later on to
thirty-three simple letters, since if she takes them without the four vowels
there are but thirty, while if the vowels are included we should of course have
not thirty-three but thirty-four. As to the compound letters, their number may
be variously stated; a grammar which is before me gives over a hundred, but
probably Madame Blavatsky refers only to those in general use.
I remember an interesting illustration of her
statement as to one of the Chinese modes of writing. When I was in Ceylon there
came one day to visit us two Buddhist monks from the interior of China—-men who
could speak no language with which any of us were acquainted. But fortunately we
had some young Japanese students staying with us, in pursuance of Colonel
Olcott's splendid scheme that each Church, the Northern and the Southern, should
send some of its neophytes to learn the ways and the teaching of the other.
These young men could not understand a word of what these Chinese monks said,
but they were able to exchange ideas with them by means of writing. The written
symbols meant the same
24
to them, though they called them by quite different
names, just as a Frenchman and an Englishman would each perfectly understand a
line of figures, although one would call them " un, deux, trois," and the other
" one, two, three ". The same is true of notes of music. Sol had a very curious
and interesting interview with these monks, at which every question which I put
was first translated into Sinhalese by one of our members, so that the Japanese
student might understand it; then the latter wrote it down with a paint-brush in
the form of writing common to Chinese and Japanese; the Chinese monk read it and
wrote his reply in the same characters, which the Japanese student then
translated into Sinhalese, and our member into English. Under these
circumstances conversation was slow and a little uncertain, but still it was an
interesting experience.
CHAPTER 2 THE HIGHER AND THE LOWER POWERS
These instructions are for those ignorant of the
dangers of the lower Iddhi.
C.W.L.—To this opening sentence of the First Fragment
there is a note by Madame Blavatsky as follows:
The Pali word Iddhi is the equivalent of the Sanskrit
Siddhis, or psychic faculties, the abnormal powers in man. There are two kinds
of Siddhis— one group which embraces the lower, coarse, psychic and mental
energies, while the other exacts the highest training of spiritual powers. Says
Krishna in Shrimad Bhagavat.
" He who is engaged in the performance of Yoga, who
has subdued his senses and who has concentrated his mind in me [Krishna], such
Yogis all the Siddhis stand ready to serve.
There is a vast amount of misunderstanding on this
subject of psychic powers, and it will save the student a great deal of trouble
if he will try to get a reasonable conception of it to begin with. First, let
him not
26
attach a wrong interpretation to the word " abnormal
" These powers are abnormal only in the sense that they are at present
uncommon—not in the least in the sense that they are in any way unnatural. They
are perfectly natural to every man—-indeed they are latent in every man here and
now; a few people have developed them from latency into activity, but the
majority have as yet made no effort in that direction, and so the powers still
remain dormant.
The simplest way to grasp the general idea is to
remember that man is a soul, and that he manifests himself on various planes
through bodies appropriate to those planes. If he wishes to act, to see or to
hear in this physical world, he can do so only through a body made of physical
matter. Similarly if he wishes to manifest in the astral world, he must have an
astral vehicle, for the physical body is useless there and even invisible, just
as the astral body is invisible to our physical sight. In the same way a man who
wishes to live upon the mental plane must use his mental body.
To develop psychic faculty means to learn to use the
senses of these different bodies. If a man can use only his physical senses, he
can see and hear only things of this physical world; if he learns to use the
senses of his astral body, he can see and hear the things of the astral world as
well. It is merely a matter of learning to respond to additional vibrations. If
you will look at the table of vibrations in any book of physics, you will see
that a large number of them evoke no response from us. A certain number appeal
to our ears, and we hear them
27
as waves of sound; another set impress themselves
upon our eyes, and we call them rays of light. But in between these two sets,
and above and below them both, are thousands of other sets of oscillations that
make no impression at all upon our physical senses. It is possible for a man so
to develop himself as to become sensitive to all these undulations of the ether,
and of matter even finer than the ether; we call a man who has done that
clairvoyant or clairaudient, because he can see and hear more than the
undeveloped man can.
The advantages of such an unfolding of the inner
sight are considerable. The man who possesses it finds himself free of another
and far wider world; or to speak more accurately, he finds that the world in
which he has always lived has extensions and possibilities of all kinds of which
he has previously known nothing. His studies may already have informed him of
the presence all round him of a vast and complicated non-physical life—of
kingdoms of devas and nature-spirits, of the enormous army of his fellow-men who
have laid aside their dense bodies in sleep or in death, of forces and
influences of many sorts which can be evoked and used by those who understand
them; but to see all these things for himself instead of merely believing in
them, to be able to contact them at firsthand and experiment with them—all this
makes life far fuller and more interesting. He who can thus follow on higher
planes the results of his thought and action, becomes thereby a more efficient
and more useful person. The gain of such an unfoldment of consciousness is
obvious; but what of the other side
28
of the story ? Madame Blavatsky writes of the dangers
of this development, and of two kinds of it, a lower and a higher. Let us take
this latter point first.
All information which reaches man from without comes
to him by means of vibrations. Vibrations of the air convey sounds to the ears,
while those of light bring sights to his eyes. If he sees things and creatures
of the astral and mental worlds, it can only be through the impingement of
vibrations of astral and mental matter upon the bodies respectively capable of
responding to them. For man can see the astral world only through the senses of
his astral body, and the mental world through those of his mental body.
In each of these worlds, as in this, there are
coarser and finer types of matter, and, roughly speaking, the radiations of the
finer types are desirable, while those of the coarser kinds are distinctly
undesirable. A man has both kinds of matter in his astral body, and he is
therefore capable of responding to both the higher and the lower vibrations; and
it is for him to choose to which of them he will turn his attention. If he
resolutely shuts out all the lower influences, and accepts only the higher, he
may be greatly helped by them even at astral and mental levels. But Madame
Blavatsky will have none of these—not even as temporary aids; she groups them
all together as " lower, coarse, psychic and mental energies " and urges us to
sweep onward to far higher planes which are beyond the illusions of the
personality. She evidently regards the dangers of ordinary psychic development
as outweighing its advantages; but as a
29
certain amount of this development is sure to come,
in the course of the evolution of the disciple, she warns us of some points as
to which extreme care is necessary.
In our own experience during the forty years that
have elapsed since Madame Blavatsky wrote this, we have seen something of these
dangers in cases of various students. Pride is the first of them, and it bulks
very largely. The possession of a faculty which, though it is the heritage of
the whole human race, is as yet manifested only very occasionally, often causes
the ignorant clairvoyant to feel himself (or still more frequently herself)
exalted above his fellows, chosen by the Almighty for some mission of world-wide
importance, dowered with a discernment that can never err, selected under
angelic guidance to be the founder of a new dispensation, and so on. It should
be remembered that there are always plenty of sportive and mischievous entities
on the other side of the veil who are ready and even anxious to foster all such
delusions, to reflect and embody all such thoughts, and to fill whatever role of
archangel or spirit-guide may happen to be suggested to them. Unfortunately it
is so fatally easy to persuade the average man that he really is a very fine
fellow at bottom, and quite worthy to be the recipient of a special revelation,
even though his friends have through blindness or prejudice somehow failed
hitherto to appreciate him.
Another danger, perhaps the greatest of all, because
it is the mother of all others, is ignorance. If the clairvoyant knows anything
of the history of his subject, if
30
he at all understands the conditions of those other
planes into which his vision is penetrating, he cannot of course suppose himself
the only person who was ever so highly favoured, nor can he feel with
self-complacent certainty that it is impossible for him to mistake. But when he
is, as so many are, in the densest ignorance as to history, conditions and
everything else, he is liable in the first place to make all kinds of mistakes
as. to what he sees, and secondly to be the easy prey of all sorts of designing
and deceptive entities from the astral plane. He has no criterion by which to
judge what he sees, or thinks he sees, no test to apply to his visions or
communications, and so he has no sense of relative proportion or the fitness of
things, and he magnifies a copy-book maxim into a fragment of divine wisdom, a
platitude of the most ordinary type into an angelic message. Then again, for
want of common knowledge on scientific subjects he will often utterly
misunderstand what his faculties enable him to perceive, and he will in
consequence gravely promulgate the grossest absurdities.
The third danger is that of impurity. The man who is
pure in thought and life, pure in intention and free from the taint of
selfishness, is by that very fact guarded from the influence of undesirable
entities from other planes. There is in him nothing upon which they can play; he
is no fit medium for them. On the other hand all good influences naturally
surround such a man, and hasten to use him as a channel through which they may
act, and thus a still further barrier is erected about him against all which is
mean and low and evil. The man
31
of" impure life or motive, on the contrary,
inevitably attracts to himself all that is worst in the invisible world which so
closely surrounds us; he responds readily to it, while it will be hardly
possible for the forces of good to make any impression upon him.
But a clairvoyant who will bear in mind all these
dangers, and strive to avoid them, who will take the trouble to study the
history and the rationale of clairvoyance, who will see to it that his heart is
humble and his motives are pure—'Such a man may assuredly learn very much from
these powers of which he finds himself in possession, and may make them of the
greatest use to him in the work which he has to do.
The siddhis are enumerated at considerable length in
the third chapter of the Toga Sutras of Patanjali. He speaks of them as being
attained in five ways—by birth, by drugs, by mantras, by tapas, and by samadhi.
We have come to birth in a particular kind of body as
the result of our actions in previous incarnations, and if we find ourselves by
nature in the possession of psychic powers we may take it for granted that we
have worked for them in some way in previous lives. Many clairvoyants of the
present day, in whom the faculty has been easily awakened, but perhaps reaches
no great heights of spirituality, have been in such positions as those of the
vestal virgins of Greece and Rome, the minor yogis of India, or even the
medicine-men of various half-savage tribes or the "wise women" of the middle
ages; there has always been a very wide range in these matters.
32
What will happen to such people, how their spiritual
lives will be shaped, depends largely upon those with whom it is their karma to
come into contact. If that karma is good enough to lead them to Theosophy, they
will have the opportunity of learning something about these dawning faculties,
and of being trained in its Esoteric School in the preliminary qualities of
character and purity of physical and magnetic life that are prescribed by all
true occultists, so that a little later on they may develop their psychic powers
in safety, and become of great service to mankind.
If on the other hand they come into touch with the
spiritualistic school of thought, they are quite likely to find themselves
following a line which frequently results in passive mediumship, the very
opposite of what we are trying to attain.
There are those who turn to pseudo-occultism for the
attainment of magical powers in order to gratify personal ambition. That path is
full of the most serious dangers. Sometimes such people sit in a passive
condition and invite unknown entities of the astral world to work upon their
auras and organisms and to adapt them to their purposes; sometimes they practise
various forms of Hatha-yoga, consisting mainly of peculiar kinds of breathing,
which have unfortunately been widely taught in the Western world in recent
years. As a result of such proceedings mental and bodily disorders of a serious
character often arise, while at best the contact which is gained with the inner
worlds seldom extends beyond the lower astral
33
levels, from which nothing can come that is uplifting
to mankind.
As to the second method—-the use of drugs—there is a
note by Vyasa, in his commentary upon the Yoga Sutras, to the effect that these
are used " in the houses of the asuras " for the purpose of awakening the
siddhis. The asuras are the opposite of the suras, and the word may roughly be
translated as " the ungodly "; the suras are the beings on God's side, those who
work for His plan of upward-evolving life.
Patanjali does not recommend this method; he is
merely enumerating the ways in which the siddhis can be acquired. A study of the
Sutras shows very clearly that he favours only the last of his list of five
methods— that by means of samadhi or contemplation.
We can understand to some extent the action of drugs
on the body, when they are used as a means of awakening psychic powers, if we
remember that in the fourth root race clairvoyance through the sympathetic
nervous system was quite common. Then the astral sheath, not yet properly
organized into a body or vehicle of consciousness, responded in a general way to
the impressions made upon it by the objects of the astral plane. Those
impressions were then reflected in the sympathetic centres in the physical body,
so that consciousness in that body received astral and physical impressions
together, and often scarcely distinguished between them. Indeed, in the earlier
days of that race, and in the Lemurian race, the activity of the sympathetic
system was far greater than that of the cerebro-spinal system, so that the
astral
34
experiences were more prominent than the physical.
But since then the cerebro-spinal system has become the dominant mechanism of
consciousness in the physical body, and man in consequence has paid more and
more attention to the physical-plane experiences, as they have grown stronger
and more insistent. Therefore the sympathetic system as a purveyor of
impressions has gradually lapsed, its business now being to carry on in an
involuntary manner many bodily functions to which the man need not attend,
because his life is mental, emotional and spiritual rather than physical.
The objection to the use of drugs, therefore, is not
only that they upset the healthy working of the body and bring the sympathetic
system once more into a prominence which it ought not to have, but even from the
point of view of the psychic powers attained they merely re-awaken that system
and bring again into the physical consciousness indiscriminate impressions from
the astral world. These come generally from the lower part of the plane, in
which are aggregated all the astral matter and all the elemental essence
concerned with exciting the lower passions and impulses. Sometimes they come
from slightly higher regions of sensuous delight, such as are described in the
visions of the Count of Monte Cristo in Dumas' famous novel, or in De Quincy's
Confessions of an Opium Eater; but these are scarcely better than the others.
All that is entirely contrary to the plan of
evolution laid down for humanity. We are all intended to unfold clairvoyance and
other cognate powers, but not in that
35
\way. First there should be a development of the
astral and mental bodies, so that they may be definite vehicles of consciousness
on their own planes; then may come the awakening of the chakras in the etheric
double by means of which the valuable knowledge gained through those higher
bodies may be brought down to the physical plane consciousness. But all this
should be done only when and as the Master advises; remember, in At the Feet of
the Master the Teacher said: "Have no desire for psychic powers."
The third method mentioned is by the use of mantras.
The term mantra is applied to certain words of power which are used in
meditation or in ceremonial rites, and are often repeated over and over again.
These are to be found in Christian rituals as well as in the East, as has been
explained in The Science of the Sacraments. In many religions sounds are thus
used, and are associated with pictures, symbols, signs and gestures, and
sometimes dances.
The term tapas, used to describe the fourth method,
is often associated with ideas of extreme austerity and even self-torture, such
as the method of holding the arm extended until it withers, or lying on a bed of
spikes. These practices certainly develop the will, but there are other and
better ways of doing that. These Hatha Yoga schemes have the great demerit of
making the physical body useless for that service of humanity which is above all
other things important for the Master's work. The will may be just as
effectively developed in dealing with the difficulties of life that come to us
by nature
36
and through karma; there is no necessity
to make trouble.
In the Gita Shri Krishna speaks strongly against this
superstition. He says, " The men who perform severe austerities, which are not
prescribed by the Scriptures, wedded to vanity and egoism, impelled by the force
of their desires and passions., unintelligent, tormenting the aggregated
elements forming the body, and Me also, seated in the inner body—know these as
asuric in their resolves." Such antics cannot be the real tapas. The word means
literally " heat," and perhaps the nearest English equivalent to that when it is
applied to human conduct is " effort ". The real meaning of the teaching with
regard to it seems to be: " Do for the body what you know to be good for it,
disregarding mere comfort. Do not let laziness, selfishness, or indifference
stand in the way of your doing what you can to make your personality healthy and
efficient in the work that it ought to be doing in the world." 2 Shri Krishna
says in the Gita'. " Reverence to the Gods, the elders, the teachers and the
wise, purity, straightforwardness, continence and harmlessness are the tapas of
the body; speech truthful, pleasant and beneficial, and study of the sacred
words are the tapas of speech; cheerfulness, balance, silence, self-control, and
being true to oneself are the tapas of mind." 3 These descriptions, given by one
whom most of the Hindus regard as the greatest incarnation of
1 Op. cit., xvii, 5-6.
2 See Raja Yoga, by Ernest Wood.
8 -Op. cit., xvii, 14-16.
37
Deity, certainly do not indicate any of the dreadful
developments of which we sometimes see such sad examples.
It is the fifth means, that of samadhi, that the Book
of the Golden Precepts advocates, and, as in the Toga Sutras and other standard
works of the kind, this is preceded by dharana and dhyana, which are commonly
translated as concentration and meditation, while samadhi is interpreted as
contemplation. These one-word translations from the Sanskrit are, however, often
rather unsatisfactory; the Sanskrit words, coming down to us through the ages,
have acquired a marvellous complexity, have added to themselves many fine shades
of meaning which are not to be found in any modern English expression. The only
way really to understand them is to study the terms in their context in the
ancient books.
The siddhis may be divided into two classes, not only
as higher and lower, but also as faculties and powers. The world acts upon us
through the senses, through our faculties of sight, hearing and the rest; but we
also act upon the world. This duality applies also with regard to super-physical
accomplishments. We receive impressions through the newly unfolded powers of our
astral and mental vehicles; but we can also act through them. It is usual in
Hindu books to speak of eight siddhis: (1) anima, the power to put oneself in
the position of an atom, to become so small as to be able to deal with that tiny
thing; (2) mahima, the power to be as if of monstrous size, so as to deal with
huge things at no disadvantage; (3) laghima, the power to become as light as
38
cotton borne on the wind; (4) garima, the power to
become as dense and heavy as anything can be; (5) prapti, the power of reaching
out, even as far as the moon; (6) prakamya, the will power with which to realize
all wishes and desires; (7) ishatwa, the power to control and create; and (8)
vashitwa, the power of command over all objects. These are called " the great
powers ", but others are mentioned, such as steadiness and effulgence in the
body, control of the senses and appetites, beauty and gracefulness, and so on.
We students of these later days approach all these
problems from a point of view so totally different from that of the Hindu
writers of thousands of years ago, that it is sometimes difficult for us to
understand them. We are the product of our age, and the quasi-scientific
training through which we all pass makes it a mental necessity for us to try to
classify our knowledge. Each man endeavours to build for himself some kind of
scheme of things, however crude it may be, and when any new fact is presented to
him he tries to find a niche in his scheme for it. If it fits in comfortably he
accepts the fact; if he cannot make it fit in, he is quite likely to reject it,
even though it may come to him with the weightiest evidence. Though some people
seem capable of holding, quite happily, beliefs which are mutually
contradictory, there are others who cannot do this, and it is often a painful
process for them to reconstruct their thought-edifice to admit a new fact—-so
painful that they not infrequently avoid it by conveniently forgetting or
denying the fact. Our ancient Indian brethren seem to me
39
to have catalogued their observations and left them
there —-to have made no special attempt to relate them to one another or to
classify them by the planes on which they occurred or the kind of faculty which
they required.
We have no difficulty in recognizing the first and
second powers on this list of siddhis; they are instances of the alteration of
the focus of the consciousness; we sometimes call them powers of magnification
and reduction. They mean the adaptation of the consciousness to the objects with
which it has to deal—a feat which presents no difficulty to the trained
occultist, though it is not easy on the physical plane to explain exactly how it
is done. The third and fourth mention the possibility of becoming light or heavy
at will; this is achieved by the comprehension and use of the repulsive force
which is the opposite of gravity. I am not so sure about the fifth; it may refer
merely to the power of travelling in the astral body, since the limit of astral
migration is indicated by the mention of the moon; but I rather suspect that it
means the power of producing a definite result at a distance by 'an effort of
will. The sixth and eighth are only developments of will-power, though very
remarkable developments; the seventh is the same, with the addition of the
special knowledge required for the dematerialization and rematerialization of
objects. In this list there seems to be no direct reference to clairvoyance at
all, either in space or in time.
It is to be noted that The Voice of the Silence does
not say that the lower iddhis, those belonging to the astral and mental bodies,
are to be neglected altogether;
40
it merely points out that there are serious dangers
connected with them. We shall have to deal with them a little further on, for he
who would climb the ladder must step on every rung.
He who would hear the voice of Nada, the " Sound-less
sound," and comprehend it, he has to learn the nature of Dharana.
To this there are two footnotes, as follows:
The " Soundless Voice," or the " Voice of the
Silence." Literally perhaps this would read " Voice in the Spiritual Sound,'''
as Nada is the equivalent word in Sanskrit for the Senzar term.
Dharana is the intense and perfect concentration of
the mind upon some one interior object, accompanied by complete abstraction from
everything pertaining to the external universe, or the world of the senses.
The word that is here translated concentration comes
from the root dhri, to hold. The word dharana, with a short final vowel, means
holding or supporting in general, but here we have a special feminine
substantive, with the long terminal vowel, as a technical term signifying
concentration or holding of the mind.
It is described in some places as a kind of pondering
or dwelling upon a given thought or object, and it is said in the Hindu books
that meditation and contemplation will not be successful unless this is
practised first. It is obvious that while the mind is responding to
41
the appeals of the physical, astral and lower mental
planes, it is not likely to hear the message that the ego is trying to transmit
to the personality from his own higher planes.
Concentration is requisite, that attention may be
given to the chosen object, not to the restless activity of the lower vehicles.
It is usual to begin the practice of concentration with simple things. On a
certain occasion some people came to Madame Blavatsky, and asked her upon what
they should meditate; she threw a matchbox down on the table, and said: "
Meditate on that! " It startled them somewhat, because they had expected her to
tell them to meditate upon Parabrahman or the Absolute. It is very important
that this concentration should be done without strain to the body. Dr. Besant
has told us that, when Madame Blavatsky first instructed her to try it, she
began with great intensity; but her teacher interrupted her, saying: " My dear,
you do not meditate with your blood-vessels! " '
What is required is to hold the mind quiet, so that
one looks at the object of thought with perfect calmness, just as one would look
at one's watch 'to see the time, except that one keeps on looking for the length
of time prescribed or decided upon for the period of concentration. People often
complain of headaches and other pains as a result of meditation; there should
never be any such result; if they will take care to keep the physical body calm
and free from tension of any kind, even in the eyes, they will probably find
their concentration much easier and more successful, and free from
42
physical trouble and danger. Various books have been
written on this subject, and some of them offer exceedingly dangerous
suggestions. Anyone wishing further information on this should read Professor
Wood's book, Concentration—-a Practical Course, of which Dr. Besant wrote: ''
There is nothing in it which, when practised, can do the striver after
concentration the least physical, mental or moral harm."
In her footnote, H.P.B. associates dharana with the
higher mental plane, for she says the mind must be fixed upon an interior object
and abstracted from the world of the senses; that is, from the physical, astral
and lower mental worlds. That is a prescription for the candidate who is already
on the Path, and is aiming at the samadhi of the nirvanic or atmic plane. But
the three terms concentration, meditation and contemplation are also used in a
general way. To fix one's thought on a verse of scripture—-that is
concentration. To look at it in every possible light and try to penetrate its
meaning, to reach a new and deep thought or receive some intuitional light upon
it—that is meditation. To fix one's attention steadily for a time on the light
received—• that is contemplation. Contemplation has been defined as
concentration at the top end of your line of thought or meditation. It is usual
for the Oriental student to begin his practice on some simple external object,
and from that to carry his thought inward or upward to higher things.
CHAPTER s THE SLAYER OF THE REAL
Having become indifferent to objects of perception,
the pupil must seek out the Raja of the senses, the Thought-Producer, he who
awakes illusion.
The Mind is the great Slayer of the Real. Let the
Disciple slay the slayer.
This refers to what has to be done during the
practice of concentration. In the Hindu books on the subject it is explained
that prior to the actual concentration the student who sits for the practice
must withdraw his attention from the objects of sensation; he must learn to take
no notice of any sights or sounds that may come within his range; he must not be
attracted by anyone or anything that comes within his view, or affects his sense
of touch. He will then be ready to observe what thoughts and feelings rise in
the mind itself, and to deal with them.
As I have already explained, in most persons the
mental and astral bodies are in a constant state of activity, full of vortices,
which must be removed before real progress can be made. It is these that create
the mass
44
of illusions which beset the average man, and render
it exceedingly difficult for him to get a true view of anything at all. It is an
axiom of Shri Shankaracharya's teaching that just as the physical eye can see
things well when it is steady, but not when it is roaming about, so the mind can
understand things clearly when it is still. But if it is full of vortices they
are sure to distort the vision and so create illusion.
The mind is called the raja or king of the senses.
Sometimes it is spoken of as one of them, as in the Gild:
A portion of Mine own Self transformed in the world
of life into an immortal Spirit, draweth round itself the senses, of which the
mind is the sixth, veiled in matter.1
That the mind does act as a kind of sense is obvious,
since it corrects the evidence of the five senses and also indicates the
presence of objects beyond their reach; for example, when a shadow falls across
your threshold, you may infer that somebody is there.
What is the mind, that has to be dealt with so
severely by the aspirant? Patanjali speaks of it when he defines yoga practice
as chitta-vritti-nirodha, which means restraint (nirodha) of the whirlpools
(vritti) of the mind (chitta). Among the Vedantins, or in Shri Shankaracharya's
school, the term antahkarana is not used as we generally employ it, but
indicates the mind in its fullest sense. It means with, them literally the
entire internal organ or instrument between the innermost Self and the outer
world, and is always described as of
1 Op. cit., v, 7.
45
four parts: the "I-maker" (ahamkara); insight,
intuition or pure reason (buddhi); thought (manas); and discrimination of
objects (chitta). It is these last two that the Western man usually calls his
mind, with its powers of abstract and concrete thought; when he thinks of the
other processes he imagines them to be something above the mind.
The Theosophist ought to recognize in these four
Vedantic divisions his own familiar atma, buddhi, manas and the lower mind.
Madame Blavatsky called the last kama-manas, because it is the part of manas
that works with desire and is therefore interested in material objects. Kama is
to be taken not only as relating to low desires and passions, but also to any
sort of desire or interest in the external world for its own sake. The whole of
the triple higher self is from this point of view nothing but the antahkarana
(or internal agency) between the monad and the lower self. It has become a
tetrad, because manas is dual in incarnation.
The three parts of the higher self are considered as
three aspects of a great consciousness or mind; they are all modes of cognition.
Atma is not the Self, but is this consciousness knowing the Self; buddhi is this
consciousness knowing the life in the forms by its own direct perception; manas
is the same consciousness looking out upon the world of objects, and kama-manas
is a portion of the last immersed in that world and affected by it. The true
self is the Monad, whose life is something greater than consciousness, which is
the life of this complete mind, the Higher Self. Therefore
46
Patanjali and Shankara are quite in agreement; it is
the chitta, the kama-manas, the lower mind, which is the slayer of the real, and
has to be slain.
Much that is now called the astral body by
Theosophists must be included in the Indian idea of kama-manas or chitta. Madame
Blavatsky also speaks of four divisions of the mind. First there is
manas-taijasi, the resplendent or illuminated manas, which is really buddhi, or
at least that state of man when his manas has become merged in buddhi, having no
separate will of its own. Then there is manas proper, the higher manas, the
abstract thinking mind. Then there is the antahkarana, a term used by Madame
Blavatsky merely to indicate the link or channel or bridge between higher manas
and kama-manas during incarnation. Finally there is kama-manas, which is on this
theory the personality.
Sometimes she calls manas the deva-ego, or the divine
as distinguished from the personal self. Higher manas is divine because it has
positive thought, which is kriya-shakti, the power of doing things. Really all
our work is done by thought-power; the sculptor's hand does not do the work, but
thought-power directing that hand does it. The higher manas is divine because it
is a positive thinker, using the quality of its own life, which shines from
within it; that is what is meant by the word divine, from div, to shine. But the
lower mind is only a reflector; like all other material things, it has no light
of its own; it is something through which the light comes, or through which the
sound comes—merely persona, a mask.
THE SLAYER OF THE REAL 47
The antahkarana is usually considered in the
Theosophical works as the link between the higher self or the divine ego, and
the lower self or personal ego The chitta in that lower self puts it at the
mercy of things, so that our life down here may be compared to the experience of
a man struggling to swim in a maelstrom. But this will be followed sooner or
later after death by a period in the heaven-world. The man has been whirled
about; he has seen many things; he has not dwelt upon them, however, with a
calm, steady mind, but with kama-manas; therefore he has not understood their
significance for the soul. But in the heaven-world the ego can widen out the
antahkarana, because all is now calm; no new experiences are to be gathered. The
old ones can be quietly turned over and dwelt upon, and their essence taken up,
as it were, into the deva ego, as being of interest to him. So, very often, the
ego really begins his personal life-cycle with the entry into the heaven-world,
and pays a minimum of attention to the personality during its period of
collecting materials.
In that case the aspect of mind that is antahkarana
(in Madame Blavatsky's classification) functions but little before the period of
the heaven-life. But if a man is to become expert on the astral and mental
planes during the life of the physical body, he must bring the positive powers
of the higher Self down through that channel, by the practice of dharana or
concentration, and so make himself entire master of his personality. In other
words he must clear out the astral and mental whirlpools. A man who is genius on
some line may find
48
it easy to apply tremendous concentration to his
particular kind of work, but when he relaxes from that, his ordinary life may
quite possibly be still full of these whirlpools. That is not what we want; we
are aiming at nothing less than the complete destruction of the whirlpools, so
as to comb out the lower mind and make it the calm and obedient servant of the
higher Self at all times.
These whirlpools may and do constantly crystallize
into permanent prejudices, and make actual congestions of matter closely
resembling warts upon the mental body. Then if the man tries to look out through
that particular part of that body he cannot see clearly; everything is
distorted, for at that point the mental matter is no longer living and flowing,
but stagnant and rotten. The way to cure it is to acquire more knowledge, to get
the matter into motion again, and then one by one the prejudices will be washed
away and dissolved.
It is in this way that the mind is the great slayer
of the real, for through it we do not see any object as it really is. We see
only the images which we are able to make of it, and everything is necessarily
coloured for us by these thought-forms of our own creation. Notice how two
persons with preconceived ideas, seeing the same set of circumstances, and
agreeing as to the actual happenings, will yet make two totally different
stories from them. Exactly this sort of thing is going on all the time with
every ordinary man, and we do not realize how absurdly we distort things. The
disciple must conquer this; he must " slay the slayer ". He must
49
not of course destroy his mind, for. he cannot get
along without it, but he must dominate it; it is his, but it is not he, though
it tries to make him think so. The best way to overcome its wandering is to use
the will; its efforts are just like those of the astral body, which is always
trying to persuade you that its desires are yours; you must deal with them both
in a precisely similar manner.
Even when the whirlpools that fill the mind with
prejudice and error are gone, much illusion still remains. The translation of
the Sanskrit word avidya as ignorance is perhaps not very fortunate, though it
is universally accepted. So often in Sanskrit there are delicate shades of
meaning which it is difficult to convey in English. In this case perhaps what is
intended is rot so much ignorance as unwisdom. A man may have vast stores of
knowledge, and yet be unwise, for knowledge is concerned with objects and their
relations in space and time, whereas wisdom is concerned with the soul or
consciousness embodied in those things. The wise politician understands the
people's minds; the wise mother understands her children's minds. However much
one may know about material things, if one has only the matter-sight and not the
life-sight, one has in reality only unwisdom or avidya. "It is at the expense of
wisdom that intellect generally lives," said Madame Blavatsky. Then, out of that
unwisdom or ignorance spring four other great obstacles to spiritual progress,
making five altogether, which are called the kleshas.
50
If avidya be the first obstacle the second is asmita,
the notion that " I am this " or what a Master once called " self-personality".
The personality is developed through life into quite a definite thing, with
decided physical, astral and mental form, occupation and habits; and there is no
objection to that if it be a good specimen. But if the indwelling life can be
persuaded to think that he is that personality, he will begin to serve its
interests, instead of using it merely as -a tool for his spiritual purposes.
In consequence of this second error men seek
inordinate wealth and power and fame. When a man looks over his country houses
and his town houses, his yachts and cars, his farms and factories, he swells
with pride; thinking himself great because he is called the owner of these
things; or he hears his name on everybody's lips, and feels that thousands of
people are thinking of him with praise (or even with condemnation, for notoriety
is often pleasing to men who cannot attain fame) and he thinks himself a very
great person indeed. That is " self-personality ", one of the greatest
superstitions in the world, and a great source of trouble for one and all. The
spiritual man, on the other hand, counts himself fortunate if he can be the
master of his own hand and brain, and he wishes to hold the images of thousands
of others in his own mind that he may help them, rather than to rejoice in the
thought that his image is multiplied and magnified in their minds. Hence
self-personality is the greatest obstacle to the use of the personality by the
higher Self, and so to spiritual progress.
51
The third and fourth obstacles may be taken together.
They are raga. and dwesha, liking and disliking, or attraction and repulsion.
These too spring from this same self-personality. That it should show its likes
is inappropriate; it is as though a motor-car should have a voice of its own,
and should raise it in great discontent when its master drives over a broken
road, or in a purr of delight when he goes over a good road. The road may be a
bad one for the car, but from the point of view of the driver it is a good thing
that there is a road at all, because he wants to get somewhere, which would be a
difficult matter without a road. It is nice to have our armchairs and fires and
electric light and steam heat, but he who would make progress has to go over new
country, sometimes materially, and always in thought and feeling. People like
the things that consort with their settled conveniences and habits; anything
that disturbs those is " bad "; anything that fits in with them and enhances
them is " good ". Such an outlook upon life does not harmonize with spiritual
progress; we do not refuse comfort when it comes, but we must learn to be
indifferent to it, and to take things as they come: this emphasis upon liking
and disliking must go, and the calm judgment of the higher Self as to what is
good and what is bad must take its place.
The fifth obstacle is abhinivesha, the outcome of the
last, the state of being fixed, settled in, attached to a form or mode of life,
or to the personality. From this arises fear of old age and of death—events
which can never exist for the man himself, but must come in due
52
course to the personality. A veritable death in life
may arise out this of fifth trouble; people -waste their youth in preparation
for comfort and safety in age,- and then waste their age in seeking for their
lost youth, or are afraid to use their bodies, lest they should wear out. They
are like a man who buys a beautiful motor-car, and sits in his garage, enjoying
his new possession, but unable to bring himself to run it out on the road, lest
it should be spoiled. Our business is to do what the higher Self wants, and to
be utterly willing to die in his service if need be.
All the whirlpools arise from these five obstacles.
Concentration and meditation are the means to dispel them completely. When the
kama-manas no longer gravitates downwards, the manas can turn upwards, to become
manas-taijasi.
Another Sanskrit word connected with this
self-personality is mana, sometimes translated pride, but perhaps better
rendered by conceit. This root appears in the word nirmanakaya, which means a
being who is beyond this illusion—nirmana. Madame Blavatsky said that there were
three kinds or modes of incarnation: first, that of the avatar as, those who
descend from higher spheres, having reached them in a cycle of evolution prior
to ours; secondly, those of an ordinary kind, when a person passes through the
astral and mental worlds and then takes up a new body; and thirdly, that of
nirmanakayas, who incarnate again without interlude, sometimes perhaps after
only a few days. In The Secret Doctrine she cites the Cardinal de Cusa as an
53
instance of this, he having been born again quickly,
as Copernicus; and she says that such rapid rebirth is not an uncommon thing.
She speaks of such people as adepts, not using the word quite as we employ it
now, but meaning that they are adept or expert on the astral and lower mental
planes; she says that they sometimes act as spirits at seances, and that they
are particularly opposed by the Brothers of the Shadow, presumably because of
the progress that they are making for themselves and also for mankind in
general.
She explains that there are two kinds of
nirmana-kayas: those who have renounced the heaven-world, as above explained,
and those who at a later and higher stage renounce what she calls absolute
Nirvana, in order to remain to help the progress of the world. Modern
Theosophical literature confines the term to this latter class, but here we are
concerned with the lower class. The man who has slain the slayer has largely
destroyed the five obstacles, and has become the servant of the higher Self,
with nothing in him but what is favourable to its purposes. He has his
antahkarana widened out so that during his bodily life he is in full touch with
the higher Self, and all the time that self is taking what it needs; the bee can
visit the flower when he will, for there is no storm raging: and when the
physical body is dead, the subtle part of the personality can be used again in
the next incarnation, because it is not full of whirlpools which represent fixed
desires and rigid opinions, and selfish habits of feeling and thought.
CHAPTER 4 THE REAL AND THE UNREAL
For when to himself his form appears unreal, as do on
waking all the forms he sees in dreams; when he has ceased to hear the many, he
may discern the One—the inner sound which kills the outer.
C.W.L.—The simile of dreaming and waking is
frequently used in Oriental philosophy. It has its use, but we must take care
that it does not lead us into a misapprehension. When we wake from an ordinary
dream we realize that our senses have been deceived, that what we thought at the
time to be a real experience was in truth nothing of the kind. But this is not
exactly what happens when we wake to a perception of spiritual reality. We
awaken to a higher and broader life; we perceive for the first time the crushing
yet entirely unsuspected limitations under which we have hitherto been living.
But that does not mean that our life before that time was nothing but a useless
deception. The awakening to higher things causes our previous state of mind to
appear irrational, but, after all, it was only relatively so. We were acting
then according to our lights, upon such information as we had; now we have so
much
55
more that all our lines of thought and action are
completely changed.
Even the Vedantist does not deny that this physical
plane dream of ours has its value for the production of enlightenment. A man may
dream that a snake is threatening him, and be much alarmed thereby; at last in
his dream the snake strikes him, and with that shock he wakes, and is much
relieved to find that the whole experience was an illusion. Yet it was the blow
of the illusory snake that awoke him to a more real life. Similarly, in the
Gild, Shri Krishna tells His pupil that wisdom is better than worldly goods,
because, He says, " All actions in their entirety culminate in wisdom." 1 That
great Teacher did not deprecate a life of activity, but encouraged it to the
utmost; yet He said that one should not be attached to the activities and the
things with which they deal, but should seek only the wisdom that can be
obtained from them. It is in the wisdom that man has his own true being, as he
is a part of the Logos. If he listens to the voice of wisdom he will become
increasingly the master of himself and his life; the inner sound will thus put a
stop to the outer clamour which directs the feverish activities of ordinary men.
It is very true that a man should cease to give his
attention to the many things which surround and play upon him, and should turn
it inwards to the one witness of all these things; but he is not entirely free
to do this until he has fully performed his dharma in the outer world. Any man
at any time, whatever his duties may
1 Op. cit., iv, 33.
56
be, may set his affection upon things above, and not
upon things of the earth. But he may not be at liberty to devote his whole life
to higher work until he has satisfied the demands of the karma which he has made
in past lives, or in the earlier part of his present life. He may certainly feel
vairagya, but while any physical duties Still remain to him, he must retain
sufficient interest in them to do them as perfectly as they can be done.
If his desire for liberation is strong enough, and
unless his karma places some insuperable obstacle in his way, he will probably
find that the path to freedom will soon open before him. I myself had an
experience of that kind; I received a, message from my Master offering me
certain opportunities which I most thankfully accepted. But if that gracious
offer had been made a little earlier, I should have been unable to accept it,
because I should not have been free; there lay upon me a clear duty which I
could not possibly have neglected.
Vairagya has two parts; there is the apara or lower
vairagya, and the para or higher vairagya.
There are three stages in the abandonment of
attachment to external things. First, the man becomes tired of the things which
used to give him pleasure, yet he is sorry that he is tired of them; he desires
still to enjoy them, but he cannot. Then, because of that satiety, he seeks
elsewhere for satisfaction. Finally, when he has caught a clear glimpse of the
higher things his spiritual desires awaken, and they prove so attractive to him
that he thinks of the others no more. Or else, having learnt of the existence of
the higher things and decided to follow
57
them, he in the second stage either sets himself to
observe the defects of the lower things, so as to create a sort of artificial
disgust for them, or he fixes his will in rigid determination to reject their
attractiveness and starve out desire for them. Finally, as in the former case,
perhaps only after many fluctuations, the man sees the higher; he hears the
inner sound which kills the outer. Then he has the higher vairagya.
In the middle stage of struggle, it often happens
that the man conceives a positive repugnance for the things of his erst-while
pleasure; that is usually a sign that he has only recently escaped from bondage
to them and he still fears their attractiveness; he feels that he is liable to
be tainted by their proximity, so he shudders and avoids them, or he attacks and
tries to destroy them with unreasoning vehemence. All these different aspects of
the second stage are forms of the lower vairagya.
Then only, not till then, shall he forsake the region
of Asat, the false, to come onto the realm of Sat, the true.
Let us be careful here not to misunderstand. Many
have supposed that this passage implies that the lower planes are mere illusion,
but that is by no means what is intended. I have already written on the real and
the unreal and have explained that each plane is real to the consciousness which
functions upon it.1 What is true is that until a man is able to hear the inner
voice and to look upon life from the standpoint of the higher planes
1 " The Occult Path and the Interests of the World "
in the first Volume of Talks on the Path of Occultism.
58
he has no real grasp of the truth which lies behind
all this complexity of manifestation that surrounds us.
Before the Soul can see, die harmony within must be
attained, and fleshly eyes be rendered blind to all illusion.
Before the Soul can hear, the image (man) has to
become as deaf to roarings as to whispers, to cries of bellowing elephants as to
the silvery buzzing of the golden fire-fly.
Before the Soul can comprehend and may remember, she
must onto the Silent Speaker be united, just as the form to which the clay is
modelled is first united with the potter's mind.
The harmony within is that between the ego and his
vehicles, and also, of course, between those vehicles themselves. In the average
man there is a perpetual strain going on between the astral body and the mental
body, between the desires and the mind; and neither of these bodies is in the
least in tune with the ego, or pre- : pared to act as his vehicle. The
personality must be purified, and the channel between it and the ego must be
opened and widened.- Until this is done the personality sees everything and
everybody from its own very limited point of view. The ego cannot see what is
really going on; he perceives only the distorted picture in the personality,
which is like a camera with a defective lens that distorts the light rays, and a
faulty plate or film which makes the result all blurred, indistinct and unequal.
59
That is why in most people the ego cannot derive any
satisfaction from the personality until it is in the heaven-world. The ego knows
the true from the false, he recognizes the true when he sees it, and rejects the
false; but generally when he casts an eye downwards into the personality he
finds so crazy a confusion of inconsequent thought-forms that he can distinguish
nothing definite; he turns away in despair, and decides to wait for the quietude
of the heaven-world before attempting to pick the fragments of truth out of this
unseemly chaos. Under those more peaceful conditions, as the emotions and
thoughts of the recent physical life come up one by one and envisage themselves
in the vivid light of that world, they are examined with clear vision, the dross
is thrown away and the treasure is kept. The disciple must try to bring about
this condition while still in the physical body, by purifying the personality
and harmonizing it with the soul.
The possibilities of personal error are almost
infinite. Suppose that a worm, a bird, a monkey, and a traveller simultaneously
look at a tree. The first will think of it as food, the second as a house, the
third as a gymnasium, the fourth as a kind of umbrella; the pictures will all be
different from one another, and different again from the tree's conception of
himself.
While seeing has reference to looking outward,
hearing refers to what comes from within. The man must become quiet if he is to
hear the still small voice. Dharana or concentration will produce this
quietness. If the soul is to hear the inner voice with
60
certainty and accuracy, the outer man must be
unshaken by all external things—by the clamour of the big breakers of life that
dash against him, as well as by the delicate murmur of the softer ripples. He
must learn to be very still, to have no desires and aversions.
Intuition can scarcely ever be invoked except when
the man is utterly willing to receive its behests as the best and most
acceptable guide, without intruding his personal desires. It would be of little
use to ask from the intuition any solution of a problem of conduct, if at the
same time the man wished that the answer should be this or that. Except on rare
occasions when it is unusually strong, it is only when personal desires and
aversions have ceased to exist when the voice of the outer world can no longer
command him, that a man can hear the inner voice which should be his unfailing
guide.
Before the soul can fully comprehend the drift of all
the tuition which comes to him from without, and the intuition that comes from
within, another harmonizing process must take place, in which the manas
gradually becomes attuned to the will, which gives direction to his life.
There are three stages in the development of
consciousness. On the probationary path the man's highest consciousness works
upon the higher mental plane; after the First Initiation and until the Fourth,
it is climbing steadily through the buddhic plane; at the end of that stage it
enters on the atonic or spiritual plane. He has then become united with the
will, the directing
61
agent, controller of his destiny. While in the middle
stage he might have said: "Thy Will, not mine, be done," but now he says: "Thy
Will and mine are one." Just as the design of the pot that is to be made is
first in the potter's mind, and just as the model for a race of men is in the
Manu's mind, He having received it from above, so is the goal of achievement for
every one of us already marked out by the Monad, and then brought down into the
evolving life of the conscious man by the spiritual principle within him.
There is thus a reason for the use of the word soul
in these three verses. It is the soul that treads the path of progress, not the
personality. On the first half of the path it unites itself more and more
completely with the buddhi, forming the spiritual soul, manas-taijasi. But all
the work is done under the direction, of the atma, the voice of the silence.
CHAPTER 5 THE WARNING VOICE
For then the Soul will hear, and will remember. And
then to the inner ear will speak.
THE VOICE OF THE SILENCE, and say:
If thy Soul smiles while bathing in the sunlight of
thy life; if thy Soul sings within her chrysalis of flesh and matter; if thy
Soul weeps inside her castle of illusion; if thy Soul struggles to break the
silver thread that binds her to the Master; know, O disciple, thy Soul is of the
earth.
C.W.L.—In occult books we have frequent reference to
the voice of the silence, and we often find that what is said in one place does
not agree with what appears in others. In the early days of the Society we used
to puzzle over its exact significance, trying to make it always mean the same
thing. Only after much study did we discover that the term is general. The voice
of the silence for anyone is that which comes from the part of him which
63
is higher than his consciousness can reach, and
naturally that changes as his evolution progresses. For those working with the
personality the voice of the ego is the voice of the silence, but when one has
dominated the personality entirely and has made it one with the ego so that the
ego may work perfectly through it, it is the voice of the atma—-the triple
spirit on the nirvanic plane. When this is reached there will still be a voice
of the silence—that of the Monad on the plane above. When the man identifies the
ego and the Monad and attains Adeptship, he will still find a voice of the
silence coming down to him from above, but then it will be the voice, perhaps,
of one of the Ministers of the Deity, one of the Planetary Logoi, as They are
called. Perhaps for Him in turn it will be the voice of the Solar Logos Himself;
and if even for Him there is such a thing as that, it must be the voice of a
higher Logos. But who can say?
" The sunlight of thy life " refers to those periods
in our personal existence when fortune smiles upon us, and everything seems
bright and fair. The ego who basks in that pleasure, and mistakes it for the
true happiness of the higher Self, has not yet the higher vairagya which kills
the outer sounds. In The Ancient Wisdom Dr. Besant has explained how the man who
feels that nothing on earth can satisfy him, not even those things that give the
greatest delight to ordinary mortals, may through a strong but calm effort of
the will rise to and unite himself with the higher consciousness and find
himself free of the body; but that is only for those who
64
obey the first condition, who cannot be satisfied
with anything less than that union.
The three bodies, physical, astral and mental, which
with their habits constitute the personality, are in truth a chrysalis, in which
a butterfly is gradually being formed. In our present caterpillar state the soul
must be in the body and the world; yet it must not be of them; it must not
accept that life as its own, but must realize that it is independent of its
vehicles. Here again we must be careful not to misunderstand. It is indeed well,
it is even necessary that the soul should rejoice on its upward path, that it
should smile, that it should sing within its chrysalis; there is no harm in
that—there is even much good in it. What it must not do is to sing because of
the chrysalis, or of anything that happens to that outer shell. It would be
wrong, terribly wrong, that the soul should weep within its castle of illusion,
because depression and sadness are always wrong. But that, true as it is, is not
what is meant here. What Aryasanga is trying to tell us in his graceful poetical
language is that the soul must neither rejoice nor sorrow because of anything
whatever that is connected with the chrysalis or the castle, or any outer form;
it must be indifferent to that form, unaffected by what happens to it. If it is
not indifferent, it is still of the earth, still entangled with this lower
world, and so not yet ready for perfect freedom.
All around us eternal change is taking place; but the
soul must press forward on its way resistless, undeterred by change, for to be
influenced by these outer things
65
shows weakness. Remember how Shakespeare writes in
his Sonnets:
When I have seen by Time's fell hand defaced The rich
proud cost of outworn buried age When sometime lofty towers I see down-raze And
brass eternal slave to mortal rage; When I have seen the hungry ocean gain
Advantage on the kingdom of the shore, And the firm soil win of the watery main,
Increasing store with loss and loss with store; When I have seen such
interchange of state, Or state itself confounded to decay; Ruin hath taught me
thus to ruminate, That Time will come and take my love away,
This thought is as a death, which cannot choose But
weep to have that which it fears to lose.
Since brass, nor stone nor earth, nor boundless sea,
But sad mortality o'er-sways their power, How with this rage shall beauty hold a
plea, Whose action is no stronger than a flower? O, how shall summer's honey
breath hold out Against the wreckful siege of battering days, When rocks
impregnable are not so stout, Nor gates of steel so strong, but Time decays? 1
But time is really the friend of the aspirant, for it
is precisely the finer, the higher, the inner things which are least subject to
its ravages. This truth the occultist learns as a matter of certain experience
and knowledge, so the changes in outside things at last come to trouble him not
at all.
Silver is the thread—as befits an emblem of purity—
that binds the soul to the higher Self; every traffic that the soul has with
impurity of body, emotions or thought, is a struggle to break that silver
thread, a temptation to ignore the still, small voice.
1 Sonnets, xliv, xlv.
66
Madame Blavatsky adds the following footnotes:
The "great Master " is the term used by chelas to
indicate the Higher Self. It is the equivalent of Avalokiteshvara, and the same
as Adi-Buddha with the Buddhist occultists, Atma with the Brahmanas, and
Christos with the ancient Gnostics.
Soul is used here for the human Ego or Manas, that
which is referred to in our occult septenary division as the human Soul in
contradistinction to the spiritual and animal Souls.
Madame Blavatsky here employs the word Master in an
unusual sense, saying that it is so used by the chelas or pupils. In later
Theosophical literature this title has been reserved for that limited number of
members of the Great White Brotherhood who accept pupils from among those who
are still living in the world. That number is small; it would seem that one
Adept on each of the rays is appointed to attend to that work, and all those who
are coming along his particular ray of evolution pass through his hands. No one
below the rank of Adept is permitted to assume full responsibility for a pupil,
though those who have held the position of pupil for a number of years are often
employed as deputies, and receive the privilege of helping and advising
promising young aspirants. These older pupils are gradually being trained for
their future work when they in turn shall become Adepts, and they are learning
to take more and more of the routine work off the hands of their Masters, so
that the latter may be set free for higher labours which only
I
67
they can undertake. The preliminary selection of
candidates for chelaship is now left to a large extent in the hands of these
older pupils, and the candidates are temporarily linked with such pupils rather
than directly with the great Adepts. But the pupils and the Master are so
wonderfully one that perhaps this is almost " a distinction without a difference
".
The terms which Madame Blavatsky uses in these
footnotes will be better understood if we study a little the various trinities
in the universe and in man. It is in the experience of everybody that there is a
duality of the knower and the known, of the one who sees and the things that are
seen, of the subject and the object. This is the old division of the world of
experience into two parts, spirit and matter, using those words in a general or
common sense. Spirit or consciousness and matter are a pair of opposites—-the
spirit is an active principle, the matter a passive one; the spirit has a centre
but no circumference, the matter has a circumference but no centre; the spirit
is self-moving, the matter is moved from outside. In these two we have also the
division of reality into the divine and the material; the free and the bound;
that which shines with its own light and that which has only reflected light.
When one looks closer still, one sees that those two
are playing, as it were, on the stage in one's presence, that they are not No. 1
and No. 2 principles, as many people think, but they are No. 2 and No. 3; for
the one that now witnesses their interplay is No. 1. No. 2 is the God who is
seen, but No. 1 is the God who is
68
the real Self, who is the cause of all the interplay
between No. 2 and No. 3.
In Christian terminology, Christ is the God who is
seen. " No man hath seen God at any time." 1 Yet said Christ: " I and my Father
are One." 2
That brings us to the term Avalokiteshvara. This word
is a compound of avalokita (seen), and Ishvara (God, the Ruler). It thus means
the Higher Self in the duality of spirit and matter in the universe. " There are
three that bear record in heaven," said St. John,. "the Father, the Word and the
Holy Ghost."3 The Word, the Logos, Avalokiteshvara, is the Second. He is the
Christos, the God that is seen. This is the universal spirit, or purusha, as
distinguished from the matter, or prakriti. Man is consciousness looking at
matter, and this God is glorified or universal Man, the supreme subject. Analyze
yourself, and you will find the reflection of this—the inner God in yourself.
Still, that God that is seen only bears witness to the real God—in man to the
Self, the " I " which embraces both the subject and the object.
This " I " is not a new subject, witnessing the old
subject and object, put together and now made into one new compound object. It
is " I "—that is all there is to say. Every thinking man can look at his own
body, and in some cases his astral and mental bodies as well, and call it "it",
that is, he can look upon it as an
11 John, 4, 12.
I St. John, x, 30.
I1 John, 5, 7.
69
object. He can also have a conception of the
consciousness or subject in his neighbour, and infer that it is of the same
nature as that consciousness (containing will, feeling and thought) which he
finds in himself. But on this point he now makes a great mistake, by giving two
different names to one thing—-he calls the same thing " you " when he sees it in
his neighbour, but " I " when he looks at it in himself! Let him look upon the
consciousness or subject within himself (all of it) as he does upon that in
others, and call it " you ", regarding it as just one of the great sea of " yous
" that make up the Logos, as drops of water make up the ocean, and he will be
ready to transcend consciousness and reach the real " I ", the Self or God that
is not seen.1 The consciousness, the " you ", is a portion of Avalokiteshvara,
the God that is seen, the Christ, the light that lighteth every man that cometh
into the world, just as much as the bodies are parts of the ocean of cosmic
matter; and both equally are not the Self. No one hath seen the supreme God at
any time—not even the Son.
This trinity has been considered in various ways:
Avalokiteshvara has been described as follows by Swami T. Subba Rao: "
Parabrahman by itself cannot be seen as it is. It is seen by the Logos with a
veil thrown over it, and that veil is the mighty expanse of Cosmic Matter." And
again: "Parabrahman, after having appeared on the one hand as the Ego, and on
1 This argument is expounded in The Seven Rays, by
Ernest Wood, Ch. xxi.
70
the other as Mulaprakriti, acts as the one energy
through the Logos". The danger of all such descriptions is immense; the use of
the word " it " alone in this connection can undo everything. In oneself
deliverance, the truth, must be sought—only I being I can solve this mystery,
which is so easy, but that people will not see. There is also the strongest
objection even to the word God as applied to Parabrahman—for to think of God is
to think of the seen, that is, of Avalokiteshvara; and that God is, after all, a
" you ", or rather all " yous ".
The conception of a subject or " you " involves a
time limitation; that of an object or " it" involves a space limitation. But
motion in both time and space is a mystery. Some ancients argued that nothing
could really move, " because it cannot move in the space where it is, and it
certainly cannot move in the space where it is not." But subjects can move in
time, and objects can move in space, because all move in Parabrahman. Both time
and space are secondary to motion, properly conceived.1
" And these three are one." 2 Mulaprakriti, the root
of manifestation, basic matter, external being, is not something other than
Parabrahman, but is the same, as seen through the time limitations of
consciousness. Parabrahman is beyond that time limitation, and therefore seems
to be still, and from that arises the appearance-of space, the characteristic of
Mulaprakriti—which is in reality a space containing everything which ever
existed
1 See The Seven Rays, Ch. viii. 2 I John, 4, 12.
71
or will exist in all of the three periods of
time—past, present and future. Then universal consciousness, the great Man, also
called Daiviprakriti (the divine manifestation), as against Mulaprakriti (the
material manifestation), is Avalokiteshvara, the Ishvara or Ruler or God who is
seen, in contradistinction to Parabrahman, the first member of the Trinity, who
is not seen directly even by him.
Now, in the higher triad in the consciousness of man
we have a reflection of this great Trinity. Therefore Madame Blavatsky says that
the Higher Self, by which she means buddhi or the intuitional love, is the
equivalent of Avalokiteshvara. Any confusion in thought of the universal reality
with atma, buddhi and manas— the three modes of consciousness in man—would
result in serious error, but there is an analogy between the two. The great
Trinity is reflected in man in various ways, and appears in one form in those
three aspects of his consciousness. So atma, buddhi and manas reflect in their
smaller sphere the characteristics of the universal trinity. Atma is the
consciousness of Self, and also the will, which gives self-direction. Manas, at
the other pole, is consciousness of the world, and its thought-power does all
our work, even that which is effected through the hands. But buddhi, between the
two, is the very essence of consciousness, of subjectivity. Thus the greater
Trinity is reproduced in the consciousness of the ego.
Beyond this middle member, triple in character, is
the Monad in man, representative in him of Parabrahman,
72
the state of his true and absolute nirvana, beyond
consciousness. The atma is the state of his false and relative nirvana of the
nirvanic plane, his last illusion, that persists between the Fourth and Fifth
Initiations. As the Monad lies above the trinity of consciousness, so the
personal bodies lie outside or beneath it—they are known only in reflection in
manas. On the first half of the Path (from the First to the Fourth Initiation)
the man is busy shaking himself free from those personal limitations, from the
illusion of " it ". On the second half he is engaged in releasing himself from
the illusion of "you".
There are still a few more points to consider in
Madame Blavatsky's notes. Her reference to Adi-Buddha and Atma requires some
comment, though that to the Christos of the Gnostics will be abundantly clear
from what has been said above. The " Atma of the Brahmanas " is rather what the
Buddhists thought that the Brahmanas meant by the term (and what perhaps many of
the Brahmanas who missed the true point of their philosophy really did think);
it is that spiritual soul in man which the Buddha declared to be not utterly
permanent. Yes, even the Christ (the higher self) in man is at last mortal.
Beautiful and wonderful, and far beyond the vision of ordinary men as it lies,
it must at last give up its life, to be one with the Father. It is the " you "
masquerading as the " I " in spiritual men —just as, far earlier in evolution,
the absurd personality, the " it " pretended to be " I ". But when he says that
their belief in atma is wrong, the orthodox Buddhist has
73
not understood the height of true Brahmana thought,
and especially the teaching on this point of Shri Shankara-charya, who was
really one with the Buddha in His anatma doctrine, because by atma He meant the
Monad, the indescribable Parabrahmic aspect of man. The Buddha saw that people
called " you " the atma, the Self, and tried to dislodge them from that error by
saying that what they called " I " was perishable.
In the footnote Madame Blavatsky says that
Avalokiteshvara is the same as Adi-Buddha. She amplifies her statement on the
subject in The Secret Doctrine, as follows:
In the esoteric, and even exoteric Buddhism of the
North, Adi-Buddha, . . . the One Unknown, without beginning or end, identical
with Parabrahman, emits a bright Ray from its Darkness. This is the Logos, the
First, or Vajradhara, the Supreme Buddha, also called Dorjechang. As the Lord of
all Mysteries he cannot manifest, but sends into the world of manifestation his
Heart—the " Diamond Heart," Vajrasattva or Dorjesempa. This is the Second Logos
of Creation.1
In this extract she clearly shows that the First and
Second Logos are respectively Adi-Buddha and Avalokiteshvara, for the latter is
the same as Vajrasattva. Therefore when she speaks of them as one it can only be
as the Christians speak of the Christ as one with the Father. I wrote as follows
on this subject in The Inner Life, Section II:
There has been much discussion as to the exact
meaning of the terms Adi-Buddha and Avalokiteshvara. I have made no special
study of these things from the philosophical standpoint, but so far as I have
been able to gather ideas from discussion of the matter with the living
exponents of the religion, Adi-Buddha seems to be the culmination of one of the
great lines of superhuman development—-what might be called the abstract
principle
1 Op. cit., Vol. I, p. 624.
74
of all the Buddhas. Avalokiteshvara is a term
belonging to the Northern Church and seems to be the Buddhists' name for their
conception of the Logos. European scholars have translated it: " The Lord who
looks down from on high," but this seems to have in it a somewhat inaccurate
implication, for it is clearly always the manifested Logos; sometimes the Logos
of a solar system and sometimes higher than that, but always manifest. We must
not forget that-while the founders of the great religions see and know the
things which They name, Their followers usually do not see; they have only the
names, and they juggle with them as intellectual counters, and build up much
which is incorrect and inconsistent.1
We have already seen that by the term Higher Self
Madame Blavatsky means the buddhi in man, the central member of the trinity of
his immortal consciousness. That is the wisdom in man. But it is a reflection of
the universal wisdom, without which there could be no human wisdom. Similarly,
without the Dhyani-Buddha Avalokiteshvara, the " centre of energy'' of the
ultimate wisdom, Adi-Buddha, no human Buddha could become. The Illumination of
the sage Gautama was therefore not essentially the flowering of a man into a
god, but the union of a perfected human consciousness with the wisdom of the
Logos.
The second of the footnotes under consideration
speaks not only of the manas as the human Soul, but refers also to the animal
soul in man. This is the lower manas, the kama-manas. On its plane reside the
group-souls of animals, while those of the vegetable kingdom are on the plane
beneath it, and those of the mineral lower still. To these meanings of the terms
Soul, Higher Self, etc., Madame Blavatsky keeps with perfect consistency right
through the book. 1 Op. cit., Vol. 1, p. 169
CHAPTER 6 SELF AND ALL-SELF
When to the world's turmoil thy budding Soul lends
ear; when to the roaring voice of the great illusion thy soul responds; when
frightened at the sight of the hot tears of pain, when deafened by the cries of
distress, thy Soul withdraws like the shy turtle within the carapace of
selfhood, learn, O disciple, of her silent God thy Soul is an unworthy shrine.
When waxing stronger, thy Soul glides forth from her
secure retreat; and breaking loose from the protecting shrine, extends her
silver thread and rushes onward; when beholding her image on the waves of space
she whispers. " This is I"—declare, O disciple, that thy Soul is caught in the
webs of delusion.
C.W.L.—At the beginning of this passage, in the
expression " budding Soul " we have a suggestion of the idea of evolution. For
many centuries in Europe people did not think of evolution; they had the idea
that the world and all the various creatures in it had been created quite
suddenly, and they did not suppose that the more
76
complex forms had evolved out of inferior ones, and
would evolve further into something more perfect. Then came the idea, within
about the last century and a half, that the material forms of living creatures
were undergoing evolution, an unfoldment which has been believed by some to be
due to an impulse of the indwelling life, and by others merely to the selective
agency of natural environment.
But long ago there existed a theory of evolution of
the Soul, which has all along been a central doctrine of the Hindu and Buddhist
traditions, and has been spread extensively in the Western world by Theosophists
along with the doctrine of reincarnation. This is put forward as the most
logical and ethical theory of human destiny, once it has been established, on
scientific or religious grounds, that the Soul of a man survives the death of
his body. The soul incarnates many times for the sake of experience, and each
one will thereby become at last not merely a genius in some field of human
thought or work, but a perfect man, ready for full conscious divinity.
There are two great stages on the path of the soul's
evolution—-the first is called the pravritti marga, the way of forth-going, and
second the nivritti marga, the way of return. In the former the development of
personality takes place, accompanied by the accumulation of much karma as the
soul pursues its restless career of seeking the satisfaction of its
multitudinous desires in the external world. In the latter the soul little by
little turns its back upon the world, and with its face towards
77
the divine, its source and goal, proceeds with the
task of perfecting itself so as to finish up the human stage of its evolution.
It is this second stage, the nivritti marga, that is
divided up into the probationary path and the Path of Initiation, which have
been fully described in The Path of Discipleship, Initiation, The Perfecting of
Man; and The Masters and the Path. This marga implies a course of voluntary
evolution, in which the candidate is deliberately training himself in the higher
qualities of character; the evolution of the lower creatures and of men on the
pravritti marga is involuntary, they seek and respond to experience, and learn
without clear realization of what is happening to them.
In a footnote to the word illusion, Madame Blavatsky
calls it Maha-Maya, the great illusion, the objective universe. The meaning of
the term illusion, as applied to the external world, has already been discussed.
It is not the same idea as that referred to in the text as " webs of delusion,"
which has reference, as another footnote says, to " Sakkayaditthi, the delusion
of personality ".
When the Lord Buddha revealed to men the Noble
Eightfold Path, the way to liberty, the practical means to bring sorrow to an
end, He told them about the ten fetters which the candidate must cast off—one
after another. The first of these was called Sakkayaditthi, the delusion of
personality. Let us see how this arises. A child is born subject to karma—the
result of its deeds in previous lives. It has a certain kind of body, and
78
various things happen to it. In course of time it
hears what people say of it, and it finds out what it can and what it cannot do.
It sees itself in these things as in a mirror—one of those distorting mirrors
which are sometimes set up in exhibitions to amuse people with their grotesquely
flattened or elongated images. It thus obtains ideas about itself—that it is
clever or stupid, beautiful or ugly, weak or strong. As its education proceeds
it acquires social standing or position or character, assumes the habits of body
and mind of doctor^ lawyer, house-wife—whatever it may be—and thus acquires a
settled personality. When it thinks itself to be that personality, it has- what
has been called " self-personality "—exactly the same delusion that obsesses the
unfortunate people in the lunatic asylums, who imagine themselves to be
tea-pots, ear-drums, north poles, Queen Elizabeths and Napoleons.
A definite well-trained set of bodies and
personality, with useful habits, is, of course, a good thing, just as is . a
good set of tools, or a good motor-car. We do not want to have weak or
nondescript personalities. But however good our personality may be we should not
think it to be ourself, and we should be able to enjoy all our native
will-power, love-power and thought-power while using it for our purposes, for
our spiritual life in the material world. These personalities should not set
themselves up as candidates for immortality, and try to intrench themselves
against the ravages of use and time that beset all material things. A
middle-aged gentleman once said to his son, who volunteered to relieve him of
79
some work: " No, no, my boy. Always use up the old
ones first! " The personalities must be willing to be used, to be adapted to the
spiritual purposes of the moment, to be worn out—and must be content with the
sole reward of a long and glorious devachan, that will follow the death of the
outer body in the case of all those who have thus served the divine indwelling
self, except, of course, the servants of the Masters who renounce this reward
and take speedy rebirth in order to work for the world.
This earth, disciple, is the hall of sorrow, wherein
are set along the path of dire probations, traps to ensnare thy Ego by the
delusion called "great heresy ".
That the physical plane is a place of sorrow is a
widespread Buddhist and Hindu thought. Uncongenial and often disfiguring or
debilitating labour, oppression, disease, indignity and dread fall to the lot of
the majority of mankind. Those whose fortune has set them in places of ease may
say that they find much pleasure in it; but Patanjali says: " To the enlightened
all is misery." There are many things that give no trouble to the relatively
unevolved—-such as the smell of alcohol, meat or onions, the noise of factory
sirens or coarse music, gross manners, hideous clothes and buildings, and a
thousand other things that afflict those who are more sensitive. In addition to
these there is hunger to gain what we want, and fear to lose it when it is in
hand, and suffering for others all round us, if not for ourselves. Surely men
must be made to hug such chains as these. Surely this
80
world is indeed a hall of sorrow. Think how poor
is its best in the sight of those who know the higher planes.
But it is so chiefly because man has made it so.
Think of the vast sea of life that fills the mineral, the vegetable and the
animal kingdoms of nature, and how all that is throbbing with pleasure. Even the
dreadful picture of the poet, of " nature, red in tooth and claw with ravin "
loses most of its lurid colour when we realize that the animals do not " think
before and after " as men do, with painful longing and fear, and that while
their battles are on, and the blood and wounds distress the human beholder, the
excitement of the animal consciousness is at its greatest height and is often
experiencing its greatest pleasure. Earth is a hall of sorrow only for man, who
with his greed and anger, born of a strong imagination that feeds the flames of
hot desire, has poisoned with innumerable horrors both his personal and his
social life.
Yet it only needs the conquest of selfishness to
remove every one of these horrors, and open to all mankind the joys of this
world—the thrill and deep strong peace of beauty, of discovery, of creative
work; of social and bodily well-being.
Madame Blavatsky's footnote then speaks of:
Attavada, the heresy of the belief in Soul, or rather
in the separateness of Soul or Self from the one universal, infinite Self.
Attd is the Pali equivalent of the Sanskrit atma, and
vada means doctrine. The doctrine of atma, which we
81
have already considered, is the great source of
cleavage between the Hindus and Buddhists, but as a matter of fact the
distinction is merely one of words, because when the Hindu says that the Self or
atma in man is one with the universal Self, he does not mean by the word what
people usually mean when they think or speak of themselves, but something
altogether deeper, which only the advanced yogi can even imagine. There is a
passage in the Shri Vakya Sudha which warns the aspirant that when he repeats
the great religious formula " I am That", he must take care what he means by " I
" j it explains that the separate individual should be understood as threefold,
and that it is the union with Brahman only of the highest of these three that is
proclaimed by " Thou art That " and such sayings. As already explained, the
personality is not " I", and even the " you " in me is not " I", but the " I ",
is something indistinguishable from the universal Self in which the many and the
One are one. The Lord Buddha's teaching denies the permanency of the "you" that
men call " I " It is an unfortunate thing that two such great religions as
Hinduism and Buddhism should be separated mainly by so small a misunderstanding,
and also that because of it the modern Theosophical movement has spread very
slowly among the Buddhists. We have developed a large Theosophical literature,
in which the words atma and Self figure extensively, and this has alienated a
good many Buddhists who have not taken the trouble to clear away this obstacle
of words which we have inadvertently put in their path.
82
This earth, O ignorant disciple, is but the dismal
entrance leading to the twilight that precedes the valley of true light—that
light which no wind can extinguish, that light which burns without a wick or
fuel.
In this and some later verses we have poetical names
for the planes of nature. As previously stated, it was common among oriental
occultists to bunch together the astral and lower mental planes, and Madame
Blavatsky often followed that plan in- her teaching. This combining of the two
is indicated in this picture of a " twilight that precedes the valley of true
light ". That description of the valley of true light shows it to be the region
of the Soul and the Higher Self, the planes where buddhi and higher manas have
their habitat.
If we divide the planes by a line separating the
lower from the higher mental, we find that there is a radical difference between
those which lie below the line and those which are above. In the former, matter
is dominant; it is the first thing that strikes the eye; and consciousness
shines with difficulty through the forms. But in the higher planes life is the
prominent thing, and forms are there only for its purposes. The difficulty in
the lower planes is to give the life expression in the forms, but in the higher
it is quite the reverse—to hold and give form to the flood of life. It is only
above the dividing line that the light of consciousness is subject to no wind,
and shines with its own power. The symbol of a spiritual fire is very fitting
for consciousness at
83
those levels, as distinguished from the lower
planes, -where the symbol of fire burning fuel is more appropriate.
Saith the great Law: "In order to become the knower
of All-Self, thou hast first of Self to be the knower." To reach the knowledge
of that Self, thou hast to give up self to non-self, being to non-being.
In a foot-note Madame Blavatsky distinguishes between
the Atmajnani who is mentioned here, and the Tattvajnani. In Hindu literature
generally the distinction is slight and is usually ignored, but she says: " The
Tattvajnani is the knower or discriminator of the principles in nature and in
man; and Atmajnani is the knower of Atma, or the universal One Self." Jnani
means a knower and tattva means the truth or the real nature of things.
It has always been a teaching of Theosophy that to
make progress we must apply the old Greek formula " Know thyself". In
consequence, a very large part of our modern Theosophical literature deals with
the constitution, history and destiny of man. It is by the study of the various
principles and bodies of man that we are able gradually to distinguish what he
is, and to separate him in thought from the vehicles that he uses, until at last
we arrive at the real Self. Then, through that real Self in us, we shall realize
the universal Self; in fact, the two are one.
But to know the real Self in oneself, the lower self
must be set aside, must become as naught. As we have
84
already seen, the utter destruction of "
self-personality " is the very first task of the Initiate on the Path proper,
since sakkayaditthi, the delusion of the personal self, is the first fetter
which must be cast off.
And then thou can'st repose between the wings of the
Great Bird. Aye, sweet is rest between the wings of that which is not born, nor
dies, but is the Aum throughout eternal ages.
On the Great Bird, which occupies a prominent
place-in Oriental religious symbolism, Madame Blavatsky has the following
foot-note:
Kala Hamsa, the bird or swan. Says the
Nada-vindupanishat (Rig Veda) translated by the Kumba-konam Theosophical
Society—" The syllable A is considered to be the bird Hamsa's right wing, U its
left, M its tail, and the Ardhamatra (half metre) is said to be its head."
The word Aum, generally pronounced Om, is used at the
commencement of every good work or thought, because it is a word of power,
symbolizing divine creation. Innumerable Sanskrit books repeat the statement
that hearing, touch, sight, taste and smell are correlated respectively with the
orders of matter named akasha. (ether or sky), vayu (air), tejas or agni (fire),
apas or jala (water), and prithivi (earth), which are our familiar five planes
of human manifestation, the atmic, buddhic, mental, astral and physical. These
planes were created in this order, beginning with the atmic, where sound was
applied as the. creative power. Of course, that could
85
not be the same thing as our physical sound, which is
a pulsation in the air or some other physical substance; It was of the nature of
the voice of the silence, the will of atma. Yet even on our physical plane sound
is a great builder of forms, as every student of elementary science knows, who
has made Chladni's figures or performed similar experiments. There is a great
deal of symbolism in the Hindu Scriptures connected with this idea that the
world was created by sound.
The word Aum is said to have special value as a
mantra because it is the most complete human word. It begins with the vowel A in
the back of the mouth, continues with the vowel U sounded in the centre of the
mouth, and closes with the co sonant M, with which the lips are sealed. It thus
runs through the whole gamut of human speech and so represents in man the entire
creative word. Its three parts are also taken as symbolical of the manifestation
of the Trinity, in a variety of ways, to explain which one might fill a book.
Thus we have Parabrahman, Daiviprakriti and Mula-prakriti; Shiva, Vishnu and
Brahma; will, wisdom and activity; ananda, chit and sat, or happiness,
consciousness and being; atma, buddhi and manas; tamas, rajas and sattva; and
many another. Aum is thus a constant reminder of this triplicity running through
all things; it is a key therefore to the solution of many mysteries, as well as
a word of power. The head of the bird is then taken as the unmanifested origin
of the triple word.
Kala, a word which means " time " is one of the names
of Vishnu or Avalokiteshvara. Kala-hamsa
86
therefore means the swan of time or in time, hamsa
being a swan. This symbol of a bird contains the implication of time, since it
is proceeding through space. It is a characteristic of consciousness that it
progresses or evolves, and so exists in time. The consciousness of the Logos is
time, it does not begin nor end in time, and is therefore without birth or
death.
This bird is thus a symbol of the Second Logos, which
is also the great Wisdom. There is a well-known Hindu fable which connects the
hamsa or swan with this idea of wisdom also, for it relates of that bird that
when a mixture of water and milk is placed before it, it can separate the milk
from the water. So does wisdom operate even in human life, selecting from our
mixed experience the essential nutriment of the soul. Wisdom remains in the
spiritual soul of man when experiences have died away, since, as the
Bhagavad-Gita says: " All actions in their entirety culminate in wisdom."1
A man on the Path who has passed the Third Initiation
is also called a Hamsa, or swan. He is busy getting rid of raga and dvesha the
fourth and fifth fetters, which are liking and disliking and is therefore
especially practising wisdom. People in the world are full of likes and
dislikes, and they therefore suffer greatly from their own opinions about
things. Throwing these two fetters off, the Hamsa becomes like the sage
described in the Gita as one satisfied with wisdom and knowledge, to whom a lump
of earth, a stone and gold are the same, who regards impartially friends and
foes, the righteous 1 Op. cit., iv. 33.
87
and the unrighteous. It is not that this man does not
value gold and friends; he does, but he values also clay and foes. The wise man
can profit from every kind of experience; all are useful for the soul. Epictetus
asserted this when he declared: "There is only one thing for which God has sent
me into the world— to perfect my own character in virtue; and there is nothing
in all the world that I cannot use for that purpose."
Again, Hamsa is also a form of the saying " Aham Sah
" or " I am That," or, as it is frequently used, " Soham," which consists of the
same words reversed. So when the aspirant repeats this sentence he also
remembers that the way to bestride the Hamsa or bird of life is to realize that
he is the Self. It is said that the devout yogi utters this formula with every
breath, of which there are said to be 21,600 in a day and night, for the air is
considered to come in with the sound of" sah " and go out with that of" ha ".
As long as the bird is flying, the creative word is
sounding, time exists. Although this time has neither beginning nor ending it is
nevertheless a measurable period—which is a great mystery. On this point Madame
Blavatsky has the following note:
Eternity with the Orientals has quite another
signification than it has with us. It stands generally for the 100 years or age
of Brahma, the duration of a Maha-Kalpa or a period of 311,040,000,000,000
years.
88
This part of the subject is concluded with the words:
Bestride the Bird of Life, if thou would'st know.
Give up thy Life, if thou would'st live.
To these are appended the following notes:
Says the same Nadavindu, " A Yogi who bestrides the
Hamsa, (thus contemplates on Aum) is not affected by karmic influences or crores
of sins."
Give up the life of the physical personality if you
would live in Spirit.
A crore is ten millions. It must not, however, be
assumed that the yogi is permitted to perform these sins; if he did he would not
be a yogi. This expression is only an Oriental way of indicating that he is
utterly free from taint by the material world. The man who thinks and works
without personal desire, with utter unselfishness, suffers no karmic
consequences. The fruit of all his efforts goes into the great reservoir of
spiritual force for the helping of the world, as has already been explained.
CHAPTER 7 THE THREE HALLS
Three halls, O weary pilgrim, lead to the end of
toils. Three halls, O conqueror of Mara, will bring thee through three states
into the fourth, and ' thence into the seven worlds, the worlds of rest
eternal.
If thou would'st learn their names, then hearken, and
remember.
The name of the first hall is Ignorance—Avidya.
It is the hall in which thou saw'st the light, in
which thou livest and shalt die.
The name of hall the second is the Hall of Learning.
In it thy Soul will find the blossoms of life, but under every flower a serpent
coiled.
The name of the third hall is Wisdom, beyond which
stretch the shoreless waters of Akshara, the indestructible fount of
omniscience.
C. W. L.—The three halls may be interpreted in two
ways: as objective planes, or as the subjective condition of man.
90
In the former case the hall of ignorance is the
physical plane, and the hall of learning, described in a foot-note as " the hall
of probationary learning " is what may perhaps be called the astro-mental plane
(the astral and lower mental planes taken together). When I wrote The Inner Life
it seemed to me probable that by the term hall of learning Madame Blavatsky
meant the astral plane, and by the hall of wisdom the lower mental plane, but
having thought the matter over and discussed it many times since then, I now
lean to the opinion that we shall more accurately represent her thought if we
take the hall of learning to include not only the astral but also the lower
mental, and if we raise the hall of wisdom so as to include within it the planes
of higher manas and buddhi.
That Aryasanga was not thinking of the astral plane
as the hall of learning and the lower mental world as the hall of wisdom is
shown a little further on, when he speaks of the latter hall as one " wherein
all shadows are unknown, and where the light of truth shines with unfading
glory". The lower mental world does not answer to this description; far more
glorious and delicate than the astral plane as it is, it is still a material
world and the habitat of the personalities of men. Further, the Teacher also
says that that which is un-create abides in the hall of wisdom, and it is the
ego, not the personality, which is uncreate. And in the lower mental plane, as
well as in the astral, there is a serpent coiled under every flower; for if
passion and foolish desires infest the one, pride and prejudices inhabit the
91
other. In the higher mental plane, though there may
be much that the ego does not know, what it does know it knows correctly; but
the lower mental is a region of personality and error.
The extent to which the lower planes are worlds of
illusion is also seen in the way in which our senses and powers work in them. To
take sight as an instance—we see because our sight is obstructed. If one could
see perfectly through the wall one could not see the wall. It is the same with
walking; we have some freedom to move about, because the earth resists the free
motion of our feet. In the higher planes one lives in the light.
The combination of the astral and mental planes is
not uncommon in the Oriental schools of occult training. The Vedantins speak, of
one body (called the manomayakosha, the body made of mind),1 where our
Theosophical literature usually distinguishes the two (the astral and the
mental), and to that body when awakened and functioning they ascribe the
experiences proper to both planes. The candidate for the path of yoga in the
Raja Yoga schools was always trained to work from the mental down to the astral.
This very cautious procedure is also shown in the teaching of Patanjali, who
makes his first two steps moral, and requires definite progress in these before
the practices leading to the siddhis or yoga powers are taken. In Raja Toga: The
Occult Training of the Hindus, Prof. Wood had called these first steps " The ten
1 See The Secret Doctrine, Vol. I, p. 181.
92
commandments ", and has translated them as the five
restraints: " Thou shalt not injure, lie, steal, be incontinent, be greedy ",
and the five observances:" Thou shalt be clean, content, self-controlled,
studious and devoted." These methods were in full force long before the time of
Aryasanga; Pandit N. Bhashyacharya and some other Sanskrit scholars maintain
that Patanjali, who in turn was not the originator of the system, gave his
famous Sutras to the world as far back as in the ninth century B.C.
In The Masters and the Path I have explained that; in
the old Initiations it often happened that much time was taken in instructing
the candidate in astral work, as the awakening of the pupil to work at that
level was left to a relatively later stage than is customary among the modern
Theosophists, who often have already done much astral work and have thus learnt
the detail of the astral world long before Initiation.
If we think of the three halls subjectively, as
stages of progress in human development, we have the following familiar
divisions: (1) The man who lives ignorantly in the world, attracted and repelled
by the things around him, impelled to action by his own uncontrolled passions
and desires—-this is the ignorant stage. (2) The man who is learning that nature
has definite laws, and is realizing that by working with them he can gain much
more power than he had in the days of his ignorance— this is the hall of
learning. (3) The man who has realized that there are spiritual laws, and is
learning to obey them. He knows about reincarnation and karma.
93
and the ethical and moral laws that govern the
progress of his own soul and those of others. He is aware that outer things
exist only for the purposes of the evolving soul, and lives according to this
knowledge. He is in the hall of wisdom.
Madame Blavatsky describes the four stages of
consciousness :
The three states of consciousness, which are Jagrat,
the waking; Svapna, the dreaming; and Sushupti, the deep-sleeping state. These
three Yogi conditions lead to the fourth—the Turiya, that beyond the dreamless
state, the one above all, a state of high spiritual consciousness.
These states of consciousness are not fixed, but may
be correlated to the sets of planes or objective halls above mentioned, in the
case of the candidate who is being prepared for the Arhat Initiation. In this
case the waking state may be the physical, the dreaming state the astro-mental,
the sleeping state the higher mental and buddhic, and the turiya state, the
atmic.
The rather curious terms waking, dreaming and
sleeping seem to have been selected from a physical plane point of view to name
the heights of consciousness reached by the candidate at different times. When
the man was going about his business in the physical plane, with all his
faculties awake to this world, he was in the first state. To understand the
second state we have to remember that there are two kinds of dreams—the often
nonsensical productions of the brain (physical and
94
etheric), and the true experiences of the man away
from his physical body, working and learning in the astro-mental regions. It
is to these latter that this term dreaming applies. The candidate
sleeping, or almost going to sleep in a day-dream, would afterwards remember
some such experiences, and then ascribe them to the " consciousness of the dream
state ". Suppose, however, that the aspirant out of the body should at any
time go into what may be called a second sleep, and rise into the next set of
planes, to be conscious for a time at that higher level. Probably on waking
physically he would remember nothing of what had been happening out of the
body—his brain not being attuned to record the experiences coming from planes
higher than his "dreaming state ". So it would seem to him that he had had deep
dreamless sleep, and usually his only feeling would be one of great satisfaction
and well-being. The " sleeping state" is therefore consciousness in that
still higher region. Now, the fourth state is sometimes called trance, for the
following reason. It has often been explained that an aspirant when out of
the body can rise a stage higher than when in it. It is possible also in deep
meditation for the disciple to rise in trance to the higher state and afterwards
bring that experience down into the waking memory. Thus the Arhat can touch
the buddhic level while in the physical body, and the atmic or nirvanic plane
when out if it, or in deep meditation or trance. The term akshara, which is here
applied to this fourth region, means simply that which does not melt away; it is
the undecaying.
THE THREE HALLS 95
The same set of terms may be used as a relative
series for less advanced occult students. One may have his waking consciousness
on the physical plane, his dreaming state on the astral plane, his deep sleep on
the mental; another, who is able to use his astral faculties in his physical
waking consciousness, will have his dream consciousness on the lower mental, and
his sleep state on the higher mental, and so on. The turiya is a higher state
reached in every case by a special effort of will and meditation, which is a
means to ultimately raising the whole set of three states to a higher level than
before. While the transition is in progress, before the new level is
established, there will always be this fourth stage.
This is seen in meditation. The candidate will sit
and fix his waking consciousness on some object—suppose it is a cat. Then he
will rise to the " dream state ", and try to realize the astral aspect of the
animal. Next he will ascend to the " sleep stage ", and give his attention to
the mental being of the creature. The fourth step would be samadhi—or
contemplation—an attempt to realize its significance and reality for the ego, to
go beyond the three forms of the cat into its subjective meaning. The fixing of
the mind on the cat in the first case is concentration; the process of elevation
of the consciousness is meditation; the final concentration in a higher field of
vision, beyond what was reached before, is contemplation (or samadhi). The last
effort may be like piercing a cloud or fog, out of which the new vision will
gradually form itself, or from which it may come
96
like a flash of lightning. In either case the
practitioner must hold himself very still in order to retain the impression as
long as possible—one thought of self, of the old personal relativity, can
dismiss the whole thing, so that there remains not even a memory of what it was
like.
The three halls, it is said, lead to the end of
toils— not to the end of work, it must be observed. In these lower worlds we
have a sense of work which is certainly quite different from that of higher
levels. To us down here the word is almost synonymous with toil, and often with
drudgery, but from a higher point of view work is really play. Drudgery is
merely action; it does not create the man who does it. But the least bit of work
done occultly, done heartily "as to God and not unto men ", done better than
ever before, is good for the evolution of him who does it. If, in writing a
letter, for example, one is at pains to do it neatly, even beautifully and to
express oneself briefly, clearly and gracefully, one has developed hand, eye and
brain, thought-power, love-power and will-power. True work, such as that of an
artist, is full of creative influence and of joy. We find some toil even in
these things, however, because of the obstructions of the lower planes. Yet even
down here there is no clear dividing line between toil and play. If one goes
out, for example on a long ride, the earlier part of the journey will be full of
delight for both man and horse, but insensibly that passes away as fatigue
increases, until suddenly the man realizes that the ride which was play in the
beginning has now become work, or rather drudgery. In other cases, there may be
a task,
97
not prolonged, but a little beyond our strength; then
there is a sense of toil. But all work in reality is play when there is
willingness and no fatigue or overstrain.
We have much to learn from the animals, and even from
the plants, in this respect. " Grow as the flower grows," says Light on the
Path, " opening your heart to the sun." Said the Christ: " Consider the lilies
of the field, how they grow; they toil not, neither do they spin; and yet I say
unto you, that even Solomon in all his glory was not arrayed like one of these."
1 It is deadly fear of the morrow that makes men's work a toil, that makes them
sweat in bitterness. But the Law says: " Do the wise and right thing today, and
leave the result to take care of itself." This is not a doctrine of idleness,
but of work that is play instead of toil.
An illustration of this is also to be seen in the way
in which different people take a long journey. One man will get into the train
at Chicago, and remain in a fever of impatience for the time which the train
takes to go to San Francisco, his destination. He has fixed his mind on
something that he wants to do there; in the meantime his journey is a toil and a
misery. Another finds a thousand things of interest on the way— the scenery, the
people, the train itself; for him the journey is a happy holiday. And in the end
he has accomplished much more than the other man. The Hindu villager lives very
near to nature, and certainly grows as the flower grows. A man will set out from
his village to get the mail from the Post Office or to post 1 St. Matthew, vi,
7.
98
some letters there, perhaps sixteen or twenty miles
away. He does not tramp along stolidly and painfully, jarring his nerves with
the graceless movements that spring from a discontented or impatient mind. The
vision of his mail is not a mania that shuts out all other interests, and makes
him curse the length of the track. No; there are insects, birds, flowers, trees,
streams, clouds in the sky, fields, houses, people and animals, and lastly the
blessed earth itself, to lie on which for awhile is to be on velvet in the
divine arms. How little the white man knows of life, how much of toil!
The Hindus have long held that God plays. The Lila or
play of Shri Krishna, as it is called, is the great work of evolution, which
looks so toilsome to us that we shudder at the long ages of work that lie in
front, and cry out for rest. Think of the 311,040,000 million years of our
mahakalpa. What an illusion! When we come to the end of toils life will be all
play, all happiness.
The end of toils, though not of work, comes with the
entry of the candidate, on the fourth Path, into the nirvanic plane. He has
finished the toil of casting off the first five fetters—self-personality, doubt,
superstition, liking and disliking—all of which marked his bondage to material
things, with which his life was one long struggle on an up-hill road. But now
his remaining five fetters are internal; he has to conquer them, truly, but his
weapon will be serenity, quietness, calmness— the use of the will, which is the
quietest thing in the world. These fetters are: desire for life in form and
formless life, pride, agitation and ignorance. Little
99
profit is to be derived from examining these in
detail in this place; it is enough to notice their internal character, and to
say that to destroy them the man must quieten himself and his vehicles above the
line that divides the personality from the ego.
At earlier stages, before the end of toils, the
student will do well to organize his life wisely, so that his work for the
Master may be as far as possible play. It should be pure delight, unmixed
happiness—such a condition wou\d make for the swiftest progress. Toil is not
meritorious, nor especially profitable, though sometimes it may be necessary.
How often a student does meditation, feeling it an irksome thing, but regarding
it as a duty to be done, though with travail and suffering. Do it happily and
rejoicing, as play, or at least look forward to the time when you can do so.
Some men sink luxuriously into the arms of the present, and say, " We will enjoy
ourselves now, and let the future take care of itself." Others stand aloof in
proud strength and say, " We refuse to respond to that which can distress us."
But the disciple must bare his back to the strokes of time, rejoicing in the
long future, in the game in which every move can be a dancing poem of delight.
On the subject of the seven worlds, Madame Blavat-sky
says:
Some Oriental mystics locate seven planes of being,
the seven spiritual Lokas or worlds within the body of Kala Hamsa, the swan out
of time and space, convertible into the swan in time, when it becomes Brahma
instead of Brahman.
1OO
All the manifestations of seven in Nature, such as
the seven principles in man, or the seven planes in the world, come from a
sevenfold division arising from Parabrahman. Three of the seven principles are
manifest in the universal consciousness, and three more in mulaprakriti. One
remains at its source and includes all the others, for the presence of many does
not mar the unity of That which is truly One. So, at his lower level, the man
who transcends his middle set or principles (atma-buddhi-manas), and rises into
the first (the Monad), though he escapes from the worlds or planes, finds them
all present in that new state of real nirvana, which is beyond the
consciousness-state as much as that is beyond the mere matter-state. We speak
thus of it, in the third person, only as a concession to ignorance, and must
point out that what has been said should be translated into terms of " you " for
consciousness and " I " for the true life of super-conscious nirvana, if it is
to be understood. These " worlds", however, are not entered by the Arhat, but by
the full Adept.
There are several other ways in which the Arhat may
be thought of as entering the seven worlds of rest eternal:
In one way those worlds are the sub-planes of the
atomic plane, through which the Arhat begins to climb. The characteristic of the
man who dwells in them is a changeless serenity, for everything is seen as in
the One Self, and where that is realized, fear and anxiety can have no place. As
the Gita says: "For the sage
101
enthroned in yoga, serenity is called the means."1 It
is not that there is any lack of activity in those regions —it is one vast wave
of ever-moving life—-but there are no obstructions to the will of the One. On
the buddhic plane we have still duality in a sense, since there one sees others,
though the same Self is seen dwelling in them as in ourselves. But buddhi has to
be transcended, for love implies a duality.
The serenity that the Arhat increasingly acquires
puts a new face on the common planes of our existence. He enjoys in them a
liberty that others do not know; he has found that work is play. Having touched
the vale of bliss, he has discovered that life not only there but on all planes
is pure delight. He not only sees and loves the advancing life behind the
perishing forms, but feels and rejoices in the Divine Will behind the changing
life. The rest eternal that he enjoys is not idleness, but the utter internal
peace of one who knows that all is well, that the Divine Will is present even in
what may to others seem the obstructions to progress, as well as in the apparent
progress itself. A philosopher once caught a glimpse of this idea when he said:
"Be serene; for if you fail through no fault of your own, the failure is a
success better than you knew, since the Divine Will is being done." The Arhat
knows something of the peace that passes understanding, because he is beginning
to dwell in the Eternal. This is, Madame Blavatsky says, " The region of the
full
1 Op. cit., vi, 3.
102
spiritual consciousness, beyond which there is no
longer danger for him who has reached it."
If thou would'st cross the first hall safely, let not
thy mind mistake the fires of lust that burn therein for the sunlight of life.
If thou would'st cross the second safely, stop not
the fragrance of its stupefying blossoms to inhale. If freed thou would'st be
from the karmic chains, seek not for thy Guru in those mayavic regions.
The wise ones tarry not in pleasure-grounds of
senses.
The wise ones heed not the sweet-tongued voices-of
illusion.
Seek for him who is to give thee birth in the Halt of
Wisdom, the hall which lies beyond, wherein all shadows are unknown, and where
the light of truth shines with unfading glory.
The Guru here spoken of is the Master, the Teacher.
Madame Blavatsky puts it:
The Initiate who leads the disciple, through the
knowledge he imparts, to his spiritual, or second birth, is called the father,
Guru or Master.
A statement of the lives and work of the Gurus or
Masters has been given in The Masters and the Path. A glimpse of the marvel of
Their exalted powers is seen in the account there given of a meditation of the
Master Kuthumi. As he sits in his garden or his room, He seems to be meditating,
but is, in fact, giving
103
attention to some millions of people, dealing with
each one as individually as an ordinary man could if he were to give his full
attention to that one.
Every ego is being helped by one of the Masters, so
the man who can vivify the link in himself between the lower self and the higher
may receive that help in his personal life. The gurus who are to be met with on
the physical plane are generally Initiates, advanced pupils of the full Adepts,
as stated before.
That which is uncreate abides in thee, disciple, as
it abides in that hall. If thou would'st reach it and blend the two, thou must
divest thyself of thy dark garments of illusion. Stifle the voice of flesh,
allow no image of the senses to get between its light and thine, that thus the
twain may blend in one. And having learnt thine own Ajnana flee from the Hall of
Learning. This hall is dangerous in its perfidious beauty, is needed but for thy
probation. Beware Lanoo, lest dazzled by illusive radiance thy Soul should
linger and be caught in its deceptive light.
This light shines from the jewel of the great
ensnarer (Mara). The senses it bewitches, blinds the mind, and leaves the unwary
an abandoned wreck.
That which is uncreate refers to the higher triad,
atma-buddhi-manas, as distinguished from the personality and its bodies. The
statement that the hall of learning is needed but for probation applies to the
hall of
104
ignorance as well. The set of material planes,
physical, astral and lower mental, are but the buildings and equipment of a
school for man, in which he is taught by means of toys. There is no experience
that does not modify the soul and give it some wisdom; but he who is alive to
the educative purpose of it all, and is eager to learn and to extract from the
experience of embodied life lessons of eternal value, will not find the toys
attractive in themselves. He will be like the bee that takes the honey from the
flower and goes away, not intoxicated by its scent and colour.
Mara is a personification of the attractiveness of
external things. Madame Blavatsky describes him as follows:
Mara is in exoteric religions a demon, an Asura, but
in esoteric philosophy it is personified temptation through men's vices, and
translated literally means " that which kills " the soul. It is represented as a
king (of the Manas) with a crown in ; which shines a jewel of such lustre that
it blinds those who look at it, this lustre referring of course to the
fascination exercised by vice upon certain natures.
In The Light of Asia1 Sir Edwin Arnold has given us a
vivid picture of this prince of darkness, as he came forth leading the ten chief
sins, his angels of evil, against the Lord Buddha, as He sat under the Bodhi
Tree, when nearing His Illumination.
1 Op. cit., Book vi.
105
The moth attracted to the dazzling flame of thy
night-lamp is doomed to perish in the viscid oil. The unwary Soul that fails to
grapple with the mocking demon of illusion, will return to earth the slave of
Mara.
Behold the hosts of Souls. Watch how they hover o'er
the stormy sea of human life, and how, exhausted, bleeding, broken-winged, they
drop one after another on the swelling waves. Tossed by the fierce winds, chased
by the gale, they drift into the eddies and disappear within the first great
vortex.
The subject of " lost souls " is very complex. Some
are like the children in a class at school who are not ready to pass on with the
bulk of their fellow-students into the next grade at the end of the year, either
because they are too young or because they have been lazy. Then, too, there are
cases where the personality has become so inmeshed in matter during bodily life
that it has nothing to give to the ego, and it may then be cut off. Thirdly,
there are the terrible fruits of the practice of black magic. It would take too
long to discuss the subject here; I have dealt with it at some length in the
article on Lost Souls in Volume I of The Inner Life.
Some of the expressions in these passages have all
the strength of Oriental imagination. We must not think too literally of
abandoned wrecks and broken wings. He who falls from the Path on account of
material
106
desires certainly does wreck his spiritual prospects
for the time being, but even in that case he has learnt something which will be
useful to the soul later on. In all cases it is best for a man to learn with
wise thought; only when that is neglected will bitter experience be necessary to
take its place.
It is by no means requisite that any human being
shall go through every kind of experience. The more advanced and the wiser a man
becomes, the more he will see in everything, and he will learn much from trifles
that others might pass by as insignificant. It is said that a fool cannot learn
even from a wise man, but a wise man can always learn, even from a fool. To know
that fire is hot it is not necessary to put one's hand into it; a fool may do
so, but the wise man has other ways of learning the fact that fire burns. Yet it
is a great blessing that those who will not think and thus learn willingly,
should be taught in the stern school of experience, without which they would
learn nothing at all and make no progress.
The law of karma, that brings to men the experiences
that they have given to others, is thus a benefactor and ultimately a liberator,
not an instrument of vengeance or punishment. Suppose, for example, that a
foot-pad waylaid a gentleman, knocked him down, perhaps killed him, and took his
money. Under the law he would have to meet with some such painful experience
himself, sooner or later. The robber was capable of such an act because he
himself was a coarse being, lacking sensitiveness and imagination; otherwise he
would have thought
107
of the feelings of his victim or of the latter's wife
and family, and such thought would have stayed his hand. Because he is coarse,
crass, unimaginative, the foot-pad needs the violent kind of experience that he
gives to others; nothing less will stir him. Later, when through karmic
retribution he has had some suffering, he will remember it when he is about to
strike another, and will say to himself: " That is not a very nice thing for
that poor man." He will then begin to reform, thanks to the law, which is always
educative, never punitive.
CHAPTER 8 THE WORLD'S MOTHER
If through the Hall of Wisdom thou would'st reach the
vale of bliss, disciple, close fast thy senses against the great dire heresy of
separateness, that weans thee from the rest.
C.W.L.—Herbert Spencer came very near to a revelation
of the spiritual truth about evolution, when he described it as a progressive
change from a state of incoherent homogeneity to one of coherent heterogeneity
of structure and function. To him evolution meant that things which in the
beginning were similar and separate, later become different but united. This
specialization is seen in the human body, which has different organs which work
for the whole; thus the digestive system digests food for the whole body, and
the hands grasp, the feet walk, the eyes look, not for the sake of the hands,
the feet and the eyes, but for the whole body. Similarly, society becomes more
and more highly organized as time goes on. Men become more and more
differentiated from one another, as the professions in life advance in knowledge
and skill. The doctor cures all, the teacher teaches all, the bridge-builder
builds bridges for all. One man works for the benefit of many, and the work of
many flows back to benefit him.
109
When men get the organic sense and feeling for their
fellows they cease to be a mob of incoherent homogeneous human beings and become
heterogeneous and coherent. A man with that spirit will do his best for his
community, or nation, or humanity, leaving it to the law of unity to bring him
what he needs from the other organs of the great body. The incoherent
homogeneous elements of matter or of society cannot organize themselves; it is
the inner principle that draws them together and makes swift progress possible
for them through mutual help. The unity is love, the force behind evolution, the
energy of life; it is buddhi, the greatest wisdom. There is a profound
difference between co-operation and brotherhood —the former springs from an
intelligent appreciation of the mutual relations of men, the latter from a
realization in feeling that the same life is dwelling in all.
In the evolution of an individual it is usually the
spirit of co-operation that develops first; the business of the world brings
people together, then by contact the divine fire of buddhi is struck. Two men,
for example, go prospecting together, and support each other in the work. True
friendship supervenes. But if it should chance, as it sometimes does, that
brotherhood comes first, it will not develop into perfect and useful
co-operation unless the intelligence is also awakened and applied to the
business of life. An instance in point was the beautiful love between David
Copperfield and his impractical wife Dora, whom the novelist was constrained to
kill in order to make room for the
110
more practical Agnes, and so give the story a happier
termination.
In the occult life candidates who have developed the
higher intelligence so that they have a keen appreciation of the principle of
co-operation and of spiritual laws, often still find themselves dull and
apparently incapable of rapid progress. They await the awakening in themselves
of true love, buddhi. That is the burning energy of the inner man. Still, in
this second of the stages of true spiritual unfoldment there will often be much
agitation and trouble; the divine energy gushes forth irregularly and not always
in the wisest way, causing much sorrow to its possessor—-until the third
spiritual stage, the place of serenity, has been reached. As that serenity is
the goal to which the voice of the silence is directing the candidate, he is
told to pass through the Hall of Wisdom into the vale of bliss. Even in the
buddhic plane there is a certain duality, or separateness. We cannot love
ourselves; love needs an object, even though it be not a material object, but
the divine life manifested in many spiritual souls. Buddhi is the first veil,
the Avalokiteshvara of the Higher Self, not the Parabrahman. The " dire heresy
of separateness " has to be disposed of on every plane in turn, the physical,
the astral, the mental and even the buddhic.
Let not thy " heaven-born," merged in the sea of
Maya, break from the universal Parent (Soul), but let the fiery power retire
into the inmost chamber, the chamber of the heart, and the abode of the world's
Mother.
111
Then from the heart that power shall rise into the
sixth, the middle region, the place between thine eyes, when it becomes the
breath of the One-soul, the voice which filleth all, thy Master's voice.
The " heaven-born " is chitta, the lower mind. It is
born from the soul above, when manas becomes dual in incarnation. The planes of
atma-buddhi-manas are typified by heaven, while those of the personality are
spoken of as earth. We have already observed the distinction of character which
divides the five planes of human manifestation into two. The monadic and divine
planes, beyond these five, taken together form a third division. So the seven
worlds can also be grouped as three. The lowest division is in the region of
sattva or law. Here we find everything regulated, but man has some freedom
because the " heaven-born " is in him—• so much of the energy of the Law-maker
works through him. It is because man has this liberty and power to go his own
way that his life is usually more disorderly, less regulated, than that of the
lower kingdoms of external nature.
The middle set of planes contains those of spiritual
energy, the indwelling life, without which the rest would be dead and
motionless. They are the planes of the divine, the shining, the Avalokita, or "
seen", God—the life seen by wisdom, not the form seen by knowledge.
The highest group of planes is that of the Monad, the
Self that is bliss and freedom, where are the realities behind every human ideal
and the ecstasy beyond consciousness that is the extracted quintessence of
beauty,
112
goodness, truth, harmony, comprehension, union and
freedom.
What is here called the fiery power is the force
named kundalini in Sanskrit. This may be described as a latent fire, coiled up
like a sleeping serpent at the base of the spine in all men except those few in
whom it has been specially awakened, and is actively working in the etheric
body. It should not be difficult to realize the existence of such a fire, since
it is well known that the breath in our lungs constantly feeds a slow fire, and
that digestion also is a kind of fire. Kundalini is more like electrical fire—a
force developing heat where there is resistance— than fire that burns fuel, but
it is not of the same order of force as electricity.
I have written on this subject in the articles on the
Serpent-Fire and the Force-Centres in The Inner Life and that on Vitality in
Chapter IV of The Hidden Side of Things, and I hope to publish shortly a
somewhat fuller study, illustrated with coloured plates.1 There is also aft
extensive, if somewhat obscure, literature on the subject in Sanskrit, including
the Shat-chakranirupana, the Ananda Lahari, and many other works. There is an
excellent translation of the first of these, with a commentary, by Arthur
Avalon, called The Serpent Power, published by Ganesh & Co., Madras.
The following is a very brief summary of the subject.
Kundalini is the lower end of a stream of a certain
kind of the force of the Logos, and it commonly lies
sleeping in the chakra or force-centre at the base of
the
1 Book on Chakras has been since issued by T.P.H.,
Adyar.
113
spine. If it is awakened prematurely, that is, before
the man has purified his character of every taint of sensual impurity and
selfishness, it may rush downwards and vivify certain lower centres in the body
(used only in some objectionable forms of black magic), and irresistibly carry
the unfortunate man into a life of indescribable horror; at best, it will
intensify all that the man has in him, including such qualities as ambition and
pride. Kundalini should be wakened only under the personal direction of a
Master, who will instruct the student in the use of the will to arouse it, in
the manner in which it should be moved when aroused, and in the spiral course
along which it must be carried through the chakras or force-centres, from that
near the base of the spine, to those which lie on the surface of the etheric
double at the spleen,1 the navel, the heart, the throat, between the eyebrows,
and at the top of the head. This course differs with different types of people,
and it is quite a definite physical thing, for the force has literally to burn a
pathway for itself through the impurities of the etheric double.
There are chakras in the astral body also, which are
already aroused by kundalini working in that plane in all fairly evolved people.
The process of developing those centres has rendered the astral body sensitive
to the plane, awakening its feeling, its power to travel about, its sympathetic
response to other entities
1 Hindu works usually mention the chakra at the root
of the genital organs as the second. We recognize the existence of such a
centre, but we follow the ancient Egyptians in thinking it eminently undesirable
that it should be stirred into activity.
114
there; its vision and hearing, and astral faculties
generally. But the memory of those experiences or the use of the astral
faculties while in the physical body becomes possible in a definite and
well-controlled way only when kundalini in the etheric double has been carried
through the corresponding centres.
The special mention of the place between the eyes in
our text has reference to the pineal gland and the pituitary body. The forces
from both the sixth and seventh astral centres (which are between the eyebrows
and on top of the head) usually converge on the pituitary body, when the etheric
centre is aroused, and then vivify it and act through it. But there is a certain
type of people (who are being addressed in our text) in whom the seventh astral
chakra vivifies the pineal gland instead of the pituitary body, and it in that
case forms a line of communication directly with the lower mental plane, without
apparently passing through the astral plane in the ordinary way. Through that
channel come for them the communications from within, while for the other type
of people they come through the pituitary body.
When kundalini awakens of itself, which it rarely
does, or is accidentally aroused, it usually tries to pass up the interior of
the spine, instead of following the spiral course in which the occultist is
trained to guide it. In this case it will probably rush out through the head,
and the man will suffer from, nothing worse than a temporary unconsciousness.
The Hindu books hint at, rather than explain, what
happens. They make no references to the chakras on
115
the surface of the etheric double, but speak of their
roots, which are in the spine. In the spine, running from its base to the top is
what is called Merudanda, the rod of Meru, the central axis of creation. In that
rod is the channel called sushumna, and in that again is the channel called
chitrini, which is "as fine as a spider's thread ". Upon that are threaded the
chakras, like the knots on a bamboo rod. The lowest of the chakras, called
muladhara, lies at the base of the spine, and in it kundalini sleeps, closing
the mouth of the merudanda.
The aim of the aspirant is to raise kundalini through
all the chakras till she reaches that which is between the eyebrows. Then the
candidate will find that he, as it were, remains behind, while she leaps forward
into the sahasrara, the great " thousand-petalled " lotus at the top of the
head. If he goes with her, it will take him out of the body and put a stop for
the time being to his practice of meditation in the body. She rises up chitrini
little by little as the candidate uses his will in meditation. In one practice
he may not get very far, but in the next he will go a little further, and so on.
When she comes to one of the chakras or lotuses she pierces it and the flower,
which was turned downwards, now turns upwards. The candidate meditates upon her
in some form, and upon her associates, seated in that lotus. An elaborate dhyana
or meditation, full of rich symbology, is prescribed for each lotus. When the
meditation is over, the candidate leads kundalini back again by the same path
into the muladhara; but in some schools she is
116
brought back only as far as the heart chakra, and
there she enters what is called her chamber.
Kundalini can be awakened by various methods, but it
should be done only under the direction of a guru or competent teacher, the
Master who is responsible to the Brotherhood for the training of the candidate.
He is not likely to conduct this awakening until the first three fetters on the
Path have been destroyed by the candidate's own power, so that he is no longer
in serious danger of being stirred by sensuous or material things. Then his "
heaven-born ", closely united or harmonized with the higher manas, can remain
master of the triple house of personality, and when the energy of kundalini" is
set free in the body it will be likely to run in pure channels of service to the
higher self. Hence the awakening of kundalini will take place usually somewhere
near the Third Initiation, or, in the present kali yuga, or dark age, it is
said, even later. Even then it is awakened in various layers, so that in the
early stages it may give nothing more than a general sensitiveness to the higher
planes.
Kundalini is thought of as a goddess. She is what is
called the shabdabrahman in the body. Shabda means sound. Sound is the creative
force, as before described. Speech is considered to be the most outward form of
it. It is an expression of thought, which in its true active form is
kriyashakti. Certain letters of the alphabet, which are the foundation of human
speech, are said to reside in each of the chakras, and the power of those
letters (their portion of the creative word) is awakened
117
when kundalini enters them after her union with Shiva
in the highest centre, causing them to shine brilliantly with her light. The
creative speech of Brahma, the Third Logos, has four forms or stages; hence He
is called the four-faced one. When kundalini represents him in the body she also
exhibits those four forms, as she rises through the chakras.
Kundalini is called the world's mother because the
•outward action of the powers of consciousness is always regarded as feminine.
Thus will, wisdom and activity are feminine, being shaktis or powers, outward
turned aspects of the divine. She is the representative of all these, as they
were expressed in the creation of the world, in the activity of Brahma, the
Third Logos. It has also been said that she is the world's mother because it is
through her that the various planes are brought into conscious existence for the
occultist.
The following footnote by Madame Blavatsky will also
throw light on the foregoing explanations.
The inner chamber of the heart, called in Sanskrit,
Brahma-pura. The " fiery power " is Kundalini.
The "power" and the "world-mother" are names given to
Kundalini—-one of the mystic Yogi powers. It is Buddhi considered as an active
instead of a passive principle (which it is generally, when regarded only as the
vehicle, or casket, of the supreme spirit, Atma). It is an electro-spiritual
force, a creative power which when aroused into action can as easily kill as it
can create.
118
It is by no means certain what Madame Blavatsky meant
by saying that kundalini is active buddhi, but several speculations may be
offered:
In normal men buddhi is not positively active in the
outer life, but when the first three fetters have been cast off, the personality
is so purified that the astral J body will no longer be active merely on its
own account, but will faithfully respond to buddhi, now active. At or near
this stage kundalini is often aroused, as we have seen, and when the faculties
of the astral body are then laid open to the candidate while in his physical
body it is an astral body reflecting buddhi, which now becomes a veritable fire
of love in the man's life. That clairvoyance and other psychic powers need
not be awakened in the physical brain even at this advanced stage of human
progress, is also indicated by Dr. Besant. in her Initiation, the Perfecting of
Man. She there says that before a man can come to the Third Initiation he
must learn to bring the spirit of intuition (buddhi) down to his
physical consciousness, so that it may abide on him and guide him.
Then she adds: " This process is usually called ' the development of psychic
faculties,' and it is so, in the true meaning of the word ' psychic'. But it
does not mean the development of clairvoyance and clairaudience, which
depend on a different process."
The entire higher triad (atma-buddhi-manas) is but
the central member or the buddhi of the still more inclusive triad of Monad, ego
and personality. That
119
larger buddhi is triple (will, wisdom and activity),
and now its third aspect (activity, kriyashakti) comes into operation in the
body, to awaken its organs and liberate its latent powers.
'Tis only then thou canst become a "walker of the
sky," who treads the winds above the waves, whose step touches not the waters.
On this, Madame Blavatsky says:
Kechara, " sky-walker " or " goer ". As explained in
the 6th Adhyaya of that king of mystic works, the Jnaneshvari—the body of the
Yogi becomes as one formed of the wind; as "a cloud from which limbs have
sprouted out," after which—"he [the Yogi] beholds the things beyond the seas and
stars; he hears the language of the Devas and comprehends it, and perceives what
is passing in the mind of the ant."
The term " walker of the sky " has various grades of
meaning. In Indian story it is, for example, applied to the great Rishi Narada,
as an emissary of the Logos, who could travel through the pure akasha from globe
to globe. On the lower planes, the astral body or the mayavi-rupa may be taken
as an illustration, as they can be used to travel in what is the air or sky to
ordinary people.
In the astral world the ordinary man is a kind of
cloud, a being full of kama, that is, desire and emotion, but not by any means a
definite entity such as he is on the physical plane. But when he masters his
kama,
120
and gives it definiteness, the astral body is
organized as a vehicle; it is no longer kama but kamarupa. Still further, about
the time when the first three fetters are dispensed with, the mayavi-rupa is
formed, and that enables the man to operate with his mental body in the astral
as well as the lower mental plane. This may be taken as one interpretation of
the statement that his step " touches not the waters ", which are a symbol for
the astral plane.
CHAPTER 9 THE SEVEN SOUNDS
Before thou sett'st thy foot upon the ladder's upper
rung, the ladder of the mystic sounds, thou hast to hear the voice of thy inner
God in seven manners.
C.W.L.—It has already been mentioned that The Voice
of the Silence is intended to guide the candidate as far as the Fourth
Initiation. At that point his consciousness is raised to the seventh principle
and begins to function in the atmic or nirvanic plane. The man is then ready to
commence treading what is here called the ladder's upper rung, to go through the
course of training which prepares for the Fifth Initiation, that of the Asekha
Adept. The Path has two equal divisions, which may be called the ladder's lower
and upper rungs.
It is said that the Initiate on the ladder's lower
rung must hear the voice of his inner God in seven manners. That inner God at
his present stage is the higher Self, the buddhi, the second principle. In his
meditation the aspirant may or may not hear a series of seven sounds, marking
his attainment of the seven sub-planes of the buddhic plane; that depends upon
his psychic
122
temperament. But what he must do, in all cases, is to
bring the influence of buddhi down into his life on each of the lower planes, so
that the activity of all his principles will be governed by it, and thus his
inner God will be ever-present in his life.
The latter stage is called the ladder of the mystic
sounds; this is perhaps because they are the sounds of the voice of the silence,
hidden in the atma or Self. One must not push too far the exact interpretation
of any English word in our text, as it is only a translation; though every
Sanskrit and Pali word in it is rich with technical significance. Still, the
word mystic, coming from a root that means to close the eyes, indicates here
certain sounds which do not mingle in the outward life at all, but give
direction as from above, in the ex cathedra manner of pure conscience. It is
implied that the sounds about to be mentioned are more accessible, are not "
mystic " at all events to the candidate at the stage under consideration. True
conscience does not tell you what to do, as is commonly supposed, but it
commands you to follow that which you already really know to be best, when your
mind is trying to invent some excuse to do otherwise. It speaks with the
authority of the spiritual will, determining our path in life. It is not the
atma, but the buddhi, the second principle, that gives intuitive knowledge as to
right and wrong. Manas gives inspiration, buddhi intuition as to right and
wrong, atma the directing conscience.
The first is like the nightingale's sweet voice,
chanting a song of parting to its mate.
THE SEVEN SOUNDS 123
The second comes as the sound of a silver cymbal of
the Dhyanis, awakening the twinkling stars.
The next is as the plaint melodious of the
ocean-sprite imprisoned in its shell.
And this is followed by the chant of the vina.
The fifth like the sound of bamboo-flute shrills in
thine ear.
It changes next into a trumpet-blast.
The last vibrates like the dull rumbling of a.
thunder-cloud.
The seventh swallows all the other sounds."
They die, and then are heard no more.
The series of seven sounds mentioned here has caused
much puzzlement among those who meditate upon this little book. We must notice
first of all the character of the sounds; then we shall see that there are
several interpretations of them. They are increasing in materiality and losing,
in penetrating quality in the order here given. One may notice, for example, the
difference between the vina and an Indian trumpet of the old-fashioned kind. It
is nearly always a surprise to the European, when he first hears the wonderfully
delicate music of the vina, perhaps in a large and crowded hall, how, without
any exhibition of force, it reaches every corner, and how it gives the
impression of sound half-removed from our material planes.
The highest sound in the series is likened to a
certain chant of the nightingale. It is said that there are occasions when
the voice of this bird rises higher and higher
124
in pitch until it is beyond the range of human
hearing, although one may still see the throat of the warbler trembling with
song. That such high sounds exist is well known to students of science. The note
of a siren, for example, can be raised by increased pressure of air or steam,
until one after another of those who are listening declare that they can no
longer hear it. There is a certain kind of whistle with which German police dogs
can be called. When one blows upon this instrument, which looks like an ordinary
whistle, no man can hear the slightest sound, but the dog, in another room or
some distance away, will instantly prick up its ears, and come leaping and
bounding to the exact spot where what is presumably to it the sound originated.
The interpretations of the sounds fall into two
groups. The first mentioned in the list may represent the last heard by the
candidate. The sounds are enumerated downwards in the order of their creation,
after the Oriental manner, so that the first sound in creation is the seventh
when the aspirant is approaching the Lord of that creation. So, first comes the
dull rumbling of a thunder-cloud, a sound representing or correlated to the
physical principle in man, in the middle is the vina, representing the
antahkarana (according to Madame Blavatsky's classification), and lastly there
is the nightingale's melody, associated with atma, the silence. That well
typifies the seventh, the soundless sound, into which all the others have to be
raised, until they die away and are heard no more. The candidate must learn to
hear God in the dull rumbling sound of the physical plane,
125
then in the trumpet-blast of the astral, then in the
sound of the lower mental that is likened to the music of a bamboo-flute, and so
on right up to the world of his highest principle.
The same sounds may be taken in another way as
typical of the intensity with which the aspirant hears the voice of the higher
Self. It is one voice, but is heard in seven manners. At first it is delicate
and sweet, like the nightingale's song, and it often disappears into silence;
next it becomes stronger, like " the silver cymbal of the Dhyanis ". Louder and
louder it becomes, until at last it is constantly heard, as filling all the air,
like the dull rumbling of a thunder-cloud. In the early stages of our progress
the voice of the higher Self may seem thin and faint, but later it will have for
us all the reality of thunder.
Again, in the text the description of these sounds
follows upon the mention of kundalini, which is carried through the chakras.
That force awakens in seven layers, or degrees, and so gives the psychic results
already mentioned in increasing power. The voice that is heard when kundalini
rises to the place between the eyes will therefore be heard with seven degrees
of intensity, typified by the seven sounds here mentioned.
Once more, it is natural that in the densest plane
the candidate should hear the inner voice but faintly, like the nightingale's
voice. When he rises to the next plane, where the covering of the inner Self is
not so dense, its voice will be more easily heard; until finally, when he
reaches the highest principle it will be like the rumbling
126
of a thunder-cloud. It is only the illusion of the
lower planes that causes us to ascribe delicacy to the higher things. Ultimately
we shall find that they have the full body and reality of thunder.
These interpretations are not mutually exclusive. All
the experiences which they suggest are possible for the candidate at the same
time.
I remember that on one occasion a question about
these sounds was asked in one of our talks on the roof at Adyar. The President
and I respectively answered as follows:
A.B.—In meditation, one of the sounds that you begin
to hear (for instance, one thing that I heard quite distinctly) was a sound
which was like the beating of a tom-tom in a Indian village. I described that to
H.P.B., who said: "That is very good, go on." Next I heard some strains of
beautiful music, and then something like silver chimes. . Another sound was like
the ringing of a temple bell, such as you hear in Benares. I never found out
that these sounds meant anything more than that I was becoming able to hear in
the astral world.
In India there is a school formed by a man of whom
the Master M. spoke highly. The people who belong to that, after a certain
amount of practice, hear sounds quite clearly in the brain, but I have never
found that any of them got further on that account. Many people come to me in
the North, asking what the sounds mean. I reply: " I think it is nothing more
than that you are becoming clairaudient."
These seven sounds mentioned by H.P.B. I have never
been able to sort out. They may mean that you have to wake your consciousness in
plane after plane, and that each is meant to symbolize the note of a particular
plane, just as down here Fa is the combination of the countless sounds in the
physical plane blended together. But that does not really explain matters.
C.W.L.—I cannot make them exactly correspond with the
planes; they may possibly be sub-planes. They may also be intended to symbolize
the sounds which accompany the awakening of the seven centres by the Kundalini,
for sound is one of the expressions that take place in that particular case. I
have never felt at all certain of what she meant. One would be inclined to
127
say that the silver cymbal in different tones would
do for all The thunder certainly does not seem to fit in very well.
A.B.—-Of course there are a certain number of sounds
in the head which belong entirely to the vascular system. If a person hears such
sounds very strongly it means that he is getting into a dangerous state of
anaemia.
The sounds are not progressive. H.P.B. put things
very often in a circle; she sometimes begins with number four and then works
round on the two sides. It may also be that she gives these sounds in no sort of
order. You might possibly begin with the thunder, then the trumpet blast, and
next the ocean sprite; then you might come to the cymbal for the fourth, the
flute for the fifth and the vina, which is a more delicate sound, for the sixth,
and then the nightingale for the seventh, the top.
C.W.L.—-If we are allowed to turn them round like
that, they will begin to mean something definite.
A.B.—H.P.B., when consulted astrally said: "What
fools you all were to take them in that way: you might have arranged them
before: thunder, trumpet, ocean-shell, cymbal, flute, vina, nightingale." She
said that we were abominably literal.
C.W.L.—.Similar lists of sounds are to be found in
various Sanskrit works. We have taken the following example from the Shiva
Samhita:
The first sound is like the hum of the
honey-intoxicated bee, next that of a flute, then of a harp; after this, by the
gradual practice of Yoga, the destroyer of the darkness of the world, he hears
the sounds of ringing bells; then sounds like the roar of thunder. When one
fixes his full attention on this sound, being free from fear, he gets
absorption, O my beloved! When the mind of the Yogi is exceedingly engaged in
this sound, he forgets all external things, and is absorbed in this sound." 1
When the six are slain and at the Master's feet are
laid, then is the pupil merged into the One, becomes that One and lives therein.
Madame Blavatsky speaks of the six as:
The six principles; meaning when the lower
personality is destroyed and the inner individuality is merged into and lost in
the seventh or Spirit.
1 Op. cit., v, 27-8.
128
And of the One here spoken of she says: The disciple
is one with Brahman or Atma.
When the six principles are " slain", in other words,
when they no longer assert their independence, but have become entirely obedient
to the will of the Self, the aspirant lives in that One. The seventh voice of
buddhi will carry him up into Atma. Madame Blavatsky applies the term Brahman to
the human atma by analogy. Brahman (neuter) is the One containing the Three; so
does atma contain buddhi and manas within itself, when the man has become an
Arhat, and learned to live in the triple spirit.
Before that path is entered, thou must destroy thy
lunar body, cleanse thy mind-body, and make clean thy heart.
To the term " lunar body " Madame Blavatsky adds the
note:
The astral form produced by the kamic principle, the
Kama Rupa, or body of desire.
On the term " mind-body " she comments:
Manasa Rupa. The first refers to the astral or
personal self; the second to the individuality, .or the reincarnating Ego, whose
consciousness on our plane, or the lower Manas, has to be paralysed.
Madame Blavatsky did not think in planes so
completely as do most of the Theosophists of today. She had her eye more on the
principles, and saw the matter of different levels taking form under their
influence.
129
Here she speaks of " our plane", meaning the region
of personal existence—physical, astral and lower mental. The " astral form " is
by no means necessarily the astral body, but rather the personal form built up
in the subjective regions of our personal life (the astral and lower mental
planes) on account of our bodily form and the personal feelings and thoughts
connected with it. In my little book The Devachanic Plane and in Dr. Besant's
Ancient Wisdom an account is given of the four types of life in the
heaven-world: (1) personal friendship, (2) personal devotion, (3) the true
missionary spirit, and (4) human achievement. They are all emotive—though
unselfish, they are not impersonal, but kamic. They take their form from the
character of the physical plane experience. But the pure lower manas would be
the antahkarana—it would be the soul's mind, not the body's mind. It would have
its activity stimulated only from above. It must now be cleansed from all the
kama, to become a pure channel for the soul.
Think of the condition of the astral body of an
advanced person. It gives practically no direct response to impacts from
outside. It is, by itself, dead to the world. It has no independent life of its
own; it has been " slain ". If some one went up to the average man and struck
him, probably his astral body Would burst instantly into flames of anger; that
is its immediate response. Not so that of the advanced man. The impact in his
case would go inwards through the astral to the buddhic vehicle. That would
respond in its own way. Then its impact upon the astral would call
130
forth the beautiful colours of the love emotions
which are its correspondences in the astral body. Dr. Besant has often explained
that the astral aura of an advanced man is colourless, or rather, slightly
milky-white, when in repose, but that all the most lovely colours which the ,
plane can exhibit flood through it in response to the great man's buddhic
response to the world.
Eternal life's pure waters, clear and crystal, with
the monsoon tempest's muddy torrents cannot mingle.
Heaven's dew-drop glittering in the morn's first
sunbeam within the bosom of the lotus, when dropped on earth becomes a piece of
clay; behold, the pearl is now a speck of mire.
Strive with thy thoughts unclean before they
overpower thee. Use them as they will thee, for if thou sparest them and they
take root and grow, know well, these thoughts will overpower and kill thee.
Beware, disciple, suffer not even though it be their shadow to approach. For it
will grow, increase in size and power, and then this thing of darkness will
absorb thy being before thou hast well realized the black foul monster's
presence.
There are some people in the world who imagine that
It is possible to carry on the lower things and still make progress on the Path.
Sometimes they actually think that by various forms of vicious excitement they
can generate a great deal of energy which will help to carry them onward and
upward. They are afraid of becoming
131
colourless, should they repress the lower activities
entirely. It has been said, of course, that the colourless person, the feeble
good man, cannot make progress. " I would thou wert cold or hot," says the
Spirit in Revelation, and " Because thou art lukewarm, and neither cold nor hot,
I will spue thee out of my mouth."1
This very well represents the facts. The most
promising persons, in order of preference, are (1) the vigorous good man, (2)
the vigorous bad man, (3) the ordinary good man. No man can be an effective
criminal unless he has a strong development of some divine quality. His badness
is the result of unbalance—-such as great will-power and courage, or great
intelligence, without love for his fellow-beings. Or great love and willpower,
without intelligence, can make an equally dangerous and harmful man, for he may
become a fanatical leader of forces of discontent and disruption. The mere good
man, weak in all qualities—in will, intelligence and love—makes little progress,
though it may be steady. Great men have great faults, but they may get rid of
them quickly; little men have little faults, which often seem to last for ever.
There is in all this no recommendation to evil
living. It indicates that mere repression of lower tendencies will not make for
rapid progress, but that there must be positive and- vigorous exertion in the
expression of what is high and good. While making that effort a person may
possibly fall. The very will-power or knowledge or love that he has gained by
his exertions will make the
1 Revelation 3, 15-16.
132
man's fall deep and terrible, should he become
unbalanced. Thus the magnitude of a man's sin may be a sign of possible rapid
future progress for him; but that progress will begin only when the man through
karmic suffering has realized his error and purged away the impurities
incidental to his fall. Nothing much can be done, however, until that
purification has taken place. Madame Blavatsky deals vigorously with this point
in her First Steps in Occultism, as follows:
There are those whose reasoning powers have been so
distorted by foreign influences that they imagine that animal passions can be so
sublimated and elevated that their- fury, force and fire can, so to speak, be
turned inwards; that they can be stored and shut up in one's breast, until their
energy is, not expanded, but turned towards higher and more holy purposes:
namely, until, their collective and unexpanded strength enables their possessor
to enter the true Sanctuary of the Soul and stand therein in the presence of the
Master—the HIGHER SELF. For this purpose they will not struggle with their
passions nor slay them. They will simply, by a strong effort of will, put down
the fierce flames and keep them at bay within their natures allowing the fire to
smoulder under a thin layer of ashes. They submit joyfully to the torture of the
Spartan boy who allowed the fox to devour his entrails rather than part with it.
Oh, poor, blind visionaries!
As well hope that a band of drunken chimney-sweeps,
hot and greasy from their work, may be shut up in a Sanctuary hung with pure
white linen, and that instead of soiling and turning it by their presence into a
heap of dirty shreds, they will become masters in and of the sacred recess, and
finally emerge from it as immaculate as that recess. Why not imagine that a
dozen skunks imprisoned in the pure atmosphere of a Dgon-pa (a monastery), can
issue out of it impregnated with all the perfumes of the incense used? Strange
aberration of the human mind.
This portion of our text concludes with the following
uncompromising passages:
Before the mystic power can make of thee a God,
Lanoo, thou must have gained the faculty to slay thy lunar form at will.
133
The Self of matter and the Self of Spirit can never
meet. One of the twain must disappear; there is no place for both.
Ere thy Soul's mind can understand, the bud of
personality must be crushed out, the worm of sense destroyed past resurrection.
The mystic power is once more kundalini, the
representative in the body of" the great pristine force which underlies all
organic and inorganic matter ". Madame Blavatsky's note on the subject is as
follows:
Kundalini, the serpent power or mystic fire; it is
called the serpentine or the annular power on account of its spiral-like working
or progress in the body of the ascetic developing the power in himself. It is an
electric fiery occult or fohatic power, the great pristine force which underlies
all organic and inorganic matter.
CHAPTER 10 BECOME THE PATH
Thou canst not travel on the Path before thou hast
become that Path itself.
C.W.L.—To this the following foot-note is appended:
This Path is mentioned in all the mystic works. As
Krishna says in the Jnaneshvari; " When this path is beheld . . . whether one
sets out to the bloom of the east, or to the chambers of the west, without
moving, O holder of the bow, is the travelling in this road. In this path, to
whatever place one would go, that place one's own self becomes." " Thou art the
path," is said to the Adept Guru, and by the latter to the disciple, after
Initiation. " I am the way and the path," says another Master.
It has already been explained (in the commentary on
At the Feet of the Master) that the thoughts and feelings which are at first
difficult to grasp and maintain become quite easy in the course of time. When
the aspirant has so trained and developed himself that the buddhic outlook and
response to life become perfectly natural and spontaneous to him, we may say he
has become the Path itself. Sometimes such a consequence
135
of continued effort and practice is called " second
nature ". That expression, however, gives one something of a feeling that the
new qualities have been put on, and afterwards become habitual. That is
unfortunate. It is our original and best nature, our higher nature, that shows
itself in the higher life; it seems to be something new to us only because it
has heretofore been obscured by our material integuments and the pressure of
circumstances in the worlds of our personal being.
An interesting metaphysical truth is indicated in the
foot-note. Our evolution is not a transit, nor even a growth. It is not a
process of going somewhere, nor an increase of size. It is an unfoldment of the
powers potential in our lives. As already stated, in the planes of the ego
materiality takes second place, the powers of consciousness—-will, "wisdom and
activity (or will, love and thought)—-dominate almost completely the matter of
the planes. Therefore space is not the jailor which it is down here, and
consciousness need not travel through it in order to appear in another place.
The following conversation between a Guru and his pupil has been related to
illustrate this point. The Guru told the pupil to walk across the room, and then
asked:
" What were you doing? Were you moving? "
After meditating upon the matter, the disciple gave
the following answer, which was declared to be correct:
" No, I was not moving. I was watching the body
move. I was thinking, feeling and willing; the body alone was moving." 1 The
Seven Rays.
136
This fact is true for all of us; we know of the
body's motion merely on account of observing it by means of the senses, just as
we do that of any other object. The sensation of rushing along, in an open
motor-car, for example, resolves itself, when one shuts one's eyes, into an
actual feeling of air rushing by, and a sense of power which, acting through the
imagination, exhilarates the body. The same experience could be reproduced by
suitable apparatus, composed of wind and motion machines, without any
transportation of the body. Again, most people who have travelled at night in
Pullman berths have had the experience of waking and wondering whether they were
going head first or feet first, or even whether the train was moving or not, and
they have usually settled the question by slipping up the blind and inferring
their direction from an observation of passing lights and shadows.
The fact that, in order to go from one place to
another, travelling is not necessary for the ego, is shown also in the way in
which it can simultaneously appear in the devachanic images of a number of
people in the lower mental plane in different parts of the world.
Though, at the stage of development presupposed in
this teaching, the candidate is working at the perfection of his personality, at
the same time his inner work is particularly concerned with the development of
buddhi, the spiritual soul. To put it in other words, he is climbing through the
buddhic plane. Hence his becoming the Path is shown in a great development of
137
sympathy and love for others, as indicated
in the following verses:
Let thy Soul lend its ear to every cry of pain like
as the lotus bares its heart to drink the morning son.
Let not the fierce sun dry one tear of pain before
thyself hast wiped it from the sufferer's eye.
But let each burning human tear drop on thy heart and
there remain; nor ever brush it off until the pain that caused it is removed.
These tears, O thou of heart most merciful, these are
the streams that irrigate the fields of charity immortal. "Tis on such soil that
grows the midnight blossom of Buddha, more difficult to find, more rare to view,
than is the flower of the Vogay tree. It is the seed of freedom from rebirth. It
isolates the Arhat both from strife and lust, it leads Mm through the fields of
being unto the peace and bliss known only in the land of silence and non-being.
When Christ said, " I am the way, and the truth, and
the life: no man cometh unto the Father, but by me," He declared a mystic truth,
for the Christ is one with the buddhic aspect of the world-consciousness. There
is only one consciousness; on full recognition of this fact the Initiate can
become an Arhat—but unless he goes through that Christ-principle he cannot reach
the Father, the atma, above. That truth, explained with
S. John, 14, 6
138
wonderful inspiration and clarity in Dr. Annie
Besant's Esoteric Christianity, is, however, only" one aspect of the matter, for
the Christ incarnate embodied the same principle in his outward life in
Palestine, which has moved millions of men—-because he did not shrink from pain.
Most men try to escape pain as much as possible, but Christ accepted his own and
added to it that of all other people as well. Men who follow the buddhic path
instinctively say, when trouble comes to them: " Many are suffering; why should
I desire to be exempt?" More than that, in the fullness of their sympathy, they
feel that other suffering to the breaking point, before they reach the serenity
of Arhatship, the illumination that puts death under them, that makes them glow
with the joy of liberty, whatever pain may betide. Such liberty would lead to
careless rest, could men have it before experiencing the suffering of the
Christ, in which the pain of the cross is as nothing beside that of his
compassionate response to the cry of a world in pain. Then comes the point at
which the man says: " What does it matter whether I suffer or not? " His mind is
so busy with service that he can scarcely attend to himself.
Such an expression as " the peace and bliss known
only in the land of silence and non-being" can be understood only by those who
are willing to think of metaphysical realities. Most of such Oriental
expressions as this are based on the fundamental idea that the universal God
expresses himself as sat, chit and ananda, that is, as being, consciousness and
bliss.
139
Being is well understood; people see it all around
them; consciousness they also know by experience; but happiness they seek. All
seek themselves. Happiness is not something that we shall gain, obtain and
possess; it is our true state of Self. But beyond both matter and consciousness
is the real inner life, which is silence and non-being from the standpoint of
the external, and yet is the bliss of true being.
Kill out desire; but if thou killest it, take heed
lest from the dead it should again arise.
Kill love of life; but if thou slayest Tanha, let
this not be for thirst of life eternal, but to replace the fleeting by the
everlasting.
Desire nothing. Chafe not at Karma, nor at nature's
changeless laws. But struggle only with the personal, the transitory, the
evanescent and the perishable.
Common desire is the love of external things for the
sake of astral or sensuous enjoyment. We have already seen that the disciple
must not seek the satisfaction of such desires, but must give up all the energy
of his personality—physical, emotional, and mental—to the work of spiritual
evolution and the service of the inner life in himself and other men.
Tanha is the root of these desires, because it is the
thirst for sentient life. The ego on its own plane is far from being fully
conscious, but what consciousness it has gives it a feeling of great pleasure,
and arouses a kind of hunger for a fuller realization of life. It is that
340
which is behind the world's great clamour for a
fuller life. As before explained, the forces of the higher mental plane pass
through the causal body for the most part without affecting it in the case of
ordinary persons, as the ego is not yet developed and trained so as to respond
to more than a few of the vibrations of its own level. There are no coarse
vibrations on that plane, such as it can respond to in its younger days, so it
descends to the lower planes for the sake of feeling more fully alive. For a
long time therefore its consciousness is most vivid when things of the physical
plane are presented to it, but later, when the astral nature is awakened, the
pleasures of that plane prove to be still more intense.
It is not possible in the physical body to realize
how keen are the delights of the astral life. So much is that the case that they
often turn aside and delay persons who have overcome the same sort of pleasure
of the physical plane. Yet that danger is not great for those who in physical
life are definitely seeking the things of the Path, if they are persons of
advanced type, as they are in a position to realize still higher delights, which
have a far greater attraction. The same thing is true of each plane in turn.
Still, the disciple must be on guard not to give up
the lower pleasures merely for the sake of relatively higher ones, but always to
keep his eye upon his ideal goal, beyond all transitory pleasures. He must not
thirst to enjoy the age-long pleasures of the heaven-world, but must give up all
that is transitory and personal. While, on
141
the one hand, he will not seek to obtain the objects
of desire, on the other he will not shrink from the lessons that karma places
before him; he will not wish that his field of experience should be other than
it is. He knows that it is because nature's laws are unchanging that he can use
experience for growth. Were it not for the orderly nature of the world, it would
be impossible for the intellect to grow or for man to use his powers at all. So
he has no resentment against karma, which is the embodiment of the Law.
Help nature and work on with her; and nature will
regard thee as one of her creators and make obeisance.
And she will open wide before thee the portals of her
secret chambers, lay bare before thy gaze the treasures hidden in the very
depths of her pure virgin bosom. Unsullied by the hand of matter, she shows her
treasures only to the eye of Spirit —the eye which never closes, the eye for
which there is no veil in all her kingdoms.
Then will she show thee the means and way, the first
gate and the second, the third, up to the very seventh. And then, the goal;
beyond which lie, bathed in the sunlight of the Spirit, glories untold, unseen
by any save the eye of the Soul.
All students of the material sciences arc familiar
with the fact that " nature is conquered by obedience ". All the forces that we
employ in modern life, such as the pressure of steam or electricity, are
examples of our
142
working with nature. It is perhaps rather
unsympathetic to use the word conquered, when the fact is that all our power in
the world is the result of harmony between man and nature. The man in a boat who
sets his sail so that he may go against the wind is not overcoming the wind, but
is harmonizing his affairs with its laws. By working with the laws man gains in
power, not by fighting against them.
The occultist knows that the same principle is true
on every plane, and not only with regard to the matter of each world but also to
the forms of life that dwell there, high or low in the scale of evolution.
Therefore the knowledge of nature's mechanical laws, which has led to so much
power and wealth for mankind, represents only one aspect of the harmony that
should subsist between the two. A feeling of friendly sympathy towards the
animal, the plants and even the minerals, and towards the nature spirits and the
devas, is equally important, if not more so, for the progress of man. Nature is
composed of life as well as matter, and it is through sympathetic feeling that
that life becomes known, and harmonized with human life. To look upon the world
as a place full of forbidding entities is the unfortunate custom of our age, but
the man who faces life with a feeling of kindliness to all living things will
not only see and learn more than others, but will have a smoother passage on
life's sea. There is a tradition in India of the " lucky hand " of certain
persons who have this sympathy, and for whom plants will grow well when for
others they ail. It has also been explained
143
many times by authorities in occult science that
because of his love for all beings the true yogi or sannyasi may wander among
the mountains and in the jungle quite without danger from wild animals or
reptiles.
In ordinary human life this sympathy works in
many-ways. The modern business man knows that the first requisite for his
success is to establish friendliness with those with whom he wants to deal. The
same quality is necessary for teaching children, who often regard grownup people
as strange, arbitrary beings, not all of their own class, but somewhat foreign,
as an earth man might regard one of Mr. Wells' fanciful men from Mars. But when
sympathy is established, all that strangeness goes, and real education becomes
possible.
The nature spirits are in the same position as the
children, except that they are not dependent upon us and can easily avoid our
vicinity, as the more pleasing kinds of them usually do when modern civilized
man arrives, with his noisy, clumsy and cruel ways, and his unclean, repellant
aura and cloud of thought-forms. It is a fact that were men sympathetic with the
other kingdoms, did they plant forests and not only destroy them, and did they
feel kindly towards nature in general, we should enjoy more equable climate and
more successful cultivation. It must, of course, be said that the modern
movement in favour of gardens round houses, and trees and flowers even in the
roads of our cities, all tends in the right direction, and that in special ways
of cultivation of the earth and of particular flowers and fruits and grains and
trees, and even animals, men have done much
144
to help the work of the nature-spirits. But with
more sympathy still better results would have accrued.
This sympathy has occasionally been shown, especially
by the poets. Dr. Rabindranath Tagore's essays and poems exhibit it in a very
high degree; in fact, the spread of this quality may be regarded almost as his
special contribution to modern civilization. Another well known instance is that
of the philosopher Emerson who, on returning from his winter lecture tours to
his home at Concord, used to shake hands with the lower branches of his trees.
He declared that he could feel that the trees were glad at his return, and no
doubt that quality of sympathy was a great aid to his inspiration.
Men who live in their gardens, like Luther Burbank of
California, often say that they are distinctly conscious of the feeling that
comes to them from certain plants bushes and trees. Men in Canada, whose duty
calls them to live constantly in the forests—to inspect them, mark trees and do
other work—have told me that they feel a life in the woods distinct from that
elsewhere, that they know that there are some places and trees which like men,
and others which do not.
Such sympathy is perfectly natural. If you feel
special love and admiration for a certain human being, there is a tendency on
his part to become interested in you and to return the affection. A stage lower,
if you are affectionate with an animal it becomes strongly attached to you.
Still lower, in the vegetable and mineral kingdoms, the same rule obtains,
though its effects are less obvious. From this arises the tradition that flowers
and
145
plants will grow better for some persons than for
others, other things being equal. It is personal magnetism that calls it out;
and that is what at a higher level we call affection.
There is no need to say anything here about the seven
gates mentioned in this passage, for the whole of the third Fragment of this
book is taken up with the seven portals, and there we shall study them in
detail.
CHAPTER 11 THE ONE ROAD
There is but one road to the Path; at its very end
alone the Voice of the Silence can be heard. The ladder by which the candidate
ascends is formed of rungs of suffering and pain; these can be silenced, only by
the voice of virtue. Woe then to thee, disciple, if there is one single vice
thou hast not left behind; for then the ladder will give way and overthrow thee;
its foot rests in the deep mire of thy sins and failings, and ere thou canst
attempt to cross this wide abyss of matter thou hast to lave thy feet in waters
of renunciation. Beware lest thou should'st set a foot still soiled upon the
ladder's lowest rung. Woe unto him who dares pollute one rung with miry feet.
The foul and viscous mud will dry, become tenacious, then glue his feet unto the
spot; and like a bird caught in the wily fowler's lime, he will be stayed from
further progress. His vices will take shape and drag him down. His sins will
raise their voices, like as the jackal's laugh and sob after the sun goes down;
his thoughts become an army, and bear him off a captive slave.
147
C.W.L.—We have seen, in The Masters and The Path,
that there are four ways of coming to the beginning of the probationary path: by
contact with those •who are already on the Path; by deep thought; by hearing and
reading the sacred word; and by the practice of virtue.1 Then, on the
probationary path, there are four qualifications to be attained, of which the
last is given in At the Feet of the Master as Love, and it is said that without
this the other qualifications are in vain.2
This, then, is the one road to the path proper—the
way of love, of unselfishness in thought, word and deed.
All the old selfish habits of body and mind must be
overcome, by positive virtue. The word virtue as used here cannot mean mere
passive goodness or absence of wrongdoing; it must be taken in its old meaning
of strength. Virtues are forms of strength of" the soul. When the soul dominates
the personal life it will be seen to be full of such virtue. In the mean time a
great battle is necessary. In very many cases the candidate for the Path must
bring forth all his determination to stamp out completely any fault of
selfishness that he may find in himself in the course of his daily
self-examination. This can best be done by picturing a scene in which the fault
has been exhibited, and then reconstructing it in the imagination, so that in it
the corresponding virtue is shown; then one may dwell on that for a little
while, and resolve that henceforth, under such circumstances, the virtue, not
the fault, will be expressed.
1 Op. cit., Ch. vi.
2 Volume I, Ch. 24, Liberation, Nirvana and Moksha.
148
It is sometimes very hard to overcome habitual
faults; hence the frequent mention of suffering and pain. It gives great pain,
for example, to the drunkard, to resist "just one more, one last drink ". But if
he holds firm to his resolves never to take strong drink again, not even once,
in time the suffering will disappear, and he will know a higher kind of pleasure
than that which he obtained from the stimulus of drink. It is exactly the same
with impure or selfish emotions and thoughts; many a man fails because he dwells
upon an unworthy thought "just once more ". It is just that one that he must
give up, and refuse to harbour in his mind. To give up their faults people have
sometimes to suffer great wounds to their pride. In all these cases humility is
a great help, because it makes men willing to change themselves.
Still, there are many whose lives have already been
considerably purified, who feel little or nothing of this pain. It has, indeed
been suggested that in this passage Aryasanga has exaggerated the suffering.
That is not so, but he has expressed it in extreme terms, so that no one will
meet with suffering on the Path, expecting the reverse, and all will be ready to
pay toll to the past, to face what suffering there is, and to bring it to an end
for ever by the practice of virtue. We may remember here the encouraging words
of the Gita: " Even if thou art the most sinful of all sinners, yet shalt thou
cross over all sin by the raft of wisdom. As the burning fire reduces fuel to
ashes, O Arjuna, so doth the fire of wisdom reduce all karmas to ashes."1 And
again:
Op. cit., iv, 36-37.
149
" Never doth any who worketh
righteousness, O beloved, tread the path of woe."1
The necessity of getting rid of vices at the very
beginning has been emphasized in all yoga systems, as mentioned before.2 Only
when the virtues were firmly established in his character could the student be
allowed to pass on to the later steps of the Path, including practices of
posture, breathing, control of the senses and meditation. The reason for this
demand is that as the pupil advances on the Path the forces of his will and
thought become much more powerful than ever before, and there will come times
when the ego pours his energy down into the body. If there be still remnants of
any vice in the body that energy will give it new strength, so that the fall of
the aspirant will be far greater than anything that is possible for one not so
far advanced. Powers are powers, for good or ill, so the candidate should purify
himself before seeking them, lest he injure others and himself. There is one
place on the Path, just after the Second Initiation, where the danger is
greatest of all, especially from the vice of pride, as has been explained at
length in The Masters and The Path.
Kill thy desires, Lanoo, make thy vices impotent, ere
the first step is taken on the solemn journey.
Strangle thy sins, and make them dumb for ever,
before thou dost lift one foot to mount the ladder.
1 Ibid., vi, 40. 2 Ante, p. 91.
150
Silence thy thoughts and fix thy whole attention on
thy Master, whom yet thou dost not see, but whom thou feelest.
Merge into one sense thy senses, if thou would'st be
secure against the foe. 'Tis by that sense alone which lies concealed within the
hollow of the brain, that the steep path which leadeth to thy Master may be
disclosed before thy soul's dim eyes.
Aryasanga's repetition of the injunction to get rid
of desires and vices shows the importance which he attached to this part of the
work. Not only are any such defects enormously intensified as the powers of the
candidate develop, but also his responsibility increases, and he becomes capable
of making far more karma than before.
The sixth sense, the mind, has its physical organ in
the brain. People do not usually employ this, when faced by the various objects
and experiences of life. They live too much in their astral bodies. They "like"
certain things, and "dislike" others, quite without reason, quite without
considering what they are, and which are really good and bad, or useful and
useless. That will not do, of course, for anyone who wants to tread the occult
path. He must consider all things dispassionately, and revalue them according to
their usefulness to the soul.
In the brain there are' also the organs by means of
which direct perception of things beyond the reach of
151
the physical senses may be had. The pituitary body is
a link between the physical body and the astral body, and so on. In the same
hollow in the brain, but a little further back, lies the pineal gland, which is
connected directly with the mental body, and serves to bring impressions down
from the mental plane. Some people develop the pituitary body first, some the
pineal gland— each must follow the method prescribed by his own guru.
Long and weary is the way before thee, O disciple.
One single thought about the past that thou hast left behind will drag thee
down, and thou wilt have to start the climb anew.
Kill in thyself all memory of past experience. Look
not behind or thou art lost.
Once more we find Aryasanga emphasizing the worst
aspect of the matter, so that none shall find the path harder than he may have
thought it to be before entering upon it. Relatively, that path is not long,
when one considers that it is only the last fourteen lives, out of a series of
many hundreds or even thousands, which are usually spent between the First and
Fifth Initiations. Further, in many cases the work of those fourteen lives is
done in but few, taken consecutively, without devachanic interludes—which makes
the time short indeed.
It is true that " the road winds uphill all the way",
but it need not necessarily be weary. It is when one thinks only of the goal
that the journey is weary. A student entering college will find his three or
four yean there intensely weary if he is thinking only of getting
152
his degree and going out into the world with it, and
is not really interested in his studies. But if he has planned out his work,
which will bring him naturally to his degree if properly carried out, and if he
is really interested in the subjects of his study, he may then forget all about
the years that lie ahead, and may have a fascinating time. So also on the Path
the work is full of interest for heart and mind, and he who finds it so will
make it shorter in fact as well as in appearance than he who cares only for
reaching a certain prescribed goal.
It is the same in meditation; some who practise it
faithfully feel it to be a tedious thing, but do it all the same, for the sake
of its results. Others find it full of interest, and therefore gain much more
from it. Let the candidate not think of his own progress on the Path; as so
often recommended, let him forget himself and work for the world, and his
progress will take care of itself. Self-examination and self-training are
necessary, but that is only like preparing and oiling machinery; it should not
take much time, the work being the important thing.
It is true that sometimes people find it necessary to
force themselves at first along certain lines of work and thought, or
meditation, which they feel that they ought to take up. Very well, go on with
the dreary task, if such it appears to be, and if the motive is pure, you will
soon find that the dreariness departs, a new interest arises, and the work
becomes full of delight.
The statement that one single thought about the past
can drag the candidate right down to earth again should certainly give pause to
anyone who proposes to enter
153
the Path, and yet is unwilling to give up some pet
vice, however trifling. It is not the act so much as the thought of it that
drags one down. Madame Blavatsky says, in The Secret Doctrine:
Purity of mind is of greater importance than purity
of body.
. . An act may be performed to which little or no
attention is
paid, and it is of comparatively small importance.
But if thought
of, dwelt on in the mind, the effect is a thousand
times greater.
The thoughts must be kept pure.1
I recollect a story about Colonel Olcott which
illustrates this point. A young man who much wanted to live the higher life came
to him one day and asked him if he must give up smoking. The Colonel replied: "
Well, if you can't you must, but if you can you needn't." Certainly strength of
will and purity of thought are of paramount importance, and there is no progress
without them, no matter how clean the body; and the Colonel emphasized the fact
very successfully. But it might be added also that smoking is a dirty habit; it
befouls the bodies, and often causes much annoyance and discomfort to others.
The worst of its dirty selfishness physically is that the smoke is made damp
with saliva and then sent off to enter other people's lungs. It is a horrible
feature of modern life that we are often compelled to contact and breathe smoke
which has been so treated.
As to the effect of a thought of a quality belonging
to the past, Madame Blavatsky also says:
The student must guard his thoughts. Five minutes'
thought may undo the work of five years; and though the five years' work will be
run through more rapidly the second time, yet time is lost.*
1 Op. cit., Vol. III, 570. 2 Ibid., p. 573.
154
A distinction must be made here between a thought
which is merely a floating form which has entered the mind, and thought proper,
which is a deliberate act. It is the latter that can do so much harm. An
unworthy thought may drift into the mind, but if it is not dwelt upon,
encouraged and strengthened, little harm is done.
That one who falls thus may quickly rise again is
encouraging. That old Greek allegory in which every time that the hero falls to
earth, worsted in the conflict, he gains new strength from it, applies to man.
Better that he should win the battle once and for all without falling; but in
any case he is destined to triumph ultimately. Much may be learned by the
intelligent and willing pupil without bitter experience, just as one may learn
that fire is hot without putting one's hand into it; but all that is necessary
will be learnt sooner or later in one way or another.
Do not believe that lust can ever be killed out if
gratified or satiated, for this is an abomination inspired by Mara. It is by
feeding vice that it expands and waxes strong, like to the worm that fattens on
the blossom's heart.
The rose must re-become the bud, born of its parent
stem, before the parasite has eaten through its heart and drunk its life-sap.
The golden tree puts forth its jewel-buds before its
trunk is withered by the storm.
The pupil must regain the child-state he has lost ere
the first sound can fall upon his ear.
155
Sir Edwin Arnold speaks of Mara, as he is understood
by the Buddhists, in vigorous and graphic terms, in connection with the
temptation of Buddha just before
His illumination:
But he who is the Prince Of Darkness, Mara—knowing
this was Buddha Who should deliver men, and now the hour When he should find the
Truth and save the worlds— Gave unto all his evil powers command. Wherefore
there trooped from every deepest pit The fiends who war with Wisdom and the
Light, Arati, Trishna, Raga, and their crew Of passions, horrors, ignorances,
lusts, The brood of gloom and dread; all hating Buddh, Seeking to shake his
mind.1
Still, Madame Blavatsky says: " But Mara is also the
unconscious quickener of the birth of the Spiritual." The resistance that Mara
opposes to the aspirant enables him to develop his strength. An athlete might
move his arms up and down much easier without dumbbells than with them, yet he
would not develop the same strength so quickly, if at all. That even evil is
made use of for good was once illustrated by the remark of a very spiritual man
who took a high Initiation. For some time before it he had been terribly
maligned, and the important work on which he had set his heart had been spoiled.
One day someone offered him a word of sympathy, which was quite unnecessary, for
he said: "The fact is, I owe a debt of gratitude to those people who tried to
injure me, though I did not realize it at the time; for without their aid I
should not yet have taken that Initiation." An ordinary man would have been full
of anger or of depression, but in such a man as this 1 The Light of Asia, Book
the Sixth.
156
Mara calls out an equal strength only of loving
sorrow or compassion. Thus may even the greatest enemy become our friend while
we are in the way with him.
It is, of course, not the ignorance but the innocence
of childhood that is requisite for real spiritual progress. Mere goodness is not
progress; it is only preparatory purification. Progress is the development of
the ego on its own planes, which, when shown in the personality, appears as
strength of character—in will and love and thought. In the three stages of the
relation of a pupil to his Master, it is the third and highest that contains the
idea of childhood, for he is first a probationary pupil, then an accepted one,
and thirdly a Son of the Master.
CHAPTER 12 THE LAST STEPS
The light from the one Master, the one unfading
golden light of Spirit, shoots its effulgent beams on the disciple from the very
first.
Its rays thread through the thick, dark clouds of
matter.
Now here, now there, these rays illumine it, like
sun-sparks light the earth through the thick foliage of the jungle growth. But,
O disciple, unless the flesh is passive, head cool, the Soul as firm and pure as
flaming diamond, the radiance will not reach the chamber, its sunlight will not
warm the heart, nor will the mystic sounds of the akashic heights reach the ear,
however eager at the initial stage.
C.W.L.—As the sun is always shining behind the
clouds, so is the higher self constantly shedding its beams on the aspirant. The
flashes of inspiration and intuition that come now and again into the darkness
of our minds in what we call our best moments are derived from that
158
high source. It is a wise policy to try to capture
those best moments, to hold them in imagination, and to dwell upon them in
meditation, and thus to bring the whole life into that diamond-like condition
that is mentioned in the text.
With reference to the " mystic sounds of the akashic
heights " Madame Blavatsky adds the following footnote:
The mystic sounds, or the melody, heard by the
ascetic at the beginning of his cycle of meditation, called Anahatashabda by the
Yogis. The Anahata is the fourth of the Chakras.
The fourth centre or chakra is that at the heart.
When the consciousness is centred in the heart during meditation it is most
susceptible to the influence of the spiritual soul or higher Self. The heart is
the centre in the body for the higher triad, atma-buddhi-manas. The head is the
seat of the psycho-intellectual man; it has its various functions in seven
cavities, including the pituitary body and the pineal gland. He who in
concentration can take his consciousness from the brain to the heart should be
able to unite kama-manas to the higher manas, through the lower manas, which,
when pure and free from kama, is the antahkarana. He will then be in a position
to catch some of the promptings of the higher triad. That higher consciousness
tries to guide him, through the conscience; he cannot guide it until he is one
with buddhi-manas. The foregoing explanation is condensed from notes on some
oral teachings
159
of Madame Blavatsky, appended to the third volume of
The Secret Doctrine.1
Indian tradition on the subject says that when
kundalini rises she dissolves the qualities of the various chakras through which
she passes and carries their essence upwards. When she reaches the fourth, the
heart chakra, the yogi hears the sound from above, called anahata-shabda. Shabda
is sound; an-ahata means*' not beaten "; so it is—that sound which is made
without beating things together. The term is therefore symbolical of that which
is above the planes of personality. The practitioner's touch with the higher
triad begins at this point. Those who want to increase the contact between the
higher and lower manas should not dwell in meditation on anything below it. The
following meditation, translated from the Gheranda Samhita, is one of those
prescribed for the heart centre. It illustrates the way in which the yogi
gradually withdraws his attention from his surroundings and concentrates it upon
his Ideal.
Let him find in his heart a broad ocean of nectar,
Within it a beautiful island of gems, Where the sands
are bright golden and sprinkled with jewels,
Fair trees line its shores with a myriad of blooms,
And within it rare bushes, trees, creepers and rushes,
On all sides shed fragrance most sweet to the sense.
Who would taste of the sweetness of divine
completeness Should picture therein a most wonderful tree,
On whose far-spreading branches grow fruit of all
fancies— The four mighty Teachings that hold up the world,
There the fruit and the flowers know no death and no
sorrows, While to them the bees hum and soft cuckoos sing.
1 Op. cit., Vol. III, pp. 582-4.
160
Now, under the shadow of that peaceful arbour
A temple of rubies most radiant is seen, And he who
shall seek there will find on a seat rare,
His dearly Beloved, enshrined therein, Let him dwell
with his mind, as his Teacher defines,
On that Divine Form, with His modes and His signs.1
Unless thou hear'st thou canst not see. Unless thou
seest, thou canst not hear. To hear and see, this is the second stage.
We have already considered the significance of seeing
and hearing.2 Unless the candidate is responsive to the inner voice, that is,
unless he understands spiritual laws, he will never see the outer things as they
are. He must learn to look at the things of matter with the eyes of the spirit,
as a Master once expressed it. When he sees the material or outward things in
that way, he will more and more understand the inner voice. This is like the
alternation which is necessary between meditation and experience. To go through
life in a busy way, without stopping to meditate upon it, is to miss much of the
significance of its events; one should spare a little time each day to let the
inner light play upon them. On the other hand, to shut oneself in one's study
and give one's whole time to thought would yield little profit; in that wav a
man would acquire endless misconceptions, for experience is required to correct
and enlarge our meditation. It is the balanced interplay of the inner and the
outer that the pupil must seek. He must aim to be
1 See Concentration, Ch. x. 2 Ante, p. 59
161
harmonized—to use the expression repeated again and
again in the Gita.
The inner and outer worlds correspond perfectly to
one another, point for point in God's system. Says Madame Blavatsky in The
Secret Doctrine:
In the realm of hidden forces, an audible sound is
but a subjective colour, and a perceptible colour, but an inaudible sound.1
Colour is spoken of here, not form; it makes the
statement more accurate, for we really see only colours, not forms.
It is impossible to say with any certainty why this
state of hearing and seeing harmonized together is called the second stage; We
cannot tell what system of stages Aryasanga was expounding, for a veil is drawn
over his instructions at this point. The line of stops marks a missing portion
dealing with the third stage. When the teaching emerges again (after this
hiatus) we find Aryasanga dealing with later stages exactly as the Toga Sutras
give them, namely (5) pratyahara, entire control of the senses, (6) dharana,
concentration, (7) dhyana, meditation, and (8) samadhi, contemplation.
When the disciple sees and hears, and when he smells
and tastes, eyes closed, ears shut, with mouth and nostrils stopped; when the
four senses blend and ready are to pass into the fifth, that of the inner
touch—then into stage the fourth he hath passed on.
1 Of. cit, Vol. III, p. 508.
162
There are some yogis who do literally stop the mouth
and nose when going into meditation or trance. The fingers are so placed as to
keep the eyes, the nostrils and the mouth closed, and these men have also
trained the tongue so that they can turn it upwards and backwards into the
cavity above the mouth, and thus prevent the inlet of air. This is called
khechari mudra, as practised by certain hatha yogis. It is not done by the raja
yogis, and is not recommended here. There is a stage at which the pupil can
close his eyes and reproduce within himself or experience in the astro-mental
region the sensations of smell, taste, sight and touch. Now, in order to
withdraw himself to a still higher state he must attend to the inner touch,
which is hearing. By giving his attention to the sound within, and tracing it
into its finer and finer recesses, he brings himself to the point where he may
practise pratyahara, the restraint of all sensation, the inner as well as the
outer, that of the hall of learning as well as that of the hall of ignorance.
This practice is described in the next verse:
And in the fifth, O slayer of thy thoughts, all these
again have to be killed beyond re-animation.
The attention is quite commonly withdrawn to a large
extent by most people when, for example, they are especially interested in a
book; they do not then respond to the impressions made upon the senses by the
various odours, sights and sounds surrounding them. To put oneself into that
condition at will is pratyahara, and it is a preparation for really successful
meditation. The
163
killing beyond re-animation means nothing more than
that the senses, like good dogs, will lie down when told to do so, and will not
get up again until they are called. There is a foot-note at this point, as
follows:
This means that in the sixth stage of development
which in the occult system, is Dharana, every sense as an individual faculty has
to be " killed " (or paralysed) on this plane, passing into and merging with the
seventh sense, the most spiritual.
Dharana is the sixth step of yoga, as given in the
Toga Sutras. It is that concentration of mind which we have already studied,1
and it follows upon pratyahara. Since mind or chitta is regarded as a sixth
sense, when dharana is complete and that mind thereby ceases to function in
relation to the things of the external world, intuition, here called the seventh
sense, arises. Life teaches us in two ways, by tuition that the world gives us,
and by intuition, the working of the inner self. As men proceed on their
evolutionary pilgrimage, their intuition increases and they do not depend so
much as before on the instruction that the world gives. This is only another way
of saying that the man who uses his inner powers can learn much more from a
little experience than other men can from a great deal. Because of the activity
"of his innate intelligence the developed man is able to see the great
significance of even small things; but the undeveloped mind is full of
curiosity. It is constantly eager for novelty, because, not being
1 Ante, p. 40.
164
good at thinking, it soon exhausts the obvious
significance of common place things. This mind is the one that craves miracles
in connection with its religious experiences as it is blind to the countless
miracles that surround it all the time.
Withhold thy mind from all external objects, all
external sights. Withhold internal images, lest on thy Soul-light a dark shadow
they should cast.
Thou art now in Dharana, the sixth stage.
In the practice of concentration it is always
necessary to consider both the external and the internal sources of
interruption. One must prevent the mind from taking an interest in any external
thing, for if this is not done, the slightest sound will awaken its curiosity
and spoil the concentration. Also one must stop the mind from bringing up within
itself images relating to the past or the future; during the practice one must
be completely uninterested in what happened yesterday or what is likely to
happen to-morrow. When this concentration has been successfully achieved, the
next and seventh stage of practice begins, which is called dhyana, that: is,
meditation.
When thou hast passed into the seventh, O happy one,
thou shalt perceive no more the sacred Three, for thou shalt have become that
Three thyself. Thyself and mind, like twins upon a line, the star which is thy
goal burns overhead. The Three that dwell in glory and in bliss ineffable, now
in the world of Maya have lost their names.
165
They have become one star, the fire which is the
Upadhi of the flame.
And this, O Yogi of success, is what men call Dhyana,
the right precursor of Samadhi.
Passing from dharana to dhyana, from concentration to
meditation, the aspirant on this Path enters the buddhic consciousness. That is
then " thyself". The mind here spoken of is the higher manas, for the lower
manas has been silenced. The manasic principle has been raised into that of
buddhi, so the two are like " twins upon a line ", the two lower corners of a
triangle, as is indicated by the following footnote:
Every stage of development in Raja Yoga is symbolized
by a geometrical figure. This one is the sacred triangle and precedes Dharana.
The A is the sign of the high chelas, while another kind of triangle is that of
high Initiates. It is the symbol " I " discoursed upon by Buddha and used by Him
as a symbol of the embodied form of Tathagata when released from the three
methods of the Prajna. Once the preliminary and lower stages passed, the
disciple sees no more the A but the—, the abbreviation of the—, the full
septenary. Its true form is not given here, as it is almost sure to be pounced
upon by some charlatans and desecrated in its use for fraudulent purposes.
The star that burns overhead is the atma. But it
refers also, as Madame Blavatsky says in another footnote, to the star of
Initiation, which shines over the head
166
of the Initiate. As the object to be attained is the
Fourth Initiation, that of the Arhat, it is the star of that Initiation, which
leads to the atmic or nirvanic plane, that is his goal.
At this stage, instead of looking upwards in thought,
and regarding the higher triad (atma-buddhi-manas) as above oneself, as was the
case heretofore, one finds oneself to be in the buddhic state, manas being
united with buddhi as manas-taijasi. The " meditation" of the Initiate at this
stage will ultimately lead on to a further union of buddhi and atma. Upon the
attainment of that union the higher triad will have become one star, described
in a foot-note as " the basis, Upadhi, of the ever unreachable flame, so long as
the ascetic is still in this life ". The fuel is the personality; the fire is
this triple spirit; the flame is the Monad. Even the Adept, while remaining in
physical incarnation, does not enter fully into the state of the Monad. Says
Madame Blavatsky:
Dhyana is the last stage before the final on this
earth unless one becomes a full Mahatma. As said already, in this state the Raja
Yogi is yet spiritually conscious of self, and the working of his higher
principles. One step more, and he will be on the plane beyond the seventh, the
fourth according to some schools. These, after the practice of Pratyahara—a
preliminary training, in order to control one's mind and thoughts—count Dharana,
Dhyana and Samadhi, and embrace the three under the generic name of Sannyama.
Samadhi is
167
the state in which the ascetic loses the
consciousness of every individuality, including his own. He becomes the All.
It is significant that the three should lose their
names. They are not forms, for their region is that of consciousness. The lower
planes of the personality are planes of form; then come the planes of name or "
meaning ", but the Monad is beyond name, beyond what men call consciousness.
The text goes on to indicate that, having attained to
the practice of samadhi, the aspirant has now become an Arhat, and has reached
the goal of the endeavour discussed in this Fragment.
CHAPTER 13 THE GOAL
And now thyself is lost in Self, thyself onto
Thyself, merged in that Self from which thou first didst radiate.
Where is thy individuality, Lanoo, where the Lanoo
himself? It is the spark lost in the fire, the drop within the ocean, the
ever-present ray become the All and the eternal radiance.
And now, Lanoo, thou art the doer and the witness,
the radiator and the radiation, light in the sound, and the sound in the light.
C.W.L.—As a man rises in life to a realization that
the personality is merely "it", and thus raises his centre of consciousness to
the higher Self, so there comes the time when he discovers as a fact of
experience that that consciousness is only "you", not "I".1 When that comes
about, at or about the Fourth Initiation, the lower self becomes lost in the
true Self, and what the man has thought or felt to be his individuality goes.
And just as he who has achieved the buddhic state recognizes and accepts the
Consciousness of others as
1 See ante, pp. 72, 81.
169
his own, and feels their joys and sorrows as his own;
so now does this man find only one true " I " in all.
The distinction between the realization obtained by
the initiate of lower degree, and that of the Arhat, between the consciousness
of the buddhic plane and that of the atmic, has been given in the Bhagavad-Gita.
In the former state the man sees the same Self equally dwelling in all beings;
in the latter he sees that all are in the one Self.
This, according to Toga Sutras, is the state of
kaivalya, of " oneness ", of freedom, on the full attainment of which the
distinction between seer and seen, between subject and object, is destroyed.
Thou art acquainted with the five impediments, O
blessed one. Thou art their conqueror, the master of the sixth, deliverer of the
four modes of truth.
The light that falls upon them shines from thyself, O
thou who wast disciple, but art Teacher now.
And of these modes of truth:
Hast thou not passed through knowledge of all
misery—truth the first?
Hast thou not conquered the Maras' king at Tu, the
portal of assembling—truth the second?
Hast thou not sin at the third gate destroyed, and
truth the third attained?
Hast thou not entered Tau, the path that leads to
knowledge—the fourth truth?
170
Madame Blavatsky adds:
The four modes of truth are, in Northern Buddhism:
Eu, suffering or misery; Tu, the assembling of temptations; Mu, their
destructions; and Tau, the Path. The " five impediments " are the knowledge of
misery, truth about human frailty, oppressive restraints, and the absolute
necessity of separation from all the ties of passion, and even of desires. The "
Path of salvation " is the last one.
There are the Four Noble Truths taught to the world
by the Lord Buddha. These were Sorrow, Sorrow's Cause, Sorrow's Ceasing and the
Way. These have been put before the Western world with wonderful beauty and
accuracy in Sir Edwin Arnold's matchless poem, The Light of Asia, from which the
following verses are quoted. But all who seek inspiration on the Path should not
fail to read the whole work.
Ye that will tread the Middle Road, whose course
Bright Reason traces and soft Quiet smoothes;
Ye who will take the high Nirvana-way, List the Four
Noble Truths.
The First Truth is of Sorrow. Be not mocked!
Life which ye prize is long-drawn agony: Only its
pains abide; its pleasures are
As birds which light and fly.
Ache of the birth, ache of the helpless days,
Ache of hot youth and ache of manhood's prime:
Ache of the chill grey years and choking death, These
fill your piteous time.
Sweet is fond Love, but funeral-flames must kiss
The breasts which pillow and the lips which cling
Gallant is warlike Might, but vultures pick The
joints of chief and King.
171
Beauteous is Earth, but all its forest-broods Plot
mutual slaughter, hungering to liv^;
Of sapphire are the skies, but when men cry Famished,
no drops they give.
Ask of the sick, the mourners, ask of him
Who tottereth on his staff, lone and forlorn,
" Liketh thee life? "—these say the babe is wise That
weepeth, being born.
The Second Truth is Sorrow's Cause. What grief
Springs of itself and springs not of Desire?
Senses and things perceived mingle and light
Passion's quick spark of fire:
So flameth Trishna, lust and thirst of things.
Eager ye cleave to shadows, dote on dreams; A false
Self in the midst ye plant, and make
A world around which seems;
Blind to the heights beyond, deaf of the sound
Of sweet airs breathed from far past Indra's sky;
Dumb to the summons of the true life kept For him who
false puts by.
So grow the strifes and lusts which make earth's war,
So grieve poor cheated hearts and flow salt tears:
So wax the passions, envies, angers, hates; So years
chase blood-stained years
With wild ted feet. So, where the grain should
grow
Spreads the biran-weed with its evil root And
poisonous blossoms; hardly good seeds find
Soil where to fall and shoot;
And, drugged with poisonous drink, the soul departs,
And, fierce with thirst to drink, Karma returns;
Sense-struck again the sodden Self begins, And new
deceits it earns.
The Third is Sorrow's Ceasing. This is peace
To conquer love of self and lust of life, To tear
deep-rooted passion from the breast,
To still the inward strife;
For love to clasp Eternal Beauty close;
For glory to be Lord of self; for pleasure To live
beyond the gods; for countless wealth
To lay up lasting treasure
.
172
Of perfect service rendered, duties done
In charity, soft speech, and stainless days: These
riches shall not fade away in life, Nor any death dispraise.
Then Sorrow ends, for Life and Death have ceased How
should lamps flicker when their oil is spent?
The old sad count is clear, the new is clean; Thus
hath a man content.
The Fourth Truth is The Way. It openeth wide Plain
for all feet to tread, easy and near,
The Noble Eightfold Path; it goeth straight To peace
and refuge. Hear!
Manifold tracks lead to yon sister-peaks
Around whose snows the gilded clouds are curled;
By steep or gentle slopes the climber comes Where
breaks that other world.
Strong limbs may dare the rugged road which storms,
Soaring and perilous, the mountain's breast;
The weak must wind from slower ledge to ledge, With
many a place of rest.
So is the Eightfold Path which brings to peace;
By lower or by upper heights it goes. The firm soul
hastes, the feeble tarries. All
Will reach the sunlit snows.1
The five impediments in the way of the candidate for
Arhatship may be taken in various forms. They are the five mentioned by Madame
Blavatsky in the footnote just quoted, or they are the first five fetters, or
they are the five kleshas mentioned in the Toga Sutras, and already discussed.2
And now, rest 'neath the Bodhi tree, which is
perfection of all knowledge, for, know, thou art the master of Samadhi—the state
of faultless vision.
1 Op. cit., Book the Eighth. 2 Ante, pp. 49-52.
173
Bebold! thou hast become the light, thou hast become
the sound, thou art thy Master and thy God. Thou art thyself the object of thy
search: the voice unbroken, that resounds throughout eternities, exempt from
change, the seven sounds in one, the Voice of the Silence.
Aura Tat Sat.
The termination Aum Tat Sat is one of the
Maha-vakyams or " great sayings" of the Hindus. The meaning of Aum we have
already considered.1 Tat refers to the Supreme. Philosophically, the pronouns he
and she are unsuitable to refer to the Supreme, so Tat, meaning "That", is
employed. Beyond "it" and "you" is That, which is "I". So the expression means
that it is That which is the Red. All good works begin and end with this
thought.
1 Ante, pp. 84-5.
FRAGMENT II THE TWO PATHS
CHAPTER 1 THE OPEN GATE
C.W.L.—We come now to the second Fragment which
Madame Blavatsky translated from The Book of the Golden Precepts—entitled The
Two Paths. This is not necessarily a continuation of the first Fragment, called
The Voice of the Silence, although it does begin by addressing one who has just
reached the goal of Arhatship. There is nothing to show that the three Fragments
stand in any special relation to one another. They are to all intents and
purposes three separate books dealing in much the same manner with the same
subject. It is, however, a great advantage to the aspirant to hear the teaching
about the Path again and again in slightly different forms. It renews his
enthusiasm, draws attention to points which he may have overlooked, and
generally gives him breadth of vision.
The present Fragment begins by addressing one who has
just achieved the summit of the Path, and the question arises: Will he go
onwards into nirvanic bliss, heedless of those who remain behind, or will he
turn back at the threshold and help others who are climbing; will he take
liberation for himself, or will he stay to help the world ?
178
And now, O Teacher of compassion, point Thou the way
to other men. Behold all those who, knocking for admission, await in ignorance
and darkness to see the gate of the sweet Law flung open!
The voice of the candidates:
Shalt not Thou, Master of Thine own mercy, reveal the
doctrine of the heart? Shalt Thou refuse to lead Thy servants unto the Path of
liberation?
The opening paragraph of this Fragment may at first
seem a little strange to us in these modern days. We are familiar with the
thought that the Path is open to anyone anywhere, regardless of race, creed,
sex, caste or colour, who lives the life that is prescribed for it. Why, then,
should any people be waiting in darkness and ignorance for a gate to be flung
open for them?
The fact is that at the time when the Lord Buddha
taught in India, the religion of the Brahmanas had become very rigid.
Originally, that faith had been intensely joyous and free, but in course of time
'the caste system had been extended by the priests and rulers to all kinds of
details. The plains of India were thickly populated with Atlanteans and
Atlanto-Lemurians when the Aryans descended into the country about ten thousand
years B.C. So the Manu found it necessary to forbid intermarriage, and about
8,000 B.C. he ordained the caste system in order that no further admixture might
be made, and that those already made might be perpetuated He founded at first
only three castes—
179
Brahmana, Rajan and Vish. The first were pure Aryans,
the second Aryan and Toltec, the third Aryan and Mongolian.
The castes were hence called the Varnas, or colours—
the pure Aryans white, the Aryan and Toltec intermixture red, and the Aryan and
Mongolian yellow. The castes were allowed to intermarry among themselves, but a
feeling quickly grew up that marriages should be restricted within the caste.
Later, those who were not Aryan at all were included under the general
appellation of Shudras, but even here in many cases a certain small amount of
Aryan blood may appear. Many of the hill tribes are partly Aryan—some few are
wholly so, like the Siaposh people and the Gipsy tribes.
There are passages in the Hindu scriptures to show
that it was possible for individuals of exceptional character and ability to be
raised in caste rank, but it must have been a very rare occurrence, and
certainly for some time before the advent of the Lord Buddha it had been
generally held that only a Brahmana could hope for liberation, and anyone who
wished to reach that goal must first contrive to be born as a Brahmana. This was
not a very hopeful doctrine for the majority of the people, since the Brahmanas
were never numerous and they did not allow the lower caste people to study the
sacred books.
But the Buddha's teaching flung the gates wide open.
He taught that equal respect should be shown to one of any caste who lived the
life, and conversely that a Brahmana who does not live the life was not worthy
180
of respect, as in the following verse from the
Vasala-Sutta:
Not by birth does one become low caste, Not by birth
does one become a Brahmana; By actions alone one becomes low caste, By his
actions alone one becomes a Brahmana.
Many Brahmanas have told me that they actually feel
the truth of this in practical life; they find themselves more drawn to those of
lower castes who live the ideals of the Brahmana life than to members of their
own caste who neglect its ideals and live at a lower standard.
The aim of the Lord Buddha was not to found a new
religion, but to reform Hinduism. For a time almost all India called itself
Buddhist. There were Buddhist Hindus just as at present in the north-west there
are many who call themselves Sikh Hindus. Buddhism as a religion has long
vanished from India. But the effect that the Lord Buddha desired to produce
still remains to a large extent in the Hindu religion of the present day. As an
instance of this one may mention the effect upon animal sacrifices, against
which the Buddha spoke very strongly; they were very common before his time, but
now they are quite rare. Again, in India to-day every holy man is regarded with
reverence by all, whatever may have been his caste before he became a sannyasi.
And people all over the country respect the Bhagavad-Gita as of the highest
authority, yet it is a book of the most liberal character. In it the Lord says:
181
The same am I to all beings; there is none hateful to
me nor dear. They verily who worship me with devotion, they are in me, and I
also in them. Even if the most sinful worship me, with undivided heart, he too
must be accounted righteous, for he hath rightly resolved; speedily he becometh
dutiful and goeth to eternal peace, O Kaunteya; know thou for certain that my
devotee perisheth never. They who take refuge with me, O Partha, though of the
womb of sin, women, Vaishyas, even Shudras, they also tread the highest path.1
It must not be assumed that Shri Krishna is here
placing women and others on a lower level, but that he is refuting a number of
popular superstitions, among them the idea that those who are in female bodies
are necessarily inferior and so cannot succeed in high spiritual aims.
Madame Blavatsky explains in a footnote that there
are two Schools of the Buddha's doctrine, the esoteric and the exoteric,
respectively called the " heart" and the " eye " doctrine, and that the former
emanated from the Buddha's heart while the latter was the work of his brain or
head. Another interpretation that was given to me relates the terms to the eye
and heart of the candidate: the scheme of things may be learnt by the eye, but
the higher path can be entered only when the heart is in tune with the inner
life.
The whole passage is based upon an alleged hesitation
on the part of the Buddha as to whether he should preach. It is said that as he
sat under the Bodhi tree on the morning following his Illumination, he doubted
whether the world would understand and follow him, until he heard a voice as of
the earth in pain, which
1 Op. cit., ix, 29-32.
182
cried: " Surely I am lost; I and my creatures! " And
then, again: "Oh, Supreme, let Thy great Law be uttered!"1
Quoth the Teacher:
The paths are two; the great perfections three; six
are the virtues that transform the body into the tree of knowledge.
To this Madame Blavatsky adds the following footnote:
The tree of knowledge is a title given by the
followers of the Bodhidharma (Wisdom Religion) to those who have attained the
height of mystic knowledge—Adepts. Nagarjuna, the founder of the Madhyamika
School, was called the dragon-tree, the dragon standing as a symbol of wisdom
and knowledge. The tree is honoured because it is under the Bodhi (wisdom) tree
that Buddha received His birth and enlightenment, preached His first sermon, and
died.
Swami T. Subba Row had a somewhat different
interpretation of this symbol of a tree. He said that the body of the candidate
had become a channel of knowledge (and we may add of force as well), so that it
was one of the twigs on the Tree which is the total wisdom of the world. We may
add, too, the idea that the Initiate is part of the great tree that is the
Hierarchy, the Great White Brotherhood, that has its roots far up in the
1 The Light of Asia, Book the Seventh.
183
higher planes, and whose branches ramify into every
part of human life, and even down to the lower kingdoms. Those who have read the
later chapters of The Masters and The Path will appreciate this ancient symbol
of a tree, for there it is shown how the Occult Hierarchy branches outward from
one great Root.
In this statement about the two paths, the three
great perfections, and the six virtues, we have an instance of the methodical
character of the Buddha's teaching. He always helped his followers to remember
his teaching by giving it to them in a tabular form. There were, for example,
the Four Noble Truths, each represented by a single word which would call to
recollection a quite definite set of ideas. There were also the Noble Eightfold
Path, the Ten Sins, classed as three of the body, four of speech and three of
the mind, and the Twelve Nidanas, or successive causes of material life and
sorrow for man.
The transcendental virtues, or Paramitas, are
sometimes reckoned as six, sometimes seven, but more commonly as ten. When in
Ceylon.; I learned of them as ten from the High Priest Sumangala: the first six,
he said, are perfect charity, perfect morality, perfect truth, perfect energy,
perfect kindness, and perfect wisdom; the other four that are sometimes added
especially for the priests are perfect patience, perfect resignation, perfect
resolution, and perfect abnegation. In the Awakening of Faith of Ashvagosha,
translated into English by Teitaro Suzuki, the Paramitas are thus enumerated:
Charity (dana), morality (sila), patience (ksanti), energy (virya), meditation
(dhyana), wisdom (prajna), and the four additional
184
ones: expediency (upaya), prayer or vow (pranidhana),
strength (bala), knowledge (jnana). In the footnote to the Voice of the Silence,
1924 edition, a list taken from Eitel's Chinese Buddhism is given thus: charity,
morality, patience, energy, contemplation and wisdom; and in addition for the
priests: use of right means, science, pious vows, and force of purpose.
When in Ceylon I compared the statements of
Orientalists with the feelings and thoughts of the Buddhists themselves. There
is a great difference between the two, for the former are generally very wooden,
but the latter are full of life. Yet the learned monks have an accuracy of
knowledge at least equal to that of the most erudite Orientalists. Sir Edwin
Arnold, in his Light of Asia, has given a very remarkably accurate
representation of the living side of Buddhism. Some have said that he read
Christian ideas and feelings into Buddhism, but that was not so in the least; I
can testify that the sentiments described in the poem really exist among the
Buddhist people.
Who shall approach them?
Who shall first enter them?
Who shall first hear the doctrine of two paths in
one, the truth unveiled about the Secret Heart? The law which, shunning
learning, teaches wisdom, reveals a tale of woe.
Alas, alas, that all men should possess Alaya, be one
with the great Soul, and that, possessing it, Alaya should so little avail them!
185
Behold how, like the moon reflected in the tranquil
waves, Alaya is reflected by the small and the great, is mirrored in the tiniest
atoms, yet fails to reach the heart of all. Alas, that so few men should profit
by the gift, the priceless boon of learning truth, the right perception of
existing things, the knowledge of the non-existent!
The Secret Heart is the esoteric doctrine. It is a
symbol that comes down to us from Atlantean days. In the innermost shrine of the
great temple in the City of the Golden Gate there lay upon the altar a massive
golden box in the shape of a heart, the secret opening of which was known only
to the high priest. This was called " the Heart of the World", and signified to
them the innermost mysteries that they knew. In it they kept their most sacred
objects, and much of their symbolism centred around it. They knew that every
atom beats as a heart, and they considered that the sun had a similar movement,
which they connected with the sun-spot period. Sometimes one comes across
passages in their books which give the impression that they knew more than we do
in matters of science, though they regarded it all from the poetic rather than
from the scientific point of view. They thought, for example, that the earth
breathes and moves, and it is certainly true that quite recently scientific men
have discovered that there is a regular daily displacement of the earth's
surface which may be thought of as corresponding in a certain way to breathing.
186
When Aryasanga uses the term " secret heart " he also
means all the inner mysteries. Madame Blavatsky's footnote says:
The Secret Heart is the esoteric doctrine.
Here the Teacher by " shunning learning " certainly
means that there are times when we must turn our attention away from the mere
gaining of knowledge from the outside through the senses, that we may give time
to the development of the inner learning through intuition. We cannot be wise
without having sufficient learning or knowledge with regard to the things that
we have to deal with in the world, in our particular sphere of duty; but on the
other hand we should be much in error if we thought that the greatest thing in
life was to accumulate great stores of knowledge, or were even to imagine that
such knowledge had intrinsic value, apart from the use that we can make of it in
the service of mankind.
In the West there is a tendency to approach things
and study them from the outside, while the Eastern method is rather to consider
them from within. Both methods are necessary at our present state of evolution.
When the buddhic vehicle is developed, and intuition comes down into the
physical brain from that level, it will give us true wisdom, perfect knowledge,
but in very few people is it yet sufficiently developed.
Even if we are able to keep our heads among the
clouds, it is necessary that our feet should rest firmly on the earth, and we
must treat impressions coming from within with balanced judgment, just as we
apply
187
common sense to the experiences of everyday life.
This is necessary, because it is quite easy to mistake impulses, coining from
the astral body, for intuitions which come from the higher Self. Sometimes it
happens, for example, that a dead person seeing that we are interested in some
particular point, offers a suggestion on the astral plane, and this may come
down into the brain and seem like intuition. Yet, as a matter of fact, that dead
person may be a very incompetent observer on the astral plane, and may therefore
be giving quite wrong information.
This advice to shun learning is useful not only to
those who are on the Path, but also to every one who is at all studious, if we
take it to mean, as it does, that we should avoid mere learning. A great amount
of study of the mere outside of things often leads to materialism. Because they
see around them great cataclysms, sacrifice, oppression, sorrow and suffering,
and a vast amount of praying to which no answer seems to be vouchsafed, many
people come to think that conflict and struggle is the law of life, that nature
is not compassionate. But to study the world as fully as possible, all the time
regarding it as a great school for the life dwelling in its multifarious forms,
leads to wisdom, which enables one to see that all things are moving together
for good. When one develops astral and higher forms of vision this fact that all
is well is no longer a matter to be understood by careful reasoning; it leaps to
the eyes. No one with such vision could be a materialist.
The word Alaya means simply a dwelling or house.
Esoterically, Madame Blavatsky says, it has at least a
188
double meaning, as being both the universal soul, and
the Self of an advanced Adept. It is the real dwelling or home of man, the
universal aspect of that which is buddhi in the spiritual triad in man. It is
the male or positive aspect of the universal soul, the Logos. It is the
Over-soul of Emerson, the universal Higher Self of all beings. It is what Plato
called Nous, a principle free from matter yet acting with design, the jivatma of
the Hindus, the source of the divine creative thought. In other words it is in
the Second Logos, the universal spiritual soul, of which the buddhi in each man
is a ray. That one should have'' knowledge of the non-existent'' must certainly
look strange to those who do not know the exact philosophical meaning of the
last word. To exist means to stand outside of, to have external or objective
being. The kind of being that is called exist' ence belongs to all the world
that is seen as outside ourselves, but the indwelling life or consciousness has
its own state of being—call it " istence " if you like, but not " existence ".
Nothing could be more real than the reality of this conscious life, which we
also possess because we are part of the same Logos—'and that is the "
non-existent " of which the aspirant must gain knowledge. Every man is
essentially divine; but to realize it he must stand out of his own light—then
there will be no shadow, no illusion.
CHAPTER 2 HEAD-LEARNING AND SOUL-WISDOM
Saith the pupil:
O Teacher, what shall I do to reach to wisdom?
0 wise one, what, to gain perfection?
Search for the paths. But, O Lanoo, be of clean heart
before thou startest on thy journey. Before thou takest thy first step, learn to
discern the real from the false, the ever-fleeting from the everlasting. Learn
above all to separate head-learning from Soul-wisdom, the " eye " from the "
heart " doctrine.
C.W.L.—-There is nothing that can be said here on the
subject of the real and the unreal that has not already been dealt with at
length in the comment on " From the unreal lead me to the real " in At the Feet
of the Master.1
Yea, ignorance is like unto a closed and airless
vessel; the Soul a bird shut up within. It warbles not, nor can it stir a
feather; but the songster mute and torpid sits, and of exhaustion dies.
1 Talks on Path of Occultism, Vol. I, Ch. IV.
190
But even ignorance is better than head-learning with
no Soul-wisdom to illuminate and guide it.
No occult progress at all is possible for a man while
he is extremely ignorant, however much he may be developed in other ways.
Without some knowedge of the Truth, and of the Path, he will not move in a
definite direction. Most people have very little knowledge of what it means to
be really a man, what are the qualities and actions which make for progress and
what for retrogression, and they have 110 conception of the great destiny to
which all are slowly moving. Therefore their progress is very, very slow. We
have investigated clairvoyantly as many as a hundred successive lives of some
second class pitris, or men of the second grade, and find scarcely any
perceptible growth at the end of that series.
There is, however, a steady though slow evolution of
the whole mass of life going on all the time, and the man has shared in this
general progress. Absolutely he has gone forward, but relatively he has done
little. Mr. Sinnett compared this advance to that of a person going round and
round a tower by a winding staircase; he comes to the same position and outlook
again and again, but every time just a little bit higher than before. It would
seem almost as though men were being treated a little better than they deserve,
for we see that even the ignorant man, whose thoughts are selfish in nine cases
out of ten, is advancing in this way. But the fact is that even a little force
directed towards the higher things
191
is far more potent than a great deal of force turned
towards the lower things. If one tenth of a man's thoughts are spiritual he is
beyond the average; even in such a case the man is taking nine steps backward
for one step .forward, but fortunately the nine steps backward are very short
and the one step forward is very long. It takes a bad life to balance good and
evil, and to fall back a man must be exceptionally bad. Then again, the effect
of a little good is very far reaching on account of the close association that
obtains among men, and he who sets it going receives much good karma.
But if ignorance is a great obstacle to progress,
knowledge that is not applied is little better; it also does not count for very
much. Even if a man is interested in occult matters he may stay apparently at
the same level life after life; for if it is not applied the knowledge does
little good. To put knowledge into practice is an absolutely necessary condition
for rapid progress.
The seeds of wisdom cannot sprout and grow in airless
space. To live and reap experience, the mind needs breadth and depth and points
to draw it towards the Diamond Soul. Seek not those points in Maya's realm; but
soar beyond illusion, search the eternal and the changeless Sat, mistrusting
fancy's false suggestions.
In her footnote, Madame Blavatsky says that the
Diamond Soul, Vajrasattva, is a title of the supreme Buddha, the Lord of all
mysteries, called Vajradhara and Adi-Buddha. In The Secret Doctrine, however.
192
she points out the distinction between Vajrasattva
and Vajradhara. Vajra is a diamond; sattva in such a connection as this means "
by nature", that is, a character or soul, so Vajrasattva is one whose nature or
character is like a diamond. Dhara means holding or bearing, so Vajradhara is
one who holds a diamond. Avalokiteshvara, " the Lord who is seen", is
Vajrasattva, the Diamond-Soul or Diamond-Heart, and is the synthetic reality of
all the Dhyani-Buddhas. The First Logos is Vajradhara or Vajrapani, the
Diamond-Holder, or the Diamond-Handed One, also called Dorjechang in Tibetan. He
is the one beyond all conditioning or manifestation, but He sends into the world
of subjective manifestation, the expression of His Heart—Vajrasattva or
Dorjesempa, the Second Logos.1
That there should be special points required to draw
the candidate into full touch with That is analogous to what we have seen in the
process of individualization of an animal. In this case, the points are the
finer qualities that it develops, such as affection and devotion, by means of
which it reaches up into the human condition of consciousness. The mind of man
must also put out special points in order that it may unite with the Soul, and
for the Initiate those points must rise up into buddhi, which is the principle
in the reincarnating self corresponding to the Vajrasattva at a still higher
level. Swami T. Subba Row said that it referred to the atma drawing the ego
into the Monad. The same simile can thus be employed at many different levels. 1
See Ante, pp. 73-4.
HEAD-LEARNING AND SOUL-WISDOM 193
For mind is like a mirror; it gathers dost while it
reflects.
This, says Madame Blavatsky, is from the doctrine of
Shin-Sien, who taught that the human mind is like a mirror which attracts and
reflects every atom of dust, and has to be, like that mirror, watched over and
dusted every day. Shin-Sien was the sixth patriarch of North China, who taught
the esoteric doctrine of Bodhidharma. In The Secret Doctrine she explains the
position of Bodhidharma, as follows:
When the misuse of dogmatical orthodox Buddhist
Scriptures had reached its climax, and the true spirit of the Buddha's
philosophy was nearly lost, several reformers appeared from India, who
established an oral teaching. Such were Bodhidharma and Nagarjuna, the authors
of the most important works of the Contemplative School in China during the
first centuries of our era.1
The dust on the mirror typifies the prejudices,
illusions and fancies which are in the astral and mental bodies; these are
clearly visible to the sight of the respective planes as decided obstacles to
better thought or feeling. The effects of these impediments and the means to get
rid of them we have already considered carefully in the talks on At the Feet of
the Master2
It needs the gentle breezes of Soul-wisdom to brush
away the dust of our illusions. Seek, O beginner, to blend thy mind and Soul.
Shun ignorance and likewise shun illusion. Avert thy
face from world deceptions; mistrust thy
1 Op. cit., Adyar Ed., Vol. v. p. 410.
2 Ante, Vol. I, Part 4, Chapter 1, Control of Mind.
194
senses; they are false. Bat within thy body—the
shrine of thy sensations—seek in the impersonal for the Eternal Man; and having
sought him out, look inward: thou art Buddha.
Common experience tells us that the senses must be
mistrusted. The impressions of sight, for example, must be corrected by careful
study of the facts, and judgment about them, as in the matter of the apparent
movement of the sun round the earth. Care must be taken, however, not to read
into this statement the idea that the senses are not to be used. They must be
employed on every plane for the gaining of knowledge, and for doing the work and
duty without which there is no progress.
The eternal man is the reincarnating ego, whose life
is age-long as compared with that of the personality, persisting as it does
through our complete series of human births and deaths.
The word Buddha is used in three distinct senses.
Sometimes, as in this case, it means simply enlightened, illuminated, or wise.
Sometimes it is used as a name for the Lord Gautama. In other cases it means the
high office in the Occult Hierarchy of the Head of the Second Ray, the great
department of teaching and religion, which has been described in The Masters and
the Path. The Buddhists have a list of twenty-four Buddhas, of whom the present
holder of the office is the Lord Gautama, who will be succeeded in the far
future by the Lord Maitreya.
195
Shun praise, O devotee: praise leads to
self-delusion. Thy body is not Self, thy Self is in itself without a body, and
either praise or blame affects it not.
Self-gratulation, O disciple, is like unto a lofty
tower, up which a haughty fool has climbed. Thereon he sits in prideful solitude
and unperceived by any but himself.
Very many men have been spoiled by undue praise; it
leads to pride in all who do not see clearly what lies ahead of them or above
them. Those pupils who are sufficiently clairvoyant to see the Masters
frequently are not so prone to this danger as many others are, because they
cannot but compare their own littleness with the Master's greatness, their own
farthing rushlight with His glorious sunlight. It is the man who is looking
downward, and comparing himself with those who are beneath himself, who is most
likely to fall through pride.
But the best way of all is not to think of oneself,
but to be constantly occupied with the work of the Master. There is for all of
us every day far more of that to be done than we can possibly accomplish; and it
is only taking energy and time away from that if we spend it in thinking about
our little selves. There are no doubt several reasons why the Masters do not
show themselves more than they do to those who are in the earlier stages of
their service. One of these is that the pupil, seeing the Master so far above
him, might be overwhelmed with his own, insignificance and lose confidence in
his
196
own ability to work for the Master. So, while it is
necessary to avoid pride on the one hand, one must equally avoid the
under-estimation of one's powers on the other. Here, as ever, the middle path is
the right one.
The simile of a tower is indeed a good one, for pride
does shut a man away from his fellows. If, for example, he is proud of his
learning, he will he anxious to keep others more ignorant than himself, so as to
enjoy his superior position, and even when he does give out his knowledge it
will only be for the sake of displaying it. Such a man is engaged all the time
in enlarging the gulf between himself and other people, so that he may look down
on them from above.
False learning is rejected by the wise, and scattered
to the winds by the Good Law. Its wheel revolves for all, the humble and the
proud. The doctrine of the eye is for the crowd; the doctrine of the heart for
the elect. The first repeat in pride: " Behold, I know "; the last, they who in
humbleness have garnered low, confess: "Thus have I heard."
Every religion in course of time gathers round itself
many speculations and other accretions. For example, in Hinduism, in the Puranas
one reads of dozens of things that people are told that they must do or must not
do; many of those have been invented by the priests, either for • their own
convenience and advantage or because of an excessive estimation of the value of
many
197
prayers and ceremonies. Also particular
interpretations of earlier sayings are developed into dogmas and attached to the
original teaching, as, for instance, the horrible eternal hell teaching which
still persists among many Christians.
The esoteric teaching at once scatters these to the
winds, as it brings the attention back to the essential and vital truths. Still,
to act from the heart is the way only of a strong and advanced man. For the
masses, wandering slowly along the broad road of evolution which winds gently up
the hillside, the books are still the main guide. Those people are not yet in
the position that is described as follows in the Garuda Purana: "Having
practised the Vedas and the Shastras, and having known the Truth, the wise man
can abandon all the scriptures, just as one rich in grains abandons the straw."
Every Buddhist scripture begins with, " Thus says
------", or, " Thus have I heard." It is a humble beginning. It does not say, "
This is absolutely so, and you must believe it," but, " This is what has been
said, and it would be well to try to understand it, and so come to a knowledge
of the real facts." It is the attitude of enquiry, not of dogmatism. Yet,
strange to say, there have been those who have taken it in another, and quite a
wrong sense. They say, " It is no use propounding anything different on this
subject, for thus it has been said with authority "!
" Great Sifter " is the name of the heart doctrine, O
disciple.
198
The wheel of the Good Law moves swiftly on. It grinds
by night and day. The worthless husks it drives out from the golden grain, the
refuse from the floor. The hand of Karma guides the wheel; the revolutions mark
the beatings of the karmic heart.
True knowledge is the flour, false learning is the
husk. If thou wonld'st eat the bread of wisdom, thy flour thou hast to knead
with Amrita's clear waters. But if thou kneadest busks with Maya's dew, thou
canst create but food for the black doves of death, the birds of birth, decay
and sorrow.
The heart doctrine is called the Great Sifter because
as one works in the world in the manner which it directs, the mistakes one makes
and the defects one has are gradually sifted out and removed. If one were doing
work without the ideals of the inner doctrine, one might go on making the same
kind of mistakes again and again, life after life. Madame Blavatsky somewhere
wrote that it was one thing to desire to do good, and another to know what is
good to do. Yet, with our imperfect knowledge, we must go forth and do the best
we can. It is something like learning a language. It is a mistake to try to
learn it quite perfectly from books before one makes any attempt to speak it;
one must plunge into it, and make mistakes in it, and in the effort one will
learn in due course to speak without mistakes. But that will come about, of
course, only if one converses in it with others who already know the language
correctly.
199
Similarly the Master, though he may be unseen, will
guide the pupil who is sincerely trying to do his best, into the experiences
that will sift out his faults and mistakes. Keep in mind the conviction that the
final good will inevitably come, and let the heart be full of love; then you may
work without fear of mistakes. They will become smaller and smaller, and fewer
and fewer, and will eventually die away.
There is a moral to be drawn from the analogy of
flour and bread. The true knowledge that you gain does not give you bread, but
merely the flour with which the bread of wisdom has to be made. The kneading is
the action of the higher Self, which works upon experiences and converts them
into real wisdom. In ordinary men most of this kneading is done during the
devachanic period, but the pupil of the Master has so broadened the channel
between the higher and the lower self that he is gaining wisdom all the time.
He who takes only external knowledge, and studies it
over with the lower mind, in the light of mere personal necessity and pleasures,
is certainly kneading husks with maya's dew. He is not preparing for the triumph
of the higher Self; he is not treading the Path, but is preparing the karma of
future births and deaths, for the future vehicles and personalities that will
decay and die.
CHAPTER 3 THE LIFE OF ACTION
If thou art told that to become Arhan thou hast to
cease to love all beings—tell them they lie.
If thou art told that to gain liberation thou hast to
hate thy mother and disregard thy son; to disavow thy father and call him
householder; for man and beast all pity to renounce—tell them their tongue is
false.
Thus teach the Tirthikas, the unbelievers.
If thou art taught that sin is born of action and
bliss of absolute inaction, then tell them that they err. Non-permanence of
human action, deliverance of mind from thraldom by the cessation of sin and
faults, are not for Deva Egos. Thus saith the doctrine of the heart.
C.W.L.—-To call a man a householder is to say that
his interests are still centred in worldly things, but to do this with contempt,
as is implied in the text, would certainly indicate the proud and austere
qualities of the left-hand path, leading up to the heights of the black
magicians, who regard the best of human love as nothing but mere sentimentality.
Even though the candidate
201
may have risen above personal desires, he cannot
despise those who are still at the earlier stage of evolution, nor can he ignore
them. Compassion and eagerness to help are the qualities of his nature.
That the expression householder must be taken in a
metaphorical sense is indicated in a footnote by Madame Blavatsky, as follows:
Rathapala, the great Arhat, thus addresses his father
in the legend called Rathapala Sutrasanne. But as all such legends are
allegorical (e.g., Rathapala's father had a mansion With seven doors) hence the
reproof to those who accept them literally.
Madame Blavatsky describes the Tirthikas as " ascetic
Brahmanas, visiting holy shrines, especially sacred bathing-places." A Tirtha is
literally a " crossing-place ". It is thus a landing or bathing place, or any
shrine, which is a crossing place to the other worlds or the higher life. A
shrine is thus a place where there is a special connection between the inner and
the outer worlds. Probably the orthodox Brahmanas and Hindus in general who
visit such Tirthas as, for example, Benares or Hardwar, were called unbelievers
because they did not in most cases follow the Buddha in His assertion that "
within oneself deliverance must be sought."
In the talks on At the Feet of the Master we have
considered at length the necessity for action, and how there may be intense
activity of the body, and yet the
202
man within may be calm, steady, serene and strong.
The Deva Egos means the reincarnating egos, according; to Madame Blavatsky, but
Swami T. Subba Row explained the term as meaning those who aspire to work with
the Devas and for the helping of the world.
The teaching of the Book of the Golden Precepts is
obviously intended for those who wish to follow that line of work. At present
there are not very many egos in incarnation who are ready for special teaching
and training—it would be of little use, for example, to seek among the dwellers
in the east end of London for people who are ready to become pupils of the
Masters. But as time goes on the numbers requiring attention will increase very
rapidly, and within a few hundred years-there must be many Arhats prepared to
teach them. Thus a large number of helpers will be needed, and it is to that
work that many of us are called.
The Dharma of the eye is the embodiment of the
external and the non-existing.
The Dharma of the heart is the embodiment of Bodhi,
the permanent and everlasting.
The word dharma may here be translated " form of
religion " or " belief", and bodhi is simply " wisdom".
The lamp burns bright when wick and oil are clean. To
make them clean a cleaner is required. The flame feels not the process of the
cleaning. " The branches of a tree are shaken by the wind; the trunk remains
unmoved."
THE LIFE OF ACTION 203
Both action and inaction may find room in thee; thy
body agitated, thy mind tranquil, thy Soul as limpid as a mountain lake.
Whatever suffering there may be on the path of
progress is experienced only by the lower self. The Self seated within knows the
value even of the painful experience and is therefore quite satisfied. Many
people do not understand that suffering is very largely a question of attitude;
in Esoteric Christianity Dr. Annie Besant has explained how some of the great
martyrs were filled with joy while undergoing what would be terrible pain to
others, because they were thinking of the great honour that was theirs to suffer
so for the sake of their Lord. So it is true that at last wrong ideas or
ignorance are the basis of all suffering.
Physical suffering is the most difficult to deal
with. We may be able sometimes to draw away from the physical body when it is in
pain, but that does not mean that we have conquered the pain. If it is the
result of a particular disease in which a microbe has to run its course, no
amount of assertion will enable an ordinary person to drive it away; but in all
cases a cheerful attitude makes a big difference. Most people can conquer astral
pain, if they set themselves the task; they can refuse to permit their feelings
to dwell upon the idea that gives them sorrow. Undesirable-emotions, such as
jealousy, envy, pride and fear, may be described as astral diseases; they can
always be eradicated by persistent effort to feel the opposite emotions. Mental
suffering, chiefly worry, is even easier to control.
204
In the causal body a man might have an uneasy sense
of incompleteness or insufficiency—but nothing more than that. Though he may
feel disappointment at the defects of his lower representative, he knows enough
to be patient and to persevere. He is not ignorant; but it is ignorance that
makes our suffering so poignant down here. In childhood, when we were still more
ignorant, a trouble lasting one day seemed a terrible tragedy; if we failed to
pass an examination the idea of waiting a whole year for the next opportunity
seemed to us a calamity, though in later life a year does not seem a long period
of time. To the personality a life's failure may .seem a tragedy, but to the
ego, who has known hundreds or thousands of incarnations, it may not appear so
vastly important.
The ego has put ;down a personality much as a
fisherman makes a cast. He does not expect that every cast "will be successful,
and he is not deeply troubled if one proves a failure. To look after a
personality is only one of his activities, so he may very well console himself
with successes in other lines of activity. In any case, it is the loss of a day,
and he may say, " Oh, well, we will hope to do better tomorrow." Often the
personality would like more attention from the ego above him, and he may be sure
that he will receive it as soon as he deserves it, as soon as the ego finds it
worth while. Mr. Sinnett put forward this desire of the personality in a
humorous way by saying that what was needed was a school for teaching egos to
pay attention to their personalities.
205
One stage further on, in the buddhic plane, the man
begins to touch the intensity of bliss that is the life of the Logos. At the
same time he comes closer into touch with other men; on the lower planes he
begins to share their suffering, but on the higher side he knows them as sparks
of the divine, and that gives indescribable bliss, which makes the suffering
seem as naught. Thus sorrow and suffering are for the personality only, and they
exist merely while the consciousness is fixed in the lower planes.
Would'st thou become a Yogi of time's circle? Then, O
Lanoo:
Believe thou not that sitting in dark forests, in
proud seclusion and apart from men; believe thou not that life on roots and
plants, that thirst assuaged with snow from the great Range—believe thou not, O
devotee, that this will lead thee to the goal of final liberation.
Think not that breaking bone, that rending flesh and
muscle unites thee to thy silent Self. Think not that when the sins of thy gross
form are conquered, O victim of thy shadows, thy duty is accomplished by nature
and by man.
Aryasanga is here once more preaching against the
seeking of liberation as mere escape from the wheel of births and deaths. The
yogi of time's circle is the one who is willing to remain within the process of
time, for the sake of helping others. When one considers the
206
vast period of time for which the Lord Buddha and the
Lord Maitreya had been preparing themselves for their great work, which has been
explained in The Masters and the Path,1 one cannot but feel oppressed by the
thought of such enormous periods of incarnate existence. Undoubtedly, however,
time cannot be to them exactly what it is to us. Even if "a thousand ages in Thy
sight are like ah evening gone " does not apply to Them, Their sense of time
must be vastly different from ours. Certainly They are also intensely happy in
Their work, and where there is happiness, as everybody knows by experience, time
is of no account-—in fact, under those circumstances we always wish that it
could be lengthened.
Very wrong ideas have arisen in most of the religions
on the subject of asceticism. In the original Greek the word asketes meant
simply one who exercises himself as an athlete does. But ecclesiasticism
impounded the word and changed its sense, applying it to the practice of
self-denial in various ways for the purpose of spiritual progress, on the theory
that the bodily nature with its passions and desires has been the stronghold of
the evil inherent in man since the fall of Adam, and that it must therefore be
suppressed by fasting and penance. In the Oriental religions we sometimes
encounter a similar idea, based on the conception of matter as essentially evil,
and following from that the deduction that an approach to ideal good or an
escape from the miseries of existence can be effected only by subduing or
torturing the body.
1 Op. cit., Ch. xiv.
207
In both these theories there is dire confusion of
thought. The body and its desires are not in themselves evil or good, but it is
true that before real progress can be made they must be brought under the
control of the higher Self within. To govern the body is necessary, but to
torture it is foolish.
There appears to be a widespread delusion that to be
really good one must always be uncomfortable-—that discomfort in itself is
directly pleasing to the Logos. Nothing can be more grotesque than this idea. In
Europe this unfortunately common theory is one of the many horrible legacies
left by the ghastly blasphemy of Calvinism. I myself have actually heard a child
say: " I feel so happy that I am sure I must be very wicked " —a truly awful
result of criminally distorted teaching.
Another reason- for the gospel of the uncomfortable
is a confusion of cause and effect. It is observed that the really advanced
person is simple in his habits and often careless about a large number of minor
luxuries that are considered important and really necessary by the ordinary man.
But such carelessness about luxury is the effect, not the cause of his
advancement. He does not trouble himself about these small matters because he
has largely outgrown them and they no longer interest him—not in the least
because he considers them as wrong; and one who, while still craving for them,
imitates him in abstaining from them does not thereby become advanced.
It is true that our duty to the world is not
accomplished when we have purified ourselves. Then
208
indeed does it become really possible for us to do
our best work for our fellow men, and since in the higher life the maxim " From,
each according to his power, to each according to his need " prevails, our most
serious duty begins at this point, when the shadows, the lower bodies, have been
mastered.
The silent Self in this passage, refers, says Madame
Blavatsky, to the seventh principle, which is atma. Our studies in the first
Fragment have already shown how this idea of silence is attached to that part of
the higher Self.
The blessed ones have scorned to do so. The Lion of
the Law, the Lord of Mercy, perceiving the true cause of human woe, immediately
forsook the sweet but selfish rest of quiet wilds. From Aranyaka he became the
Teacher of mankind. After Julai had entered the Nirvana, he preached on mount
and plain, and held discourses in the cities, to Devas, men and Gods.
All the Northern and Southern Buddhist traditions
agree in the statement that the Buddha quitted His solitude as soon as He had
reached inner enlightenment and had solved the problem of life, and that He at
once began teaching publicly.
The term Aranyaka means a forest dweller. The books
relate that Gautama went into the forest in order to meditate, and there He
seated Himself under the bodhi tree and resolved to attain illumination. When
that was achieved, He considered whether He would give His
209
teaching to the world; he knew that most of the
people would not understand it, and that it might therefore do harm.- But then,
as was remarked at the beginning of our study of this Fragment, the voice of the
earth came to him, and begged him to teach. I do not know exactly what was meant
by the voice of the earth, but it is said that that led him to decide to teach
mankind on the physical plane.
In this passage there are several titles given to the
Buddha. He is called Julai. That is the Chinese name for Tathagata, which is the
title given to every Buddha. Tathagata means literally " he who has gone
likewise", he has followed in the steps of his predecessors.
It is a fact that when the Buddha preached, others
besides men gathered round to listen to his teaching and enjoy his aura.
Sow kindly acts and thou shalt reap their fruit.
Inaction in a deed of mercy is action in a deadly sin.
I have already quoted this in commenting on At the
Feet of the Master. Each man has the responsibility for exercising the powers of
consciousness that he has so far developed. If he fails to exert himself and
neglects to use them, he is guilty of sins of omission, which are just as
serious as sins of commission. For example, it is our duty to interfere, when we
can do so without doing more harm than good, in cases of wrong or cruelty, such
as cruelty to animals or children. The wise man, seeing such things, will not
let indignation master him.
210
He must feel also for the man who is guilty of the
cruelty. His state is. in many ways more pitiable than that of his victim, and
he will have to suffer in turn, on account of karmic law. So, if we can induce
him to see the error of his ways and stop his cruelty, we have done good to
both. When it is our duty to interfere, and we fail to do so, we share the karma
of the wrong doing. The same is true when we allow others to injure ourselves,
without resistance. We are making it easy for them to do wrong; we are tempting
them, and assisting them, and the karma is partly ours.
Thus saith the Sage:
Shalt thou abstain from action? Not so shall thy Soul
gain her freedom. To reach Nirvana one mast reach Self-knowledge, and
Self-knowledge is of loving deeds the child.
It is not until we begin to work for others that we
can acquire real knowledge of life. In the attempt we learn where we stand, and
what qualities must be developed. There was an old blind man living in the south
of India, who said that his blindness had been indirectly a source of great
happiness to him. He was also in the deepest poverty, and had spent his life in
wandering from village to village, where he used to advise the people in their
difficulties, and also assist them in some cases with his yoga powers. He used
to tell how, by meditation, he had managed to awaken the memory of his past
lives; and he remembered that, some hundreds of years before, he had been a very
rich and powerful man, and had used
211
his power to injure those who happened to do what he
did not like. He recognized that his blindness and poverty were due to his wrong
deeds in that former life. He said he was sure that if he had gone on being a
rich man he might never have learned to love his fellows, as he had been quite
set in a selfish path of life. But now he had had to mingle with others, most of
whom knew suffering; they had been very kind to him, and he had learned to love
them. The happiness of that love, he said, as compared with his previous
condition, was something so great and incomparable that no suffering was in his
opinion too great to purchase it. This man claimed to be a pupil of one of our
Masters, and lie certainly was an illustration of the teaching that
self-knowledge is of loving deeds the child.
Have patience, candidate, as one who fears, no
failure, courts no success. Fix thy Soul's gaze upon the star whose ray thou
art, the flaming star that shines within the lightless depths of ever-being, the
boundless fields of the unknown.
The disciple fears no failure because he knows that
the plan of the Logos will be carried out; no one's failure can make any
difference to that. We may have the opportunity to do a piece of His work. If we
should fail to do it, it will be done in some other way through someone else. It
makes no difference to the Logos, though it may make a very great difference to
ourselves. It happens constantly that people miss their opportunities, but the
great plans are made in view of every
212
contingency. Our Masters never appear to notice when
we lose an opportunity, but I think that they are quite aware of it. Madame
Blavatsky used sometimes to say about some person: " He has earned the right to
have his chance." The Masters always assume that we are going to take our
opportunities.
The student who has tried to do some good work and
has found the opposing forces too great for him, will not be disappointed or
lose patience if he understands that all efforts put forth for good must produce
a proportionate result in some way, though the results may be unseen and though
there may be for the personality none of the satisfaction which conies from
seeing the good that has been done. It is the same in the case of astral work at
night. That work is none the less good and effective when done by those who are
not able to bring any memory of it back into the physical brain. The laws of
nature do not cease to operate because we cannot see the result, or do not
remember what we have done.
Usually the people who have done the greatest work in
the world do not see the result of it. Take, for instance, the example of the
Christ's three years of preaching. He died as a malefactor, execrated by the
populace, and at his death the number of his followers was only a hundred and
twenty; now there are many millions. William Wilberforce, who worked steadily
for over forty years against the greatest odds for the abolition of slavery in
the British Colonies, heard only three days before his death that total
abolition of slavery had at last become law. Impatience and depression would
213
have lost his cause. We are all in the same position,
in our lesser ways. There is none who cannot take up some good work, and push on
with it with tireless and endless patience, regardless of immediate success or
failure.
" The star whose ray thou art " is always that which
shines above us; for one it is the Ego, for another, more advanced, the Monad,
and so on to the Planetary Logos, and even the Logos of our system. To know our
own star is also to know the ray to which we belong—which of the seven great
rays is the one that especially connects us with the Logos. These seven rays are
indicated in the chapter dealing with the Ghohans of the Rays in The Masters and
the Path, and also in The Seven Rays, by Prof. Ernest Wood. When the higher self
is the master of the personality, it becomes possible for the disciple to
specialize in the work of the ray to which that higher self belongs, and then he
can make very rapid progress in power and usefulness.
Have perseverance as one who doth for evermore
endure. Thy shadows live and vanish; that which in thee shall live for ever,
that which in thee knows (for it is knowledge) is not of fleeting life: it is
the Man that was, that is, and will be, for whom the hour shall never strike.
Besides patience we need perseverance, and nothing
can develop this quality in us better than a clear perception of the fact that
we endure all through the ages, and that death is only a passing incident, with
no power to deflect us from our path. Sometimes people say: " Why
214
should I take up such and such work? I cannot
possibly finish it in this life." But the fact is that there is only one real
life-time—that of the ego, which endures for ever, for all practical purposes.
It is wise to begin any work in which you are interested, or the great task of
eliminating faults, even in old age, for all the good that is done is carried
forward to the next body, and in it the impulse to continue the work will be
felt while it is young. If one postpones the work to a future life, once more
old age may arrive before one has the opportunity that will draw attention to
it. If you are now ninety, and you have just heard of Theosophy, and you want to
hear of it in your youth in your next life, throw yourself into it now with
whatever vigour you may have. There is also the great benefit to be derived from
the stay in devachan (unless you happen to be one of those who have the
privilege of being able to renounce that period) for in that state whatever work
you have done is dwelt upon and worked up into faculty which will be a great
help in the next incarnation.
Perseverance is necessary also because no great work
can be completed in a short time. Think, for example, of the artist who is
painting a great picture; he will have very little to show for it in the first
few days, perhaps even weeks, and it is also quite possible that he may not be
pleased with what he has been able to achieve at the end of a few weeks, so that
he has to begin all over again.
A very useful lesson in perseverance may be derived
from a study of the history of the Theosophical Society
215
in the early days. The two great founders, Madame
Blavatsky and Colonel Olcott, could not have succeeded in establishing the
Society permanently, and giving it the material for future growth, had they not
had a clear vision of the inner side of things, a realization that their work
was part of a plan lasting throughout eternity, and was therefore sure to
succeed. They founded the Society in New York in 1875, and worked prodigiously
at Isis Unveiled, which was duly published. Still, some five years later they
were almost alone in the work, and they found it necessary to go to India, to
some friends there, to make a new start. Even then there were endlessly varied
troubles, year after year, which would have crushed almost anybody else. Madame
Blavatsky, with a body seldom free from pain, could still work tirelessly, could
produce The Secret Doctrine and other great works, because of her knowledge of
the Masters and the inner side of things.
CHAPTER 4 THE SECRET PATH
If thou would'st reap sweet peace and rest, disciple,
sow with the seeds of merit the fields of future harvests.
Accept the woes of birth.
C.W.L.—Aryasanga is all-the time endeavouring to
persuade the disciple to follow the higher path of renunciation, and not to
accept the peace of nirvana. Life in the atmic or nirvanic plane has been
defined as rest in omniscience, but we must understand that it is rest only in
the sense that there is no consciousness of exertion followed by fatigue. There
is on that plane the most tremendous activity; that is the very essence of the
nature of being on that plane, as I have already tried to explain.1
People want rest because they feel fatigue, but when
one is out of the body in full consciousness one finds that the fatigue is gone,
and then one no longer desires rest. In such conditions we look upon rest rather
as we do upon death down here; we do not want less but more of the power and
energy that we enjoy. The Solar Logos 1 Ante, p. 96.
217
does not rest, even for a moment. If He did so, even
for a second, we should all cease to be.
Many of those who have reached nirvana have nothing
further to do with the world's evolution; yet it does not seem possible for
anyone to have reached that level and not to be pouring forth glory and
splendour on those below. Even in the case of one so devoted that he continually
turns all his thought upwards, and none downwards, one would think he could not
help shedding devotion on those below.
There are seven paths open to the Adept, and most of
them take the candidate away from the earth, yet they are all equally ways of
serving the Logos. Presumably every Adept is willing to go where he is most
needed and can be most serviceable, but at least it seems necessary to be
perfectly willing to remain and accept " the woes of birth", if called upon. Any
other attitude, and especially the idea of selfish escape from the world,
liberation for one's separate self, could not carry the aspirant so high. To us
it may seem that to stay with and help our humanity is the kindest thing to do,
and that is very natural, for if we cannot thus love those who are already near
and known to us, how shall we love others who are not known? Still, we must not
forget that if the Lords of the Flame from Venus had not left their system and
come down into ours to help us, we should be at least one round behind the
position that we have so far achieved. It may be the duty of some of us in the
future to go to the help of some other system less advanced than ours.
218
At the same time, there is no question that more and
more advanced pupils of the Masters will be needed to carry on their work on
earth. It is open to the Arhat to; take no more physical births if he so
chooses; but it is evident that our Masters wish us to continue taking birth for
the sake of the work.
Step out of sunlight into shade, to make more room
for others. The tears that water the parched soil of pain and sorrow bring forth
the blossoms and the fruits of karmic retribution. Out of the furnace of man's
life and its black smoke, winged flames arise, flames purified, that soaring
onward, 'neath the karmic eye, weave in the end the fabric glorified of the
three vestures of the Path.
The opening portion of this passage seems to
imply-that there is not enough sunlight for all; but that is surely not so. All
can be happy. We make our own shadow, as the earth does. Sorrows and trouble are
of our own making; they are our own karma, as is everything that comes to us.
What Aryasanga means is that one should always be ready to help others, even at
the cost of trouble or loss to oneself.
There are few kinds of action that bring great karmic
suffering. Cruelty does, of course, and there are some others. But most of
people's actual suffering comes from the way in which they take the
inconveniences of life that karma brings to them. The suffering is then very
distinctly " ready-money karma ". Such, for example, is the selfish mourning for
those who have passed
THE SECRET PATH 219
on to a happier state of existence, which causes
suffering to everybody concerned, often including the dead, who feel the
depression and sorrow very greatly. What karma brings to a man is never more
than he can bear, and bear easily; but that is not the case with what he adds to
it of foolish thought, and feeling and action.
These vestures are: Nirmanakaya, Sambhogakaya and
Dharmakaya, robe sublime.
The three vestures will be discussed fully in our
study of the third Fragment. They represent three possibilities which lie open
to the man who has attained Adeptship. He can at once accept nirvana, or take it
after having gone through other high spiritual experiences, or remain in touch
with the earth as a Nirmanakaya in order to fill the spiritual reservoir, or he
can take up work in other globes or systems. This last choice is by no means
selfish, of course; it is an impossible supposition that and selfishness could
be possible at such a level.
There was a reference in the first edition of this
book to " selfish Buddhas ", but Madame Blavatsky, after her death, asked Dr.
Besant to remove the passage which contained it, because it was causing so much
dangerous misunderstanding. It referred to those who are called the Pratyeka
Buddhas. These are great Adepts at the level of the Buddha, but on the first
ray. Because " eka " means "one", some Northern Buddhists have thought that a
Pratyeka Buddha is one who works for himself alone, which appears a blasphemous
idea to anyone who knows where they stand. The three Lords of the
220
Flame, who are the pupils of the Lord of the World,
are Pratyeka Buddhas. They came to the earth to serve it and hasten its
evolution along the line of the first ray, while the Buddha works on the second.
It is foolish to criticize them for not doing work which is not theirs. It would
be as sensible to find fault with a magistrate for not being a schoolmaster,
saying, " See how little he cares about the education of children! " Of these
great Beings I have tried to give some slight account in The Masters and the
Path.1
The Shangna robe, 'tis true, can purchase light
eternal. The Shangna robe alone gives the Nirvana of destruction; it stops
rebirth, but O Lanoo, it also kills compassion. No longer can the perfect
Buddhas, Who don the Dharmakaya glory, help man's salvation. Alas! shall selves
be sacrificed to self; mankind, unto the weal of units?
Know, O beginner, this is the open path, the way to
selfish bliss, shunned by the Bodhisattvas of the Secret Heart, the Buddhas of
compassion.
The Shangna robe is something very far beneath any of
the three vestures above mentioned. It means here the balancing of karma, and
the destruction of the personality by quenching all desires, including that for
life. It implies an evolution of the causal body far higher than most men have
attained, but without the development of love and compassion and the desire to
help the world. A man who has thus freed himself from the necessity of
1 Op. cit., Ch. XV,
221
rebirth may live as an ego on the higher levels of
the mental world for an enormously long time.
In this passage, it is almost as though Aryasanga
were complaining against those who take the Dharmakaya vesture, and retire to
distant planes or systems. But it would be really impossible for Him to do that.
He could not have thought that there were selfish Buddhas. The Pratyeka Buddhas
certainly are at the same level of attainment as the Lord Buddha; They have the
same quality of compassion that he has, but it is not their duty to fill the
office. For thousands of years before their attainment of such heights these
Great Ones must have been utterly incapable of anything like selfishness. We
must remember that The Voice of the Silence was written down by a disciple of
Aryasanga after the death of the latter, so he is not wholly responsible for it,
and it appears that here the disciple must have allowed his own misconception to
colour the ideas, of his Teacher.
To live to benefit mankind is the first step.
To practise the six glorious virtues is the second.
To don Nirmanakaya's humble robe is to forego eternal
bliss for self, to help on man's salvation. To reach Nirvana's bliss but to
renounce it, is the supreme, the final step—the highest on renunciation's path.
Know, O disciple, this is the secret path, selected
by the Buddhas of perfection, who sacrificed the Self to weaker selves.
222
The six glorious virtues are the paramitas, already
considered in Chapter I of Fragment II. They represent one of the systems of
travelling on the path. Another is given in the set of qualifications expounded
in At the Feet of the Master, followed by the four stages of the Path proper.
It is not quite true that the Nirmanakaya gives up
bliss, for Adeptship is itself the attainment of bliss. What is true is that the
Adept could remain always on the stupendous levels which he has reached but
instead he comes down to help. By doing that, however, he does not forego the
eternal bliss which is inherent in him; He merely decides to work at lower
levels.
Yet, if the doctrine of the heart is too high-winged
for thee, if thou needest help thyself and fearest to offer help to others—then,
thou of timid heart, be warned in time: remain content with the eye doctrine of
the Law. Hope still. For if the secret Path is unattainable this day, it is
within thy reach to-morrow. Learn that no efforts, not the smallest—whether in
right or wrong direction—can vanish from the world of causes. E'en wasted smoke
remains not traceless. " A harsh word uttered in past lives is not destroyed,
but ever comes again." The pepper plant will not give birth to roses, nor the
sweet jessamine's silver star to thorn or thistle turn.
Thou canst create this day thy chances for thy
morrow. In the great journey, causes sown each hour bear each its harvest of
effects, for rigid justice
223
rules the world. With mighty sweep of never-erring
, action it brings to mortals lives of weal or woe,, the karmic progeny of all
our former thoughts and deeds.
Take then as much as merit hath in store for thee, O
thou of patient heart. Be of good cheer and rest content with fate. Such is thy
Karma, the Karma of the cycle of thy births, the destiny of those who, in their
pain and sorrow, are born along with thee, rejoice and weep from life to life,
chained to thy previous actions.
If one cannot rise immediately to the resolve to be
utterly unselfish there is no need to despair. One must work on in the right
direction until one reaches the position where that ideal will seem perfectly
natural and comparatively easy of accomplishment. Sometimes people feel that
because they cannot fulfil a great ideal that is put before them there is
nothing that they can do which is worth doing. They collapse, and do nothing at
all, in consequence. But that is a great mistake. The Lord Buddha was very wise
in dealing with all kinds of people, and he took care to avoid this kind of
discouragement, by speaking of the highest path to his monks alone. He preached
the middle path to the general public, and told them to live the highest and
noblest life of which they were capable, so that later on they would be in a
position to enter his Order. He said that they were to-day creating their
opportunities for to-morrow, that is for their next incarnation. There is
224
no need to despair, for the man who takes one
opportunity receives tenfold more opportunities, and he who uses what powers he
has as fully as possible, without overstraining himself, certainly develops
those powers at a surprising rate.
The last paragraph makes reference to those who are
born together. It is fact that people evolve in groups, the same people coming
closely together in different relationships again and again. What happens to one
in any such group reacts very much upon the others, for both good and ill. It
should be an additional incentive to those who are aspiring to realize that
whatever they are able to attain will be of great benefit to a number of people
whose destinies are thus bound up closely with their own.
I
CHAPTER 5 THE WHEEL OF LIFE
Act thou for them to-day, and they will act for thee
to-morrow.
'Tis from the bud of renunciation of the self, that
springeth the sweet fruit of final liberation.
To perish doomed is he who out of fear of Mara
refrains from helping man, lest he should act for self. 'The pilgrim who would
cool his weary limbs in running waters, yet dares not plunge for terror of the
stream, risks to succumb from heat. Inaction based on selfish fear can bear but
evil fruit.
The selfish devotee lives to no purpose. The man who
does not go through his appointed work in life has lived in vain.
Follow the wheel of life; follow the wheel of duty to
race and kin, to friend and foe, and close thy mind to pleasures as to pain.
Exhaust the law of karmic retribution. Gain Siddhis for thy future birth.
C.W.L.—There are people who feel that because they
cannot do great things or make rapid advance no effort
226
is worth making. That is a great mistake. At least
they can live to help those with whom karma has brought them into contact. They
will never find themselves in a better position until they make the most of
their present environment. If they will do this, when the time comes for them to
make the great effort involved in taking the First Initiation, loving friends
will be there to help. Real friends are those who are the friends of the ego.
These never bind one down for the satisfaction of their own very limited and
human, and often really selfish emotions. They always give one the freedom that
is required to follow the higher path.
Some good people refrain from helping others, fearing
that they themselves may be prompted by a selfish motive. Very often charity is
bestowed upon the unfortunate not really with the desire to help them, but to
relieve the giver of the unhappiness that he feels at the sight of suffering.
Such a person would never go out of his way to find people in trouble, in order
that they might be helped. Again, there are others who systematically give a
portion of their large incomes to charitable organizations, so that they may
enjoy the remainder with no qualms of conscience. Knowing this, a disciple
sometimes questions himself as to whether his own motive is pure. But to refrain
from helping because he doubts his own motive is surely a form of selfishness.
Whatever our motive may be, we must help, though only that counts for real
progress on the Path which is done purely to help the sufferer, without thought
of self.
227
It is necessary to use discrimination in helping. As
the Hindus say, help should be given to the right person, at the right time, and
in the right place. Yet the necessity for thought should not cause hesitation.
We may not always be certain which is the wiser of two courses of action, but we
must nevertheless decide upon one of them, so that the opportunity to do good
may not be entirely overlooked. Sometimes it is only by thought that we can
help, but that, as I have said before, is very important.1 The strength of many
a man who is doing vigorous work in the world comes largely from others who are
engaged in radiating spiritual force in meditation.
The wheel of duty to race and kin, to friend and foe,
does, as a matter of fact, offer the best of opportunities for progress. The
Lords of Karma see to it that each person is given the conditions which are
suited to his growth. They give a man the particular work that is likely to
develop the qualities that he needs. At a low level of development there may be
ten thousand places where a man can have the conditions needed for his progress.
But when a man is more highly evolved his environment has to be chosen with the
greatest care, for everyone must be put absolutely in the position where he can
best advance. It is therefore quite inaccurate to say that a man succeeds in
spite of his circumstances; difficulties are put in his way in order that he may
transcend them, and that his character and powers may grow.
The man who does his daily duties well, will soon be
trusted with higher ones. Every one who can be trusted
l Ante, Vol. I, Part II, Ch. 2, 5; Part IV, Ch. 1;
Part V, Ch. 6.
228
to do good and conscientious work is eagerly wanted
by those who guide the destiny of mankind. Be faithful in small things, and you
will be made ruler over many things, as the Bible says. To be ruler over many
things is a responsible position, and in occultism it is given only to those who
have proved themselves faithful in the small things. That is the test that the
Master gives. Many people neglect plain everyday duty for some visionary work in
the future, perhaps of doubtful utility, and not intended specially for them.
Many also regret the ties that they formed before they knew of Theosophy, when
they now find them hampering. But they do their duty. Unsuitable ties will drop
away when the time comes, when that freedom will be most useful for the
aspirant's development, and what is more important, for the world's work. But if
they are broken prematurely they will only entangle the man again and much
trouble and pain will be caused.
If sun thou canst not be, then be the humble planet.
Aye, if thou art debarred from flaming, like the noon-day sun upon the
snow-capped mount of purity eternal, then choose, O neophyte, a humbler course.
Point out the way—however dimly, and lost among the
host—as does the evening star to those who tread their path in darkness.
Behold Migmar, as in bis crimson veils his eye sweeps
over slumbering Earth. Behold the fiery aura of the hand of Lhagpa extended in
protecting
229
love over the heads of his ascetics. Both are now
servants to Nyima, left in his absence silent watchers in the night. Yet both in
Kalpas past were bright Nyimas, and may in future days again become two suns.
Such are the falls and rises of the karmic law in nature.
Be, O Lanoo, like them. Give light and comfort to the
toiling pilgrim, and seek out him who knows still less than thou; who in his
wretched desolation sits starving for the bread of wisdom and the bread which
feeds the shadow, without a Teacher, hope or consolation, and let him hear the
Law.
In a foot-note, H.P.B. says:
Nyima, the sun in Tibetan astrology. Migmar or Mars
is symbolised by an eye, and Lhagpa, or Mercury, by a hand.
There are here several points of interesting analogy.
The two planets mentioned give their light at night, when the sun is out of
sight, and all is dark. It is so with us. We have to help those who are in
greater darkness than ourselves; there is no one who cannot find someone more
ignorant than himself whom he may teach. Even if those around us are not ready
to enter the Path, we can lead them in the right direction towards it.
At the time of the transference of life from the moon
to the earth, the planets glowed and shone like small suns. But Mars is mainly a
desert now, and that is why
230
he reflects the yellow or reddish light. From the
standpoint of the poetic author of these verses, they are doing their best work
in giving light to man now. The idea illustrates the fact that we are not
necessarily doing our best work when we shine most. Also, when a building; has
to be erected, the foundations must be put in first. They do not count for
anything in the matter of appearance, being hidden out of sight, but on them the
building will be erected. So in the common work of every day the candidate is
performing useful service to society, and at the same time developing the higher
siddhis which are the spiritual powers of the ego.
The Teacher now tells the candidate what to say to
those whom he is trying to bring to the Path.
Tell him, O candidate, that he who makes of pride and
self-regard bond-maidens to devotion; that he, who cleaving to existence, still
lays his patience and submission to the Law as a sweet flower at the feet of
Shakya-Thub-pa, becomes a Srotapatti in this birth. The Siddhis of perfection
may loom far, far away; but the first step is taken, the stream is entered, and
he may gain the eye-sight of the mountain eagle, the hearing of the timid dove.
Tell him, O aspirant, that true devotion may bring
him back the knowledge, that knowledge which was his in former births. The
(Jew-sight and deva-hearing are not obtained hi one short birth.
231
Shakya-Thub-pa is the Lord Buddha. The Srota-patti
is, as has been explained, " he who enters the stream ". An analogy can be
drawn between the outward act of laying one's service at the feet of the
Teacher, and the inner change when the well-developed manas realizes the
presence of buddhi, and bows down before that higher principle, resolving
henceforth to use all its powers in obedience to its behests. In the ordinary
life of men it is generally the mental nature that is allowed to have the last
word. For example, in the matter of vivisection,1 many people
whose feelings shrink from the practice with loathing, still decide that it must
go on, because they think it is the only way to obtain certain knowledge which
will help humanity. But the minority, who are in the right, say: "No, it
is impossible that vivisection can lead to good. Our higher nature says with
a clear voice that it is utterly wrong." If these people were in the majority
they would stop it, and then some other way would be found to secure human
health; the mind would be set to work in obedience to the higher intuition to
find a better way.
Every one who feels enthusiasm on hearing about the
Path is sure to have worked for it in a former birth, perhaps in many previous
lives. It is encouraging to know this, for then one may expect to recover
quickly the attainments of former lives, the deva-sight and deva-hearing which
are the faculties of responding to the inner voice and of seeing life and the
world with the eyes of the spirit. 1 See ante, Vol. I, Part V, Chapter 4.
232
Be humble, if thou would'st attain to wisdom: be
humbler still, when wisdom thou hast mastered.
Be like the ocean which receives all streams and
rivers. The ocean's mighty calm remains unmoved; it feels them not.
Restrain by thy divine thy lower self. Restrain by
the eternal the divine.
Aye, great is he who is the slayer of desire: still
greater he in whom the Self divine has slain the very knowledge of desire.
Guard thou the lower lest it soil the higher.
As I have said before, he who stands in the presence
of the Masters cannot but be humble, conscious as he is of the great gulf that
exists between them and himself. Not that even the physical presence of the
Master, however, causes any uneasiness or depression; on the contrary, in his
presence we feel at our best and we realize that we can achieve because he has
achieved. It is so also with the gaining of knowledge. The man who can grasp
some big ideas can also see what remains to be learned that he does not yet
know, and how much mystery there is in familiar things that others think to be
quite simple and well understood. So he who has much knowledge is likely to be
humble, and the aspirant is warned that when pride rises in him, it is a sign
that he is unconsciously shutting in front of himself the door to further and
higher knowledge.
The candidate must also practise moving among the
disturbances of the world, which play upon him all the
time—physically, astrally and mentally—without
permitting them to agitate him. He must so train the lower vehicles that they
will respond not to these outer calls, but to the inner commands. The ego is
divine; with its aid the lower self must be controlled; and when that is done
even the ego will have to be controlled by the Monad, the eternal Self. That all
this may be done, the pupil must constantly guard the vehicles attending to
purity of food and drink and magnetism, of words and feelings and thoughts, as
has been fully explained in The Masters and the Path.
The way to final freedom is within thy Self. That way
begins and ends outside of self.
Unpraised by men and humble is the mother of all
rivers in Tirthika's proud sight; empty the human form, though filled with
Amrita's sweet waters, in the sight of fools. Withal the birth-place of the
sacred rivers is the sacred land, and he who wisdom hath is honoured by all men.
The orthodox Christian usually considers that there
are three stages in the growth of a soul. First, the man acts rightly for fear
of hell. Secondly, he does so with the desire of reaching heaven. Thirdly, he
does right for love of Christ, who sacrificed himself to bring men to that
condition of feeling. There is, however, a fourth stage, when the way is found
by realizing ourselves as one with the Self. Then the man does right because it
is right, not even for the sake of making the Master happy or of expressing
gratitude to him. Our deliverance
234
is thus from within. No external consideration can;
determine our steps of progress on the Path. It is not a question of how long we
have been at a certain level; we shall take the next step when we have developed
the necessary qualities and powers within ourselves. No one need be anxious
about this, for as the Tamil proverb says: " Ripe fruit does not remain upon the
branch."
The Tirthika, as we saw before, is the Brahmana
ascetic who visits the sacred shrines, -and is evidently regarded here as
feeling somewhat proud of having done so. Just so, some of the Hadjis—the
Muhammadans who have made a pilgrimage to Mecca—are proud because they have done
that. Such men are somewhat like the society people of our own day who are proud
to say they have seen the latest play or have read the book of the day—though
what they have learned in the process it may be difficult to say. Perhaps
Aryasanga's scribe, being a Buddhist, was not above sectarian feeling, for he
seems to regard all the Tirthikas as being of this type!
The great attraction of Benares, Hardwar, Kumba-konam
and other Tirthas is the bathing in the sacred rivers. At the place last named
the pilgrims resort to a huge tank, but they believe that it is fed from
underground by the Ganges. But our Buddhist scribe points out, with some
apparent pride, that the source of the principal sacred rivers of India is the
sacred land, that is, Tibet. It is a remarkable fact that the great rivers, the
Ganges, the Indus and the Airavati Or Irrawadi do
235
rise all very near together in the Himalayas, and,
going in different direction, east, south and west, sweep round and enclose the
upper part of India in their giant embrace of thousands of miles. Those proud
ascetics do not recognize that Tibet, a country which they despise, is the
mother of their sacred rivers, says the writer, and he draws an analogy between
Tibet and India, making India the body, which contains the sweet waters of
immortality only in the incorrect vision of fools, and Tibet the source of
wisdom, to be honoured by all men, that is all those who are not fools!
CHAPTER 6 THE WAY OF THE ARHAT
Arhans and Sages of the boundless vision are rare as
is the blossom of the Udambara tree. Arhans are born at midnight hour, together
with the sacred plant of nine and seven stalks, the holy flower that opens and
blooms in darkness, out of the pure dew and on the frozen bed of snow-capped
heights, heights that are trodden by no sinful foot.
C.W.L.—-At the present stage of evolution men who
have attained the Arhat level are very rare. That is quite natural, since
humanity is expected to attain the Asekha initiation only at the end of the
seventh round, and the Arhat stage precedes that usually by only seven lives.
Still, Arhatship is quite within our reach; it is principally a matter of our
understanding what to aim at, and then using our wills to achieve that goal.
Under the influence of the Lord Buddha thousands became Arhats. All that was due
to his tremendous magnetism.
The symbolism of this passage is probably capable of
several different interpretations. The midnight hour
237
may very well be taken as that darkest moment before
the dawn when the candidate seems to .be forsaken by everybody, even by his
Master. It is at the fourth Initiation that the seventh principle comes into
operation, as the candidate advances to the atmic plane. The sacred plant of
seven stalks may symbolize this, and the number nine also, because that seventh
principle is really three in one, which with the other six makes nine. The
number nine is considered most sacred by the Hindus.
It is only by going through the greatest trials, by
descending into the very depths of darkness, that the qualities required in the
candidate for this initiation may be attained. The holy flower opens and blooms
in that darkness, yet it comes as a result of development on the buddhic plane.
No Arhan, O Lanoo, becomes one in that birth when for
the first time the Soul begins to long for final liberation. Yet, O thou anxious
one, no warrior volunteering fight in the fierce strife between the living and
the dead, not one recruit can ever be refused the right to enter on the path
that leads toward the field of battle.
For either he shall win or he shall fall.
Yea, if he conquers, Nirvana shall be his. Before he
casts his shadow off, his mortal coil, that pregnant cause of anguish and
illimitable pain, in him will men a great and holy Buddha honour.
238
And if he falls, e'en then he does not fall in vain;
the enemies he slew in the last battle will not return to life in the next birth
that will be his.
But if thou would'st Nirvana reach, or cast the prize
away, let not-the fruit of action and inaction be thy motive, O thou of
dauntless heart.
Know that the Bodhisattva who liberation changes for
renunciation to don the miseries of secret life, is called thrice honoured, O
thou candidate for woe throughout the cycles.
Swami T. Subba Row interpreted the fight between the
living and the dead as the opposition between those who know and those who do
not know. It will be remembered that this distinction was also made by the
Master Kuthumi when teaching Alcyone; he said that there were only two classes
of people, those who know and those who do not know, those who have seen the way
and those who have not yet seen it. He also said that those to be pitied most
were not the bigoted and intolerant, but the millions who do not know that there
is anything beyond the world worth striving for, and are happy in their
ignorance. Madame Blavatsky interpreted the strife to be between the immortal
higher ego and the lower personal ego, these being the living and the dead
respectively.
The door is never closed against those who really
wish to draw nearer to the occult path. He who wants to do so must be given his
opportunity to try. And then, even if he fails it will not be in vain, for some
of his enemies,
239
his vices and weaknesses, will have been destroyed,
and will not trouble him again. It is rare for anyone to blunder so badly as to
be put himself back into a distinctly lower grade in life; but if a man takes up
black magic containing a great deal of powerful evil and exerts himself very
much in that line, he may wrench away the personality altogether from the ego,
and create such bad karma as to make it necessary for him to go back to
primitive conditions. Such cases are very rare. A person who has been really
unworthy of his class is usually thrown back into unpleasant surroundings in the
same class or just below it. It would, however, be •great unwisdom not to try to
rise because there may be danger of a fall from a higher and more responsible
position.
On the other hand, a man who attains, it is said in
the text, will be honoured as a great and holy Buddha. Of course, the Arhat is
not technically a Buddha. But he is Buddha, that is to say, wise or enlightened.
Madame Blavatsky explained that " the secret life "
is that of the Nirmanakaya. His greatness is hidden from the sight of man, and
yet he continues to live in this world. The term is here used in a general way
not only for those who remain on the threshold of liberation in order to fill
the reservoir of spiritual force, but for all who remain behind, thus including
the official Members of the Hierarchy, such as our Masters. We generally reserve
the term in these days, however, for those who follow one of the seven great
lines after taking the Fifth Initiation—Those who fill the reservoir.
240
We meet here once more the idea of the path of woe.
The statement is somewhat misleading, and rather a. misuse of the term woe. It
is true that a Master who is using the physical body does not obtain the
enjoyment of working on the nirvanic plane, but He would smile at the suggestion
that he was in woe. When a man gains the nirvanic consciousness, he does not
lose it because he keeps a physical body, except when he is actively engaged on
the lower planes. At any moment, between writing two letters or any two pieces
of work on the physical plane, he can slip away at once into the higher
consciousness, and carry on its work, which is infinitely more satisfying, and
altogether more glorious and blissful than anyone can imagine down here.
It is true that coming back from the higher planes to
physical existence is like going down from the sunlight into a very dark
dungeon; but you would not think of that if in that place there was someone whom
you very much loved and wished to help. Physical life does involve the
renunciation of the higher glory :but the definite object of helping fills the
soul to such an extent that certainly there is no suffering. Indeed, at a much
lower stage of evolution, a person who knows that someone else is suffering and
needs real help that he can give, and yet neglects that call and goes away to
enjoy himself somewhere else, would afterwards be deeply troubled by remorse, so
that his suffering would ultimately be greater than if he had renounced his
pleasure in the first place. Really, the greatest happiness for all of us comes
from doing the best that we know.
241
There is a large number of candidates who do not
actually fall, but are riot conscious of making progress. Many of these are
subject occasionally to depression, and have the feeling that their efforts have
been in vain, since there is nothing to show for them. They should not allow
themselves to be depressed, because that spoils the astral atmosphere for other
people, and is therefore selfish. But quite apart from that, it is foolish,
because they ought to know that all the time they are making real inner
progress. Long before they become aware of it in the physical brain, the astral
and perhaps the mental body have been organized by their meditation, and they
may be doing very definite and useful work in the inner worlds in a variety of
ways. The whole life may seem to be a failure, but nevertheless much has been
done which will be carried forward into the next life, and will then make
possible some conspicuous progress, perhaps even on the physical plane. In any
given life a man develops both good and evil qualities. The latter show
themselves in the four lower sub-planes of the astral world. As these reflect
their influence in the mental plane only on its four lower sub-planes, they do
not affect the ego at all. The only emotions that can appeal in the three higher
astral sub-planes are those which are good, such as love, sympathy and devotion.
These affect the ego in the causal body, since it resides on the corresponding
sub-planes of the mental world. Therefore every feeling and thought of a higher
kind can be seen, even in this mechanical way, to have, a permanent result in
the higher Self. And since
242
it is the ego that treads the Path, he is making
quite definite steps of progress with every right effort. So there is no reason
to despair, nor to put off until tomorrow what we can do today just because we
cannot do everything at once.
The Path is one, disciple, yet in the end, twofold.
Marked are its stages by four and seven portals. At one end bliss immediate, and
at the other bliss deferred. Both are of merit the reward: the choice is thine.
The one becomes the two, the open and the secret. The
first one leadeth to the goal, the second to self-immolation.
When to the permanent is sacrificed the mutable, the
prize is thine; the drop returneth whence it came. The open Path leads to the
changeless change—Nirvana, the glorious state of absoluteness, the bliss past
human thought.
Thus, the first Path is liberation.
Yes, there is only one way, and that is by the
unfolding of character. There is no limit to the possibilities of the ego in
that respect; the noblest qualities of the greatest men exist in bud in all our
fellow men and will unfold into flower sooner or later. And at the end, when one
has done all that is possible in the human kingdom, with the limitations of the
human brain and environment, the path becomes twofold, and one must choose
between liberation and renunciation. Here the term liberation
243
means the acceptance of nirvana, though sometimes it
is used for mere escape from the wheel of births and deaths at a lower level, as
we have already seen in studying At the Feet of the Master.
Those who do not follow the White Lodge use other
methods, which often develop psychic powers to a relatively high point. But as
the path of grey magic Is not hedged round by restrictions, as is that taught by
the Great White Lodge, sooner or later the man misuses his powers—for the
temptation is too great. Sometimes, "however, the followers of other lines end
by coming into touch with the true teaching and pledging themselves to the
Lodge. In America especially there is a great amount of more or less public
teaching of occultism of the grey variety. But the real path is one—the Path of
Holiness, the building of character.
The four portals mentioned here are the four
initiations leading to Arhatship, described at length in The Masters and the
Path. Another arrangement divides it into seven stages, as we shall see in the
third Fragment of this book.
At the highest levels of attainment on this path the
aspirant will recover the memory of his past lives, though at the same time his
consciousness will have widened enormously, so as to take in that of great hosts
of beings, and he will realize that his power and love are not his own, but
God's. Only separateness will have been lost, and looking back he will see that
he has been living under a delusion of separateness. He will see, too, that his
past lives were very commonplace; that the
244
turning point in them were not usually the events
that he considered to be the most striking and important while he was
experiencing them, but that very often the little things of daily life were the
events that really made for the greatest progress.
But Path the second is renunciation, and therefore
called the Path of woe.
The secret path leads the Arhan to mental woe
unspeakable; woe for the living dead, and helpless pity for the men of karmic
sorrow; the fruit of Karma Sages dare not still.
For it is written: " Teach to eschew all causes; the
ripple of effect, as the great tidal wave, thou shalt let run its course."
By the "mental woe unspeakable" of the Arhan,. which
is another form of the word Arhat, on the secret path is meant the suffering
that comes through sympathy. He sees all the pain and sorrow of the world; but
at the same time he sees all the joy as well. He feels the greatest compassion
for the "living dead," that is, for the great majority of mankind, who do not
even know that there is something to strive for. Then, secondly, there is "
helpless pity " that is aroused by seeing the karmic suffering, the results of
foolishness, which he cannot—we should say, rather, dare not—still. He can
explain to people the principle of karma, so that they will take their painful
experiences in the best way,, and thus mitigate the suffering to some extent,
but he cannot do away with the results of past actions.
245
Even in exoteric Christianity, the " forgiveness " of
sins is not explained as meaning that the results of sins will be abolished. In
the Anglican Church, for instance, when a priest is ordained and the power is
conferred on him to forgive sins, in accordance with the words which in the
Christian scriptures are attributed to the Christ; " Whosoever sins ye remit,
they are remitted unto them, and whosoever sins ye retain, they are retained "
it is explained to him that what he has power to do is to set the offender right
again with God, when by his sin he has put himself in the wrong, or, in other
words, he can turn the man once more into the current of evolution, after he has
set himself athwart it and so blocked his own advance. Behind that Christian
conception there is a beautiful idea, but more beautiful still is the
Theosophical realization that one can never get away from the Divine, that even
the man who falls into avichi is still part of the Deity.
It has repeatedly happened that good and earnest
students have refrained from giving help lest they should be interfering with a
person's karma. No one can interfere with the law of karma, any more than with
the law of gravitation. If you hold up a book in your hand, it contains the
potential energy of gravitation, and the moment that the force you are employing
to hold it up is withdrawn the book falls. The law of karma operates In the same
way. Karma not paid off is similar to potential energy; it may be suspended for
thousands of years or for hundreds of lives, but when the time comes it will
manifest itself.
246
People sometimes think of karma as merciless. But it
is not so. It is just as impersonal as any other law of nature. On the physical
plane laws work without any regard to good or bad intentions. If a child falls
over a precipice the amount of injury it sustains depends upon the height of the
fall, and whether the ground is hard or soft, and not at all on such moral
considerations as whether it was trying to pull a companion out of danger, or
wanted to pick a flower for its mother, or whether it threw itself over in a fit
of passion. Similarly, if a man catches hold of a hot bar of iron, he may do it
to prevent its falling on someone else, or with intent 1 to strike someone with
it; the injury done to the hand will be the same in either case. That is the way
in which karma works on the physical plane. But on the mental plane intentions
count for a great deal, for we make our own character for the future by our
thinking.
So one should never abstain from giving help when
possible. If when you have done your best you fail, then you may say: "His karma
did not allow of his being helped," or else: " My karma did not give me the
privilege of helping him," but that is all. All that really matters is that we
work for others. Work is expansive and cumulative; if you bring one person into
Theosophy, he may bring another ten, and each of those, ten more.
Another sense in which we can take this verse, " the
fruit of karma sages dare not still," is that even if a great Adept were to do
away with some apparent evil— with all poverty, for instance—he would effect no
real
247
good, but only go against the law of the Logos. I do
not mean that the Logos wills such evil; it would be blasphemous to say that His
scheme includes necessary suffering, that He causes it. Suffering comes only by
doing what He has expressly told us not to do. It is true that all have
suffered; no one, so far as we know, has always chosen the right thing and never
made mistakes; but the suffering has always put us right when we have refused to
learn in any other way, and thus the law has made certain for all of us the
ultimate attainment of the indescribable bliss of nirvana.
The open way, no sooner hast thou reached its goal,
will lead thee to reject the Bodhisattvic body, and make thee enter the thrice
glorious state of Dhannakaya, which is oblivion of the world and men for ever.
The secret way leads also to Paranirvanic bliss —but
at the close of Kalpas without number; Nirvanas gamed and lost from boundless
pity and compassion for the world of deluded mortals.
But it is said: " The last shall be the greatest."
Samyak Sambuddha, the Teacher of perfection, gave up his Self for the salvation
of the world, by stopping at the threshold of Nirvana, the pure state.
We have already considered the three vestures, and
seen that no idea of selfishness can attach to one who takes any of them. The
Nirmanakayas are like the contemplative orders, filling the reservoir of
spiritual force
248
for the use of the Adepts who are in touch with our
world. There are some fifty or sixty posts which the latter may fill. The
Nirmanakaya still retains his permanent atoms, and so could, I suppose, if he
wanted, fill one of these posts if it became vacant. The post of Bodhisattva
falls vacant once in each root-race, but there are already many appointed to
fill the office far into the future, who are now being prepared. Many of those
who became Arhats during the incarnation of the Lord Buddha remain as
Nirmanakayas, because of his teaching.
All these offices and positions must be filled, and
those who renounce nirvana are only volunteering to do what we might call the
dirty work. The Adept, if one may put it so, feels not so much the loss of
pleasure, as the knowledge that working on the nirvanic level would be a million
times more effective than down below. And yet someone must do that lower work.
In the scheme of the Logos, the smallest bit of work is as necessary as the
greatest, just as the oiling of a great locomotive is as necessary as the
driving of it.
The Bodhisattvic body here alluded to is that of all
those who remain to help the world—not only that of the very limited number of
those who will be Buddhas.
Stopping at the threshold of nirvana means that one
does not enter in and entirely leave the lower planes, as some do, and as the
Buddha might have done had he so chosen. He who thus remains has the higher
consciousness to the fullest extent, and also retains his consciousness even
down to the physical plane, and so can work on any plane required. It is said
that the Buddha
THE WAY OF THE ARHAT 249
is, at his level, free of the solar system, that he
can move to any of the planets of the system, just as some of us can move to
other planets of our chain. Yet even for him there must be a limit, because he
has not yet entered into the consciousness of the Logos. I do not know whether
his consciousness includes the sun; Swami T. Subba Row once spoke of the sun as
a place of life so intense that even a Dhyan Chohan can hardly enter it.
The buddhic plane appears to take us anywhere through
our chain of worlds. Nirvanic consciousness would mean consciousness anywhere In
the solar system. At the Fourth Initiation a touch of nirvana is given, but that
does not mean the full consciousness of that plane.' It is entry into the lowest
part of it, and one has still to rise, sub-plane by sub-plane, until full
consciousness of the plane is acquired.
Of the Buddha it is said that He attained
Para-nirvana. Thus it is possible to consider different levels of nirvana—the
different sub-planes of the atmic plane, then the two planes of our system
beyond that, and on into the higher cosmic planes.
Thou hast the knowledge now concerning the two ways.
Thy time will come for choice, O thou of eager Soul, when thou hast reached the
end and passed the seven portals. Thy mind is clear. No more art thou entangled
in delusive thoughts, for thou hast learned all. Unveiled stands Truth and looks
thee sternly in the face. She says:
250
" Sweet are the fruits of rest and liberation for the
sake of self; but sweeter still the fruits of long and bitter duty: aye,
renunciation for the sake of others, of suffering fellow-men."
The Bodhisattva who has won the battle, who holds the
prize within his palm, yet says in his divine compassion:
" For others' sake this great reward I yield "—
accomplishes the greater renunciation.
A Saviour of the world is he.
•
• •
* • •
Behold! The goal of bliss and the long Path of woe
are at the furthest end. Thou canst choose either, O aspirant to sorrow,
throughout the coming cycles!
Aum vajrapani hum.
The greater renunciation is renouncing the higher
work, after seeing it, in order to do the lesser work, which we have seen to be
just as necessary. Such a matter as the renunciation of the desires of the
personality is an altogether lower renunciation.
We must not import into our thought here any tinge of
the popular Christian idea of a Saviour who comes to save us from eternal
torment. The idea is, of course, nothing but a horrible distortion of the
earlier and truly Christian teaching, as for example that of Origen, who
believed in the deification of man through Christ. Every one who has risen into
true communion with the Master
251
has become identified with him, and is safe or sure
to complete the treading of the Path in the present cycle. The original meaning
of the term " saved " has been explained in The Masters and the Path.
When we speak of the Nirmanakayas as the Guardian
Wall, we do not for a moment imagine that they are protecting us against evil
powers who are waiting for an opportunity to pounce upon mankind. They are
engaged, as said before, in filling the reservoir with force used by the Great
White Brotherhood, to give help and guidance intelligently wherever it is
possible, and to save mankind from many mistakes which it might otherwise
commit, and from the suffering which would then ensue.
This Fragment ends not with " Om mani padme hum ", as
did the first, but a different formula: " Aum vajrapani hum," Vajra means a
thunder-bolt, as well as a diamond. The term reminds us of Jove with his
thunderbolts and of the Norse God Thor. This thunderbolt is the dorje, the rod
of power, of which I have given a sketch in The Masters and the Path.
FRAGMENT III THE SEVEN PORTALS
CHAPTER 1 THE PARAMITA HEIGHTS
Acharya, the choice is made, I thirst for wisdom. Now
hast Thou rent the veil before the secret path, and taught the greatest Yana.
Thy servant here is ready for Thy guidance.
C.W.L.—There is a footnote to the word Acharya, which
means a spiritual preceptor or guru. It explains that among the Northern
Buddhists these are chosen from among the saintly men learned in gotrabhu-jnana.
The gotrabhu is the man who is ready for any one of the Initiations, he who has
all the qualities and only awaits permission to present himself. Gotrabhu-jnana
is the knowledge of those qualifications. The Masters —Adepts who take pupils or
apprentices—are they who have that knowledge.
The term Yana has already been discussed in Chapter 1
of the first Fragment.
'Tis well, Shravaka. Prepare thyself, for thou wilt
have to travel on alone. Thy teacher can but point the way. The Path is one for
all, the means to reach the goal must vary with the pilgrims.
256
The word shravaka comes from the root shru which
means to listen. The " listener " is one who attends to the religious
instructions, says a footnote, and when. from theory he passes into the practice
or performance of asceticism, he becomes a Shramana, from shramay exertion. The
two terms have much the same meaning as the akoustikoi and askitai among the
Greeks.
All who tread the Path must gain the same qualities
or virtues, but the modes of training for this are very varied. There are seven
great types of men, or seven rays, and along each of these aspirants are drawn
to teachers of their own rays. Even within the same type the teaching is adapted
to individual needs, so the pupils of one Master often receive quite different
treatment. Thus a Master may send one of his pupils into seclusion and another
out into the struggle of the world. He may give one the satisfaction of knowing
that he is being taught, and leave another without that knowledge for a great
length of time. Of this training and the different types some considerable
account has been given in The Masters and the Path.
Which will thou choose, O thou of dauntless heart?
The Samtan of eye doctrine, fourfold Dhyana, or thread thy way through
Paramitas, six in number, noble gates of virtue leading to Bodhi and to Prajna,
seventh step of wisdom?
The rugged path of fourfold Dhyana winds uphill
Thrice great is he who climbs the lofty top.
257
The Paramita heights are crossed by a still steeper
path. Thou hast to fight thy way through portals seven, seven strongholds held
by cruel, crafty powers —passions incarnate.
Little is said in this Fragment about the fourfold
dhyana, but much about the paramitas. The steps in meditation or dhyana are
always spoken of as three, as we have seen in studying the first Fragment, and
these taken together are called sannyama. These three are dharana, dhyana and
samadhi, or concentration, meditation and contemplation, and there is the
preliminary practice of pratyahara, making the fourth. We have also studied the
paramitas in the second Fragment. Here the path for the attainment of those
virtues is spoken of as having seven portals, at each of which the. candidate
has to struggle with and slay a great fault or sin.
It seems a little misleading to put meditation and
the development of these qualities one against the other, for both are
necessary. One cannot meditate without having these qualities, and one cannot
develop the qualities to perfection without meditation. It may have been that
even at his day Aryasanga was contrasting the path of retirement, of the man who
avoided the difficulties and distractions of the world in order to go by himself
to meditate apart from men, with the path of the spiritual life lived in the
midst of the world of men, which requires the practice of ideals in all the
affairs of daily life. He would then have been speaking of the former as a
258
lofty path, but of the latter as greater still, or
father steeper still. Instances of men achieving perfection amidst the business
of daily life are quite common in the Hindu books. The great gurus of the
Mahabharata were active in the council chamber and on the battlefield, and a
merchant is also mentioned, in the person of Tuladhara. In the Bhagavad-Gita the
path of duty and action is taught, and Shri Krishna tells Arjuna, His pupil,
that Janaka and others attained to perfection by action, and he should do the
same, performing action without personal attachment to the fruit of it, but for
the sake of mankind.1
A glance at the opposites of the paramitas will show
the nature of the cruel, crafty powers which must be fought. The man who is
self-centred forgets that he is one unit in a whole, that, as Epictetus said,
.without mankind around him he would not even be a man. Charity and general
ethical development or morality in its full sense do away with this
self-centredness, and open the man up so that he thinks more of others than of
himself, and becomes a benefactor to those who suffer, a good companion to his
peers, and a responsive pupil to his teacher.
People often allow their patience to be ruffled by
resentment. They "feel hurt," and are discontented complaining inwardly, if not
outwardly. This means that they forget that just because there is a law of
justice, which is all the time engaged in repaying past debts between man and
man, there must be some 1 Op. cit., III 20.
259
apparent injustice. Sometimes a man wants to see the
result of his own work at an early stage, because he is thinking of himself, not
of the work, and he wants to boast about it or at least to congratulate himself
upon its achievement. At a later stage, he is sorry because his efforts made for
a good purpose seem to fail; there is still something of discontent and
impatience in that. Later he will see that it was the effort that was the
important thing, not the results. When these feelings trouble him no more, he
will have acquired patience.
Again, the natural man is lazy. He likes to bask in
the sun, and will not exert himself until hunger moves him, or there arises a
vainglorious desire to hang more scalps to his belt, which urges him to rise
while his fellow-savages are sleeping. Tireless, dauntless energy is not
"natural". Observe Dr. Besant, utilizing every moment of the day, always
working, never wasting time. Do you suppose it was natural to her in the past to
be always at work? She does it because she has seen the beauty of the goal—to be
a helper of mankind.
Meditation also is not " natural". It calls for much
trouble, a strong exertion of the mind, and the keeping of the body in
subjection. The acquirement of wisdom also involves study and effort, and
sometimes the courage to face uncomfortable and even dangerous experiences.
Be of good cheer, disciple; bear in- mind the golden
role. Once thou hast passed the gate Srotapatti, "he who die stream hath
entered"; once thy foot hath pressed die bed of die nirvanic
260
stream in this or any future life; thou hast but
seven other births before thee, O thou of adamantine will.
Seven lives is the average period between the First
Initiation and the Fourth, but if the will is sufficiently strong, a man can
attain the goal in less. It is analogous to the preparation of a student for an
examination; it is considered that a certain period of time spent in study
should fit the average candidate to pass, but any given man may take a longer or
a shorter time. Two lives have often brought a man from his First Initiation to
Arhatship; some few people have achieved that goal in one life. The same rule
then holds good for the attainment of Adeptship, for the Arhat is just half way.
Look on. What seest thou before thine eye, O aspirant
to God-like wisdom?
" The cloak of darkness is upon the deep of matter;
within its folds I struggle. Beneath my gaze it deepens, Lord; it is dispelled
beneath the waving of Thy hand. A shadow moveth, creeping like the stretching
serpent coils.... It grows, swells out, and disappears in darkness."
It is the shadow of thyself outside the Path, cast on
the darkness of thy sins.
Here one would prefer to say faults and failings
rather than sins. These become much more dangerous on the Path than ever they
were before. Therefore an iron
261
determination to eradicate them utterly and at once
is required for treading the way. When one sees a fault in oneself, one should
go and do exactly the opposite, unflinchingly and steadily, until it is
completely gone. Few people are willing to do this. Sometimes they beg one to be
open with them and tell them just what it is that keeps them back. If one does
it, one risks losing their friendship. Generally they become indignant and say
that they know that they have many faults but not the one to which you have
drawn their attention and that they do not think much of your judgment or
intuition. There are exceptions, but that is the general rule.
On the Path a man has to live by his own rules, not
simply to follow the rules or conventions of the social environment in which he
find? himself. This increases his difficulties and dangers. He is trying his
utmost— of that we may be sure, for if he were not, he would be throwing away
the fruits of the efforts of many lives, and that would be madness. Others have
no means of judging him. He holds in his hand a key which others do not possess,
and for him therefore all things wear a new aspect. He needs the kind thoughts
of others— not criticism of what they do not understand—for he is not
insensitive, and they will aid him to rise rapidly and become a power to uplift
the world.
"Yea, Lord; I see the Path; its foot in mire, its
summit lost in glorious light nirvanic; and now I see the ever-narrowing portals
on the hard and thorny road to Jnana."
262
Thou seest well, Lanoo. These portals lead the
aspirant across the waters on to the other shore.
" The other shore " is a phrase that is constantly
used. There are two distinct forms of symbology which make use of this metaphor.
In one, the whole of life is likened to the ocean, and men are ferried to the
other shore, to the state beyond death and rebirth, by the Mahayana or the
Hinayana. The second is a more technical meaning At the first great Initiation,
a man steps out from the general evolution, which he has now completed, and
begins the special one. As much as is permissible of the ceremony that then
takes place has been printed in The Masters and the Path, including the words:
"You have entered upon the stream. May you soon reach the further shore. "l That
shore is, of course, Adeptship.
Each portal hath a golden key that openeth its gate;
and these keys are: 1. Dana, the key of charity and love immortal.
This is not mere charity in the sense of giving alms,
nor what is commonly called a charitable attitude, though that is much more than
the former. It means utter readiness to give oneself and all one has in service.
There are not many people in the world who have reached that stage, who are
ready to employ all their time, energy, money, feelings and thoughts to this
end. And even for those who have reached that point there is a further stage,
for there may still exist the fault of identifying the work with oneself instead
of
1 Op. cit., Ch. VII.
263
oneself with the work. There are many who are willing
to take up great work, but few who will forget themselves to the point of doing
any insignificant piece of work of which no notice will be taken and for which
no thanks are given. The disciple of the Master has to look round and see what
has to be done that he can do that is not being done. He must not look with
disfavour upon the humblest task, thinking, " I am too good for this." In the
Master's work no part is more important than any other, though some portions are
more difficult than others, and therefore require special training or unusual
faculties or ability.
To sacrifice yourself thoroughly, you must also
sacrifice your feelings. If these are liable to be hurt, you will waste a lot of
force in being offended that should have been put into the work. We must always
do our best, and not stop to think: " What a fine fellow I am."
Then we must also have " love immortal". Tennyson
said of the dead:
They watch like God the rolling hours With larger,
other eyes than ours, To make allowance for us all.
God knows all, and he does not lose patience. We are
apt to lose patience with one another, and quickly get tired of making
allowances, but he does not. It has been well said: Tout comprendre, c'est tout
pardonner.1
2. Shila, the key of harmony in word and act, the key
that counterbalances the causes and the effect, and leaves no further room for
karmic action.
1 "To understand all is to pardon all."
264
The word sila is generally translated simply "
con-duct," but here the writer emphasizes the idea of harmony. He who practises
shila will be ever attentive to his own dharma, studious of what he can do with
the powers that he has in the position in which karma has placed him. This is
the quality also which will close up his karmic account as quickly as possible,
and enable him to enjoy ever-increasing freedom and opportunity to do good.
3. Kshanti, patience, sweet, that nought
can ruffle.
While the candidate at this stage of his journey must
acquire a great measure of this quality, it still remains to be perfected later
on. To be utterly unruffled is a very high condition. The Arhat is spoken of as
the perfect—the venerable—yet he has five fetters to cast off before reaching
Adeptship, and of these the last but one is the possibility of being ruffled by
anything whatever.
4. Vairagya, indifference to pleasure and to pain,
illusion conquered, truth alone perceived.
The whole of the third of our commentary on At the
Feet of the Master is taken up with the quality of vairagya, which is there
translated desirelessness. As was said before, it is usually translated
indifference or dispassion.
This quality is possessed by the man who is keenly
alert about his work, but never allows personal considerations to stand in his
way. He has got rid of feelings that can be hurt, but has not lost sympathy. He
is
265
indifferent to the things which commonly sway not
disturbed by passions, but has calm, cool judgment. This so-called indifference
does not mean that the man will not put enthusiasm into his work, but that he
will do so when it is painful and troublesome just as much as when it is full of
pleasure. When the quality is well developed, the man will see that most of our
pleasures and pains are illusions, and are caused by a wrong way of taking
things. He will see the truth of the saying of the ancient Stoic that it is our
opinions about things that trouble us more than the things themselves.
5. Virya, the dauntless energy that fights its way to
the supernal truth, out of the mire of lies terrestrial.
Each person who approaches the. Path has his own
special qualities, on account of which he will find some of these portals
especially easy to pass and others difficult. The quality of patience, for
example, would generally be much easier for the Eastern disciple, and the
quality of energy for the Western. When this list was first placed before us,
some of us wondered why the more difficult qualities were placed at the
beginning. Really it was not so. The Lord Buddha was an Indian and he drew it up
for the Indian people, and probably he placed first on the list the steps which
they were likely to find the easiest.
It certainly is difficult, when one has first
developed a great deal of energy, or Virya, to acquire the sweet patience, or
kshanti, afterwards. A person who has this
266
energy and hears about the path wants immediately to
tread it to the very end-—but without patience he will cause such a disturbance
all along the way, and create such a quantity of troublesome karma that he will
delay himself considerably. On the other hand the man who has the patience and
not the energy will perhaps be content to go along very slowly—and his progress
will then be slow indeed.
There is a tendency of this kind at present in the
East. I remember that in Ceylon I was once told that in ancient times people
really attained nirvana, but that now times were evil—it was what was called a
dark age, a kali yuga—and these achievements were no longer possible, though
perhaps in some far distant, golden future they would again become so. But the
great teachers are with us still, and though, as the Christian Scripture says,
strait is the gate and narrow is the way, yet now as ever that gate can be found
and that way can be trodden.
In these matters, no man can tell where he stands. To
many Theosophy conies as a recollection; that means that they knew something
about it in former lives. If in those lives a man has worked hard to reach the
Path, in this life a little more work will bring him to it. But if he is only
now beginning that effort he has a long way to go, and it would be an almost
superhuman feat for him to enter the stream in this incarnation.
The efforts that many Theosophists are making imply a
great strain; that is why there is sometimes so much disturbance in the
Theosophical Society, so much
267
irritability and quarrelling. I have heard people say
that other Societies have far less trouble of this kind. That is naturally the
case. If you join a geographical or geological other similar society, you are
simply joining a set of people who are working together to acquire more
knowledge, generally of a particular kind. But in the Theosophical Society many
people are putting a great strain upon their astral and mental bodies and that
reacts upon their physical bodies. I think, therefore, that as we shall continue
to deal with a set of sensitive and not yet perfect people, who are pressing
forward more rapidly than nature in its normal course intended, the history of
the Society will probably continue to record many disturbances, though the time
is bound to come for each one of its members when he will acquire the " patience
sweet that naught can ruffle ",
6. Dhyana, whose golden gate once opened leads, the
Narjol towards the realm of Sat eternal and its ceaseless contemplation.
In earlier editions of this book, you will find that
the word narjol is mis-spelt naljor. This was a mistake, corrected in the later
editions. The mis-spelling was due to the fact that Madame Blavatsky read the
word astrally, and reading a book astrally you see at the same time what is
written on the front of the page, and also the reverse of the characters as from
behind. Of course, you would not focus your attention on the reverse aspect of
the print or writing; you would normally notice only the page spread out before
you—those
268
would be quite distinct, and the reverse would then
be out of focus. Still, reading in this way it is quite easy to make mistakes
and get some things reversed. This is especially true of numbers; you can see at
once if you are looking at 7 the wrong way about, but 18 can easily be mistaken
for 81.
Madame Blavatsky sometimes got numbers reversed in
this way. She used often to look astrally at rare books, of which only one or
two copies exist, and some of us would go to the British Museum to verify a
quotation which she had stated as being, let us say, on page 139, and would find
that it was on page 931. Generally we found her quotations accurate, though
sometimes there were small inaccuracies; once, I remember, she left out the word
" not", which did make quite a difference to the sense! Seeing that Madame
Blavatsky did not know Sanskrit, Pali or Tibetan, and had to depend entirely on
her memory when using words in those languages, as she so frequently did, the
wonder is not that she made some mistakes, but that she made so few.
The word narjol, which has led us into this little
digression, is a Tibetan word which means adept or saint, or, even better, yogi.
Its derivation is from a word meaning " peace ". The narjol is therefore one who
strives after the inner peace.
It is dhyana or meditation which opens the gates of
the higher self. Most of our Theosophical information, and of what is written in
the ancient Scriptures, has come to us by way of clairvoyance. There is a mass
269
of investigation waiting to be done by clairvoyance.
In occult chemistry, for example, we have examined the elements and some
compounds, but there is a vast work to be done in that field by someone who has
the faculty of etheric vision and magnification, and the patience to observe and
count the atoms over and over again.
The Stanzas of Dzyan must have been written by one
who could read the minds of the directing Devas, and thus see what they were
aiming at. What we say about rings and rounds may not be exact, but the
information given about the astral and mental planes, being the result of
thousands of observations, is reasonably sure to be so. There may still arise
errors from premature generalization—that happens in every science—-from the
mistaking of the abnormal for the normal, or from the oversight of some class of
phenomena bearing on a general theory. Such, for example, was our former idea
about the interval between lives, and the way in which egos incarnated regularly
in successive sub-races, which was announced as the normal course of evolution
until we discovered another type of egos who kept mostly to one sub-race and
reincarnated twice as frequently as the others. There may be half a dozen more
types for all we know; all we can say is that we have not yet come across them.
The old Scriptures are especially valuable because
they were largely written by people who could see clairvoyantly. Many are
repelled from them because of the way in which they present their ideas,
sometimes by their archaic flavour. Every age has had its own.
270
methods of expression. Our modern way is quite bald;
we put things as plainly as we can. In ancient Egypt, to take a different
example, everything was told in a very poetic garb. The Gnostic books also
wrapped everything up in elaborate symbology. Therefore, if one wants to study
the Book of the Dead, or Pistis Sophia, even supposing one gets an accurate
translation, which is not always the case, one has still to try to put oneself
back into the attitude of mind of the times when they were written, and that is
very difficult. It also takes time—more than the modern man can usually give to
it, if he is also engaged in earning his livelihood in some other way.
In the old days in every part of the world life was
much more leisurely. It was the custom to make things comfortable and easy for
everybody, and generally to put off till to-morrow any business that could
possibly be avoided to-day. In looking up a great number of past lives, I found
the same thing everywhere. There were no trains to catch or newspapers or
magazines to bring out by a certain time of day or on a certain date. The
nearest approach that I have found to a regular serial publication was a series
of letters, brought out at intervals which were very long and quite irregular-so
that sometimes months elapsed between the issues.
In spite of all this, men did attain Adeptship in
those old days, but they must have found it hard to acquire virya, the dauntless
energy required for the path. Still, the unresting activity, the ceaseless hurry
of our modern Western world, is not exactly the same thing as virya.
271
It is often by outward compulsion that people show
their energy. If they are not punctual and assiduous in business, the
competition is such that other men will pass ahead of them and they will not be
able to make a living. But the student of occultism is moved by his own inner
compulsion, and is always working steadily—but without hurry or flurry, for he
wants his work to be well done.
Probably the principal danger in this matter is that
of doing too little, of letting things go undone which ought to be done. Yet
some people spoil their work by undertaking too much. Mrs. Besant is a
magnificent example of the middle course; she is always at work, and plans all
her time to the best advantage, but she does not attempt more than she can do.
She will often say about a thing: " This is not my work, for I have, no time for
it."
There is truth in the saying that the busiest man
always has the most time. It is so because he does not mismanage his time. But
there are men who take upon themselves more work than they can really do,
sometimes because they have the feeling, which may be well founded, that no one
else among the people around them can do the work quite as well. This was once
the case many years ago with a certain General Secretary of one of the Sections
of the Theosophical Society. He was a splendid worker of great ability, and his
opinion that he could do things best was probably justified. But he undertook so
much that work left undone for lack of time accumulated until, when his
successor came into office, things were in an almost hopeless muddle.
272
It is better to tread the middle path in this matter,
to portion out your work carefully, and to spare some of the time to teach and
to train other workers. It is often much more trouble to show someone else how
to do a piece of work than to do it oneself, but one hopes that, when one has
shown him once or twice, or if necessary ten times, he will be able to do it
alone a hundred times, so that in the end there will be gain.
7. Prajna, the key to which makes of a man a God,
creating him a Bodhisattva, son of the Dhyanis.
Such to the portals are the golden keys.
We have now come to the last of these qualities.
Prajna, which means, once more, wisdom—more in the sense of a faculty of
consciousness than of knowledge that is wisdom because it penetrates to the life
behind the form. Jnana, also translated wisdom, is not a faculty, but prajna is.
It is said that this quality makes the Bodhisattva.
This latter term is used here in a wide sense. Technically, a Bodhisattva is one
who is destined to become a Buddha, who has given to a living Buddha the pledge
that in a future life he will take up that office. But all men alike will pass
through the level of the Bodhisattva, on their various lines. There are seven
great planetary lines, and Masters taking pupils are at work along each of them.
Every man, going along his own line, will ultimately be drawn into contact with
a Master standing at the head of that line. There is, however, the possibility
273
of a man's changing from one line to another through
devotion to a particular Master, but this requires a certain extra amount of
study and effort; for a man most readily adapts himself to occult training on
his own line.
He who becomes a Buddha must thousands of years
beforehand have made, his vow to a living Buddha, and it is said that from that
time onward the influence of the Buddha overshadows him, and that when in due
course he attains Buddhahood, the great influence of the spiritual Buddha hovers
over the incarnate Buddha. The Lord Gautama is said to have taken his vow to
Buddha Dipankara, and the latter is supposed to have been also present in the
background during the years when the Buddha Gautama was preaching. One can only
repeat what has been said on these high matters, but certainly it is a very
beautiful idea. It is also a natural one, for we know that on a much lower level
the Master is always overshadowing the disciple, who is part of his
consciousness.
CHAPTER 2
TUNING THE HEART
Before thou canst approach the last, O weaver of thy
freedom, thou hast to master these Paramitas of perfection—the virtues
transcendental six and ten in number—along the weary path.
For, O disciple! before thou wert made fit to meet
thy Teacher face to face, thy Master light to light, what wert thou told?
Before thou canst approach the foremost gate thou
hast to learn to part thy body from thy mind, to dissipate the shadow, and to
live in the eternal. For this, thou hast to live and breathe in all, as all that
thou perceivest breathes in thee; to feel thyself abiding in all things, all
things in Self.
C.W.L.—-To meet thy Master light to light expresses a
wonderful truth. When the pupil comes into touch with his Master's
consciousness, and the latter enfolds him for the first time, his aura shines
forth brilliantly with the Master's light, as I have explained in The Masters
and the Path.1
1 Op. cit., Ch. V.
275
These verses go again over much of the ground
traversed at the beginning of the First Fragment. To part the body from the mind
means literally that one must learn to make the mayavi rupa, and metaphorically
that one must discriminate what is reality and understand that one is not the
body. The astral body is the shadow of the physical one; this must not be
destroyed, but its influence over the pupil must be done away with. One must use
it, but not allow it to dominate one. To live in the eternal is not to leave the
world, but to judge things all the time from the standpoint of the eternal life.
All these things we have considered in studying At the Feet of the Master.
He who learns to live from the point of view of the
eternal, of the reincarnating ego, ,soon learns that nothing that happens to one
from the outside matters at all. When we read the Lives of Alcyone, we see that
many of the characters in them went through much suffering. Some of those
characters were ourselves, and we know that the suffering was temporary and does
not affect us now. Looking back, we sometimes wonder how some of the characters
endured such suffering. Well, they did, and came through it safely. It is not
always so easy to feel that one will come through present suffering all right,
because one is in the midst of it, instead of looking at it in perspective. One
cannot expect to see clearly the whole of an experience or an event in which one
is actually immersed. A soldier on the battlefield, for example, sees very
little of what is going on, and does not usually know the importance of the
particular
276
movement or- manoeuvre in which he is taking part;
his share of the work may seem trivial, and yet it may be an important factor in
deciding the battle, or it may be spectacular and prominent and yet not be
really vital to the success of his side.
Nevertheless, I do not think we can overrate the
importance of the Theosophical Society. It is one of the most important
movements that the world has ever seen. To the outer world, the rulers and
statesmen, it looks like any other Society—a mere handful of people. Yet it was
founded by the two Masters who will be the Heads of the sixth root-race, and
they are choosing from among us the people who are fit to take part in that race
in its early development. But we can very easily overrate our own personal share
in the work of the Society. No one is indispensable, as we have had occasion to
find out in the course of the Society's history. Even our great leaders, Madame
Blavatsky and Colonel Olcott, have departed, but the Society has survived their
loss, and gone on spreading its ideals and permeating the world with them,
because the Masters remain.
Disciples of the Masters have to learn to identify
their consciousness with that of their fellow men and therefore certain
exercises are often set for the purpose. The results are often surprising when
the pupil begins by trying to enter the consciousness of various animals. They
have very limited lines of thought, and actions for which people will often
credit them with motives drawn from human experience are often due to something
different. On the other hand, they follow their few lines
277
of thought much further than is commonly realized; so
that in some ways we credit them with very much more than is in them, but in
others with very much less.
Often a pupil is put into the body of some one else,
in order that he may understand that other's position, and also that he may
realize himself in different forms. A rather drastic experience of the kind was
related to me by Mr. Damodar K. Mavalankar many years ago. He was one day taken
out of his body, and flung into that of a drunken sailor in some dock in a
foreign country. He was a Brahmana, with all the Brahmana's hereditary
shrinking, if it may be so described, from contact with what is low or unclean—a
feeling stronger than almost any Western person can quite understand. Naturally,
it was a terrible shock. He found himself immersed in what to him was
unspeakable filth. Yet in the midst of this horror which had suddenly fallen
upon him he was able to continue to realize himself, and to say to himself: " I
am not this; I am Damodar." And he was able to remain calm, and to think: " This
too is humanity; I have to sympathize also with this." So he came out of the
test with credit.
Many people, if subjected to such a test, would have
got into a great flurry, would have thought it a dreadful nightmare, and in
struggling madly to get free would have injured themselves. To most, perhaps,
the first feeling would have been one of disgust. But an Adept does not feel
like that. He does not condone any wrong; he would realize that very much more
than we could, but he is not disgusted. He recognizes all the
278
stages of human life. He remembers that he has been
through something like this himself ages ago, perhaps on some other planet. His
buddhic consciousness is also perfectly unfolded, and when that is the case one
is able to enfold sinners within oneself. There is no repulsion for the man who
is doing wrong; one feels only the desire to give whatever help is possible.
Generally, however, only a little can be given to people in those stages, and
that must be given cautiously. Not only-sympathy is necessary, but also wisdom
to understand what he can respond to, and patience and tact to make him realize
the excellence of a life a little superior to that which he has been leading.
It is through this experience of identification that
one learns wise sympathy, and I think that is the only way in which it can be
done perfectly. One sees then why a man does certain things, and how they appear
to him. Those who have not that experience must do their best to try to see
things from the point of view of others.
Thou shalt not let thy senses make a playground of
thy mind.
Thou shalt not separate thy being from Being, and the
rest, but merge the ocean in the drop, the drop within the ocean.
So shalt thou be in full accord with all that lives;
bear love to men as though they were thy brother-pupils, disciples of one
Teacher, the sons of one sweet mother.
279
The first of these verses reminds one of the earlier
portion of the first Fragment, where it says: " The mind is the great slayer of
the real. Let the disciple slay the slayer." It is such a slayer because we have
allowed prejudices to grow up in it. It is commonplace knowledge that we never
see another person, Lut only our thought of him. To slay the slayer, however,
does not mean that we are to try to get along without the intellect, and trust
solely to our impulses, which are a stage lower. We must rise to the intuitional
level, which is above the intellect, and allow that to determine to what objects
our thoughts shall be directed.
If people could see the effect of prejudice in the
mental body, they would be surprised. The matter of that body is, or should be,
in a constant rhythmical flow, and different parts of it, or rings, have to do
with thought along different lines. If one has a prejudice along some one line
of thinking, there is a congestion in the ring which has to do with that line;
the matter in that place no longer flows freely. The appearance made on the
mental body by this congestion is exactly like that of a great wart. We ought to
be able to look out through any portion of the mental body, but the effect of
that wart is to interfere with our vision. When we try to look out through this
part of the mental body things will appear distorted, as has been explained
before.1
It is in this way that the mind is the slayer of the
real. Even the best people have some prejudices. Some one, for example, who
prides himself on being free from l Ante, Vol. I, Part IV, Chapter 1, Control of
Mind.
280
them in one direction—let us say about caste or
colour— will have them in another, perhaps in regard to manners. He does not
mind whether a man's skin be brown, or white, or red, or yellow; but if the man
should happen to eat off his knife, or pronounce words in a provincial way, he
is not at all indifferent.
The worst of these prejudices are generally those of
the existence of which we are quite unaware, with which perhaps we have grown up
from childhood. They are exceedingly hard to eradicate. The only way to conquer
them completely is by love. If the man's manners offend us, he will learn better
ones in time—if not in this incarnation, then in the next—but the man is part of
the Logos, just as we are. The love of God, like the peace of God, passeth
understanding, and not only excuses all, but feels no need to excuse.
We must learn to bear love to all men as though they
were our brother pupils. The tie between pupils of the same Master is the
strongest in the world, except that which exists between members of the
Brotherhood. In time, the pupil will learn to extend the quality of love that he
has acquired under these conditions of unity, until he feels it towards all whom
he sees.
Of teachers there are many: the Master-Soul is one,
Alaya, the universal Soul. Live in that Master as its ray in thee. Live in thy
fellows as they live in it.
This is the same idea of unity, put even more
beautifully.
281
Before thou standest on the threshold of the Path;
before thou crossest the foremost gate, thou hast to merge the two into the one
and sacrifice the personal to the Self impersonal, and thus destroy the path
between the two—Antahkarana.
The general meaning of this verse is quite clear to
us, but the use of the word antahkarana is a little unusual, especially as
Madame Blavatsky has annotated it. She says: "Antahkarana is the lower Manas,
the path of communication or communion between the personality and the higher
Manas or human Soul. At death it is destroyed as a path or medium of
communication, and its remains survive in a form as a Kamarupa—-the shell."
In the latter part of the third volume of The Secret
.Doctrine, Madame Blavatsky sometimes uses the word kama-manas for what we now
call the lower mind, meaning a mind the character of which is built up during
the personal life under the influence of kama. The antahkarana could then be
regarded as the lower manas pure and undefiled, the ray of the higher manas.
During life, it is possible for a man to get into touch with the higher manas
through that channel, and as we have seen in The Masters and the Path,1 the
pupil addresses himself to the task of so widening the channel that it is always
fully open, and the active higher manas may express himself all the time in the
personality. But after death the average man has not the freedom that he had
before to initiate new activities or to try new
1 Op. cit., Ch. VIII,
282
experiments; he is now in the world of the effects of
the causes he set going during earth life, and must first work, out his
collected lower emotions on the astral plane, and then his collected higher
emotions on the lower mental plane, in the devachanic condition. So, in a sense,
his antahkarana has ceased to function as a downward channel. This does not
apply, however, to the man who is the master of his own feelings and thoughts or
to the pupil who ranges the astral and lower mental planes at will.
During life the ego in the causal body has entrusted
some of his own energy, as it were, to the search for useful experience to which
his personality was adapted,, and in so far as the personality failed in its
mission, that energy, those rays of the higher manas, have been lost, remaining
but as a centre for the shell, or even for the production of a dweller on the
threshold if they are strong enough to last over to the next incarnation.
In current Theosophical terms, after death, the man
remains in the astral plane for a period, longer or shorter, according to the
quantity and virility of his selfish desires, be they gross or refined or mixed.
Then he meets with his second death, the death of the astral body, and goes on
into devachan, a special condition on the lower mental plane, in his lower
mental body, in which he works up to perfection all his unselfish ambitions and
desires. While he is in this latter state, some part of the discarded astral
corpse may still be roaming about in a congenial environment, if that body was
coarse. All this has been very fully explained in my little
283
works The Astral Plane and The Devachanic Plane
Anything like a full description of these after-death states here would swell
this book to unwieldy proportions.
When writing the articles on Lost Souls, which has
been incorporated in The Inner Life, I thought of a simple explanation of the
connection between the higher and lower mind. By far the greater part of the ego
belongs to the highest sub-plane of the mental; a lesser portion belongs to the
second sub-plane, and still less to the third. We may therefore imagine a
diagram representing the ego on those three sub-planes, as being shaped
something like a conventional heart, tapering to a point at the bottom. In the
ordinary person only that little point comes down into the personality—so that a
very small portion of the ego is in activity in reference to it.
Probably not more than a hundredth part of it is
active in people who are unevolved. With occult students a little of the second
sub-plane is generally in activity also. More advanced students have a great
deal of-that sub-plane in activity, and in the stage below that of the Arhat,
about one half the ego is active.
The hold that the ego has over his lower vehicles is
only very partial, and the antahkarana may be regarded as the arm stretched out
between the little piece of the ego that is awakened, and the part put down, the
hand, which frequently forgets about the higher and often even works against it.
When the two are perfectly joined this attenuated thread ceases to exist.
In Sanskrit the word antahkarana means the inner
organ or inner instrument, and the destruction of that
284
would imply that the ego would no longer need an
instrument, but would work directly on the personality. The ego actually loses a
part of himself when the cohesion of the ego as a whole is weaker than the
forces of entanglement, but he has also gained something during the life, and
generally (always excepting the case of a very wicked life) the gain is more
than the loss sustained through the entanglement with the lower manas. A little
of himself and a little of the lower manas is left in the kama-rupa at the
second death. The antahkarana should therefore be thought of as the link which
joins the higher and the lower self, and which disappears when one will operates
the two.
Thou hast to be prepared to answer Dharma, the stern
law, whose voice will ask thee at thy first, at thy initial step:
' Hast thou complied with all the rules, O thou of
lofty hopes ?
" Hast thou attuned thy heart and mind to the great
mind and heart of all mankind ? For as the sacred river's roaring voice whereby
all nature-sounds are echoed back, so must the heart of him who in the stream
would enter thrill in response to every sigh and thought of all that lives and
breathes."
Madame Blavatsky here gives us a long footnote,
explaining that the Northern Buddhists, and indeed all Chinamen, find in the
deep roar of some of the great and sacred rivers the keynote of nature. She
points out
285
is a well known fact in physical science, as well as
in occultism, that the aggregate sound of nature— such as is heard in the roar
of great rivers, the noise produced by the waving tops of trees in large
forests, or that of a city heard at a distance—is a definite single tone of
quite an appreciable pitch. All that is true, and one who has learned to do so
can always hear the underlying tone of nature. Every planet also has its own
sound; it intones its own notes as it moves through space, and by this tone the
Logos knows whether all is going well with His worlds, somewhat in the same way
that a practised engineer can tell by the sound of his engine whether all is
well with his machinery. So must the aspirant listen constantly to the life in
all around him. This brings us back to that quality of sympathy which this book
so strongly insists upon. Often we think we understand our nearest friends, but
really we do not, as is often quite apparent to an outside observer.1 But a
Master always understands; he cannot possibly misunderstand. He may say that he
does not approve of something that he sees; yet he is always in perfect
sympathy, and understands without our needing to say a single word. We must try
to understand others by endeavouring to see things as they see them, by
understanding what their thoughts are, not by doing what they do.
Disciples may be likened to the
strings of the soul-echoing vina; mankind, unto its
1 Ante, Vol. I, Part II, Ch. 4, and Part V, Ch. 2.
286
sounding-board; the band that sweeps it to the
tuneful breath of the great World-Soul. The string that fails to answer 'neath
the Master's touch in dulcet harmony with all the others, breaks and is cast
away. So die collective minds of Lanoo Shravakas. They have to be attuned to the
Acharya's mind—one with the Over-Soul—or break away.
The Occult Hierarchy makes use of disciples as the
strings of a Vina, on which it may sound the splendid music of the march of
evolution, that all that music may then resound among mankind. What would you
do, were you a musician, with a string that did not wish to blend itself with
the rest, but tried to force itself into more prominent notice? You would throw
it away. Anyone who has an axe of his own to grind, who wants knowledge or
liberation, or anything else for himself, is not fit to be a pupil of the
Master. With this in view every pupil will be tested. He will be given pieces of
work which, if he neglects them, will be left undone. If the work is important,
the Master will always have an understudy ready, but when it is just on the
fringe of things it may be left, and that string will be cast aside.
The disciple must have not only harmony with the
great purpose of the Master, but also with the rest of the workers. A man must
do the work of his own department and not interfere with that of others; when
their work touches his, he can only either help or hinder them, and it is his
duty to help, to make things as easy
287
as possible for a brother. This mutual forbearance
and help acts like oil in machinery; when oil is lacking it may still work, but
not so smoothly or well, and more energy will be needed to make it go. If one
puts all one's energy into the work, and yet wastes much of it in friction, that
is almost the same as giving but a part of it. One must have in mind, not his
own advancement, nor even the success of his own department, but the good of the
whole.
Thus do the brothers of the shadow—the murderers of
their Souls, the dread Dad-Dugpa clan.
All through her writings Madame Blavatsky applies the
name Dugpa to the brothers of the shadow—black magicians, as we often call them.
Perhaps it is rather an unfortunate name to have chosen, because the dugpas do
not quite deserve all the hard things she has said about them.
In Tibet, before Buddhism penetrated that land, there
was much worship of elementals and nature spirits, and offerings of a
propitiatory character were regularly made to them. The religion was on a low
level, as all religions of a propitiatory nature must be. " The Bhons and
Dugpas," says Madame Blavatsky, " and the various sects of the ' Redcaps', are
regarded as the most versed in sorcery. They inhabit Western and Little Tibet
and Bhutan." The old religion thus still lives.
The same thing has happened in other religions. In
Christianity, for example, as I have before, pointed out,1
1 Ante, Vol. I, Part V, Ch. 5: Superstition.
288
Jehovah still lingers—a tribal deity, who was jealous
of other gods. The Jews knew nothing of one supreme Deity until they were
carried away into Assyrian captivity; then they tried to identify the Supreme
God whom they then heard of with their own tribal god, and much confusion
resulted. Unhappily Christianity became entangled in this, and it still appears
in the English Communion Service. In the early part of that service the Jewish
Ten Commandments are read, where a jealous god is spoken of, but later on in the
same service we find that God is called " God of God, Light of Light, Very God
of Very God ". The old idea of propitiation also passed on into Christianity, in
the curious idea that God was bought off by the death of His own Son.
In Tibet, though Buddhism sent no less than three
missions to that country, and the people are mostly Buddhists of a sort, the old
religion comes up again and again, for it had a great hold on the hearts of the
people. The same phenomenon may be found in the Italian Appenines, where the old
Etruscan religion, far older than the Roman, is still to be seen. The Catholic
Church has set itself against this in vain. Another instance is evident in
Ceylon. The people there are Buddhists, and there are some Christians,
descendants of those who were converted by the Portuguese. Still, in moments of
real necessity—or serious illness or calamity—Buddhists and Christians alike
revert to the old " devil-worship ". If you ask them why they do so, they will
reply: " Of course we are Buddhists or Christians, and are civilized; but there
may, after all, be something more in the
289
old faith, and there is no harm in making things
quite safe."
The termination pa means simply " people ". Thus, the
followers of the Master Kuthumi are called in Tibet Kut-Hum-pa. The Bhon-pa are
the followers of the aboriginal religion. The descendants of the converts made
by the first mission are called Ninma-pa. That first incursion of Buddhism
rapidly became corrupted by the old faith. The Kargyu sect represents the
converts of the second mission, which was sent to Tibet some centuries later
than the first. The Dug-pa, or Red-caps, belong to this sect, and so are two
removes from the Bhon-pa. It also became impure, and allowed the old beliefs to
creep in.
Then came the third and last reform, by Tsong-ka-pa.
The followers of this are the Gelug-pa, or Yellow-caps. To this sect belong the
Dalai Lama and the Teshu Lama, and the present government of the country. To it
also belong outwardly our two Masters. The people of this sect wear, on great
occasions, yellow robes, and curious high-pointed helmet-like caps.
Aryasanga belonged to the Yellow-caps; so, of course,
did Alcyone, in his last incarnation, as the former's disciple. Perhaps Alcyone
somewhat strengthened his teacher's expressions when speaking of the Red-caps.
To call them " murderers of their souls " is hardly in keeping with the spirit
of the Buddhist religion.
The Dug-pa clan, then, is not quite so bad as it has
been painted. They are Buddhists, with nature-worship super-imposed. This old
worship, its enemies say,
290
included animal sacrifices, and even human sacrifices
at one time.
The Yellow-caps are opposed to them, because they are
striving to maintain a purer Buddhism. Their rules are stricter, and admit much
less of nature worship, though even they have not been able to keep entirely
free from it, so that some day a fresh reform may well be undertaken. From the
Dug-pa clan some have joined the Yellow-caps, and have even attracted the
attention of our Masters, so they cannot be altogether bad. The Bhon-pa are not
a very advanced or dignified kind of black magicians, so to call them " brothers
of the shadow" gives them more credit than they deserve, even on their own line.
Hast thou attuned thy being to humanity's great pain,
O candidate for light?
Thou hast? . . . Thou mayest enter. Yet, ere thou
settest foot upon the dreary path of sorrow, 'tis well thou should'st first
learn the pitfalls on thy way.
Once more we have that idea of the path of woe. There
is no sorrow on this Path; strenuous effort there is, but with it the greatest
joy in the work. Of this joy many teachers have spoken, with the result
sometimes that their pupils, encountering the early difficulties, have been
disappointed. Aryasanga evidently was anxious not to mislead any pupil of his,
so he laid stress on the difficulties.
291
There is a difficult stage through which all have to
pass—a stage between two certainties. Many in this position care nothing for the
things of the world. They do not care, for example, whether they have money,
fine houses and clothes, or not. If wealth should come to them, it would be a
responsibility that they would meet like any other, but they would be equally
content if they had just sufficient. The lower things have fallen away, and yet
the higher ones are still matters of faith, not of knowledge and experience. In
this condition the man inevitably has a monotonous and sometimes a miserable
time, which may last for a longer or shorter period, and may possibly occur
several times.
But when the higher is clearly seen, all is changed,
and the Path becomes radiant with happiness. Then the lower things have lost all
attraction. Take the case of Dr. Besant. If she devoted her tune and talents to
worldly ends, she could certainly win great fame and position along one or other
of several lines; but if you were to ask her whether it would be a pleasure to
give up what she has chosen and follow a line of worldly ambition, she would
surely say: " Certainly not; why should I ? Nothing could possibly equal the
delight of the Master's service."
There is far greater joy in the life of the disciple
than in any worldly life, however beautiful the surroundings may be. He
renounces personal possessions of every sort, but what does he want with them?
In India often a great man, who has been perhaps the Prime Minister of a State,
and has had great influence, fame and wealth, one
292
day quietly drops the whole thing, puts on a yellow
robe, and goes out owning nothing whatever. He does it knowing quite well both
forms of life, and clearly seeing that the life that he has left is poor in real
wealth and joy in comparison with that which he will lead as a hermit or a
wandering sannyasi. It is often the case that one in a prominent position, such
as the late Czar of Russia, can do very little to help the world. Such a
position does not therefore appeal to the occultist. I remember the case of a
highly advanced student who was given the choice between remaining an obscure
person and rising to a leading position in one of the greatest countries of the
world. He chose the latter alternative, and in due course became Prime Minister
of Britain. In that position he found himself cramped by powerful and selfish
interest, and opposed by the power of the Church. Feeling the weight of his
responsibility he was driven into a policy of conciliation. Though his objects
were to give greater freedom to the people and to consolidate the Empire, and he
did achieve success in the latter aim, he always regretted his choice—perfectly
unselfish as it had been—and he died a disappointed man.
CHAPTER 3 THE FIRST THREE GATES
Armed with the key of charity, of love and tender
mercy, thou art secure before the gate of Dana, the gate that standeth at the
entrance of the Path.
C.W.L.—Aryasanga now runs over once again the seven
portals, taking them as stages on the path, and looking at them especially from
the standpoint of the pitfalls that endanger the aspirant. The brighter side of
the matter, the encouragement and strength that the candidate receives, are for
the moment not being thought of; it is desirable to remember this, lest the Path
should seem too sad.
Dana, as already explained, means more than simple
almsgiving, more even than the feeling of charity; it implies the complete
giving of oneself to the service of humanity, holding nothing back.
Behold, O happy pilgrim! The portal that faceth thee
is high and wide, seems easy of access. The road that leads there through is
straight and smooth and green. 'Tis like a sunny glade in the dark
294
forest depths, a spot on earth mirrored from
Amitabha's paradise. There, nightingales of hope and birds of radiant plumage
sing, perched in green bowers, chanting success to fearless pilgrims. They sing
of Bodhisattva's virtues fire, the five-fold source of Bodhi power, and of the
seven steps in knowledge.
Pass on! For thou hast brought the key; thou art
secure.
This verse gives us a. beautiful and poetic
description of the Path as its first part appears to the happy pilgrim. At first
he thinks it is full of joy and very pleasant and easy to tread. It is easy,
when one has seen the Holy Grail to give up all else and follow it. But after a
while the vision may fade, the first enthusiasm wears itself out, and the man
begins to grow weary. It is the way of human nature to want constant change. See
how people rush after a novelty, and how, after a short time their interest
slackens, the pursuit becomes monotonous, and they turn their attention to
something else.
Studies in the lives of Alcyone showed us that most
people make very little progress, even in a series of twenty or thirty lives.
One man wrote, after hearing what name he bore in the Lives, and learning that
he was very much the same fifty thousand years ago as he is now: " If anyone had
told me before that twenty-five thousand years ago I was anything but a savage
in the woods, I could not have believed it." I answered him: " If twenty-five
thousand years ago you had been a
295
savage in the woods, the chances are that you would
still be one to-day."
If, however, a person does become enthusiastic for a
spiritual object, he at once makes a rapid move forward; if he cannot continue
his enthusiasm it is a pity, but probably in the rush he has accomplished as
much as was intended for him in the present life. Now we have not only the
motive to go forward, but we have also a great deal of knowledge to enable us to
do so, and that helps to prevent us from falling back.
We must try to keep our enthusiasm always, and not
allow ourselves to be affected by moods so that it is at the mercy of what
happens to influence us on the physical plane, or on the psychical planes. We
had a great testing of our enthusiasm when Madame Blavatsky died. I remember how
it tended to fade when she left us. She had the faculty of keeping us all going,
and when she went we felt limp, though some of us had succeeded in getting into
direct touch with the Masters.
And to the second gate the way is verdant too, but it
is steep and winds uphill; yea, to its rocky top. Grey mists will overhang its
rough and stony height, and all be dark beyond. As on he goes, the song of hope
soundeth more feeble in the pilgrim's heart. The thrill of doubt is now upon
him; his step less steady grows.
Beware of this, O candidate; beware of fear that
spreadeth, like the black and soundless wings of midnight bat, between the
moonlight of thy Soul
296
and thy great goal that loometh in the distance far
away.
Fear, O disciple, kills the will and stays all
action. If lacking in the Shila virtue, the pilgrim trips, and karmic pebbles
bruise his feet along the rocky path.
The pupil generally comes in with a splendid
outburst, and then slackens down. This is because he expected, though he may not
have confessed it even to himself, that his life was going to be all changed;
perhaps he imagined that he would have a life full of phenomena or that he would
always realize the presence of the Master, and so be able to keep constantly at
his highest level. His life is changed, but not in the way he thought.
When doubt appears it is for some students doubt of
the entire body of Theosophical knowledge; they have not yet come into conscious
touch with the Masters, and they begin to doubt their very existence, and to
wonder whether they are following an ignis fatuus. I hope no such doubt will
come to any of us, but if it does it is best to fall back on first principles.
Go back to the beginning; inspect your motives; examine the evidence.
Then there is doubt of oneself, which sometimes
assails the beginner; one may not be showing out the divinity that one wishes.
But one must go on trying, without doubting, because success is absolutely
assured for every man, and doubt is a great obstacle to attainment. Let a person
who is sure from the outset that he
297
will' not be able to do it try to learn swimming. He
will never learn. The doubt sends him under the water more than any real
difficulty. Another, who has confidence, will learn almost at once.
The trouble with many aspirants to the Path is that
they have this doubt as to whether they can achieve. Well, they must go on
working for it, and get rid of their prejudice against themselves, for that is
what it is, by reasoning it away. They must say to themselves: " I am going to
do it, whether I can or not! "
Aryasanga's similes are always beautiful. He speaks
here of the moonlight of the soul. It shines with a reflected light from the
Logos, the sun, and also from the spiritual soul, buddhi, and the spirit, atma.
He must let nothing come between, or the soul will be left in darkness.
" The soundless wings of the midnight bat " gives a
vivid picture of the way in which fear steals upon a man. Fear is one of the
most deadly things, and it is pressing in upon us on every side, for the world
is full of it in a multitude of varieties of form. The man in business, for
example, is in a constant little turmoil of fear; the employee is afraid of what
his superior will think of him, or of losing his place. Religious people are
afraid of death, of hell, of the fate of their departed friends, and all sorts
of absurd things. Many children live in constant fear of their elders, their
fathers and schoolmasters, as I have explained in the earlier commentary.1
1 Ante, Vol. I, Part V, Ch. 4, Cruelty.
298
Aryasanga well says: " Beware of fear." It darkens
the soul, and makes it a dimmer reflection of the Logos. The Logos is love, and,
said St. John, " Perfect love casteth out fear."1
The Shila virtue is harmony, good conduct. The
occultist has a moral code different from that of the world—different in being
far more strict. He is not bound by the rules and conventions of society, but by
something far stronger—the principles of the spiritual life, which allow not the
slightest deviation from truth, love and a life of service, with no room at all
for personal self-indulgence.
Be of sure foot, O candidate. In Kshanti's essence
bathe thy soul; for now thou dost approach the portal of that name, the gate of
fortitude and patience.
We have come to the third portal. Kshanti is patience
and fortitude. Steady enthusiasm is required; not the nervous, anxious,
spasmodic kind of enthusiasm that wears out its possessor before it has
accomplished anything useful.
Close not thine eyes, nor lose thy sight of Dorje;
Mara's arrows ever smite the man who has not
reached Vairagya.
Mara is the king of desire, the personification of
desire; so it is said that his arrows ever strike those who have not reached the
condition of vairagya or desirelessness.
1 I. John, 4, 18.
299
Madame Blavatsky gives us a note about Dorje, or
Vajra, the thunderbolt, the Rod of Power, which was also mentioned in the second
Fragment. She says:
Dorje is the Sanskrit Vajra, a weapon or instrument
in the hands of some Gods (the Tibetan Dragshed, the Devas who protect men), and
is regarded as having the same occult power of repelling evil influences by
purifying the air as ozone in chemistry. It is also a Mudra, a gesture and
posture used in sitting for meditation. It is, in short, a symbol of power over
invisible evil influence, whether as a posture or a talisman. The Bhons and
Dugpas, however, having appropriated the symbol, misuse it for purposes of black
magic. With the yellow-caps, or Gelngpas, it is a symbol of power, as the cross
is with the Christians, while it is in no way more superstitious. With the
Bhons, it is, like the double triangle reversed, the sign of sorcery.
The Rod of Power which is kept at Shamballa and used
in Initiations and at other times, is probably the strongest talisman on this
planet. At the same time it is a great symbol of that power which is resistless,
which, felt in ourselves, makes fear impossible for us.
Talismans are not mere relics of mediaeval
superstition, as some people think. If anyone who is in the least degree
-sensitive will go to the case in the British Museum that contains old Gnostic
gems, he may easily convince himself of that fact, for the influence
300
emanating from some of them is very plainly to be
felt. A talisman is a small object loaded with magnetism, and its purpose is to
repel all influences that do not harmonize with the magnetism with which it is
charged. Its action may be compared to that of a gyroscope, which revolves in
such a way that it will sometimes break to pieces rather than allow its motion
to be changed in direction.
A jewel makes the best talisman, since it preserves
magnetism best, being the highest type of mineral. In ordinary circumstances,
fear begins faintly, and only gradually gathers strength. In all such cases, a
talisman charged with the right kind of magnetism is a help, for it repels those
first faint vibrations. The wearer thus has time to gather himself together, to
call up his own strength and to set in motion in his astral body vibrations of
the opposite kind.
Aryasanga returns to the subject of fear:
Beware of trembling. 'Neath the breath of fear the
key of Kshanti rusty grows; the rusty key refused! to unlock.
The more thou dost advance, the more thy feet
pitfalls will meet. The path that leadeth on is lighted by one fire—the light of
daring burning in the heart. The more one dares, the more he shall obtain. The
more he fears, the more that light shall pale—and that alone can guide. For as
the lingering sunbeam that on the top of some tall mountain shines is followed
by black night when
301
out it fades, so is heart-light. When out it goes, a
dark and threatening shade will fall from thine own heart upon the Path, and
root thy feet in terror to the spot.
Beware, disciple, of that lethal shade. No light that
shines from Spirit can dispel the darkness of the nether Soul unless all selfish
thought has fled therefrom, and that the pilgrim saith: "I have renounced this
passing frame; I have destroyed the cause; the shadows cast can, as effects, no
longer be." For now the last great fight, the final war between the higher and
the lower self, hath taken place. Behold, the very battlefield is now engulfed
in the great war, and is no more.
But once thou hast passed the gate of Kshanti step
the third is taken. Thy body is thy slave.
It is clear from these verses that the candidate must
learn to put the lower self aside utterly. Fear belongs to that, for the higher
self can have nothing to fear in all the world—the only fear that a real man can
have, said an old Roman philosopher, is that he himself should fail to use to
the full all his virtues or powers for good.
Selfishness also belongs to it, and in this matter
the habit of hundreds of incarnations may have to be reversed; for some time one
may find oneself somewhat selfish even when the heart is definitely turned
against it; it is comparable to what happens when the engines of a steamboat are
suddenly reversed, in order to stop it
302
—the boat still goes forward, .against the engines.
But presently the forward momentum will be entirely neutralized, and then the
boat will obey the engines perfectly.
Until one gets rid of this selfishness the higher
Self cannot shine fully into the personality. The ego or soul itself may have
what looks like selfishness, though it is quite different from that of the
personality. It may ignore others, if it remains just manas, and not
manas-taijasi, manas strongly connected with buddhi, and so may be selfish in
that way; but it could never make the mistake of thinking that it can gain
through the loss of another, an error that is common enough down here. Men often
do things in trade, for example, which they know to be wrong; they think they
have gained, that they have over reached their neighbours, but they make a great
mistake. Quite apart from the law of karma, which is bound to operate, the man
has set his mind to plan how to cheat, and he will have to suffer the reaction
of all the force of thought and desire that he has set going in that direction.
He has set up a habit, and the next time that an opportunity occurs to do some
underhand thing, it will be a little easier for him to yield to the temptation,
and a little harder to check himself and do the right. If he could see' the
whole of the transaction and not merely one little corner of it, he would
realize that he has not gained, but has lost enormously.
An ego could not be as blind as that. The man who
cheats, because he sees only the immediate results on the physical plane, is
like a general who should neglect all the rest of the battle field in order to
take one small
303
position. He might capture that position, but he
would lose the battle.
If you have reached the stage where you have
destroyed selfishness, you can say: " I have destroyed the cause ";—the cause of
all trouble and sorrow down here.
The battle field that is now engulfed and is no more
is the antahkarana, which disappears when the higher has swallowed up the lower,
and no longer exists.
It appears that Aryasanga had in the background of
his mind an idea of the correspondence between these seven portals and the seven
principles in man. The first three are related in some way to the three lower
principles in the personality, while the fourth is concerned with that pure
lower mind which is the ray of higher manas, and is the antahkarana. At this
point the temptations begin to be those of the higher principles, and thus
belong to the inner man.
CHAPTER 4 THE FOURTH GATE
Now for the fourth prepare, the portal of temptations
which ensnare the inner man.
Ere thou canst near that goal, before thine hand is
lifted to upraise the fourth gate's latch, thou must have mastered all the
mental changes in thyself, and slain the army of the thought sensations that,
subtle and insidious, creep unasked within the Soul's bright shrine.
C.W.L.—It is within the experience of many aspirants
to the Path that the common faults which have been met and conquered in ordinary
life reappear later on in a different form. You may have killed pride, for
example, in its ordinary worldly forms, but it will reappear again as spiritual
pride. So also you may have got rid of desire for worldly gain, but it comes up
again as desire for personal progress or knowledge for personal satisfaction,
for the sake of feeling that one has knowledge. Then, even when sympathy has
begun to make itself a power in the life, selfishness tries to capture it and
make you desire only to get rid of the cause of your own discomfort and
unhappiness, by putting the object of suffering out of
305
sight. It is something like the case of a
housewife—if there be one of this kind—who dislikes to see dust in the room, so
sweeps it under the carpet, instead of keeping the place properly clean.
Even hatred turns up again, incredible as it may seem
that so coarse a vice should appear among those who are striving to live the
higher life. Some of our students come perilously near it, if another differs
from them on any subject, let us say that of the planetary chains, or the
question as to whether Mars and Mercury belong to our earth chain or not! Of
course, if one asks point-blank, " Do you hate So-and-so because his opinion on
this point is different from yours ? " he will deny it; but he will not go to
visit the other mail, and if they should chance to meet he will feel, much
disturbed and be disagreeable, or else he will cover that feeling up with an
artificial ease, a smooth surface, like oil on water.
This is a singularly persistent fault, and it has
been responsible for some of the world's big troubles. Was not the whole
Christian world convulsed and rent asunder in the fourth century because of one
dot on one letter of a word? It made the difference in the word as to whether
the Second Logos was of the same substance as the First or of like substance.
This was the whole dispute which raged round Alexandria between the so-called
Arians and the orthodox. And now, are not millions of Christians on the one side
and millions of Christians on the other kept apart, all because of the question
as to whether the Third Logos came out direct from the First, or from the First
through the Second?
306
This is the famous " filioque controversy" on what is
called the Procession of the Holy Ghost, which led to the disruption between the
two great sections of the Christian Church. The Eastern, or Greek, Church holds
that the Holy Ghost, the Third Logos, proceeded from the Father—single
procession—but the Western, or Roman, Church holds that He proceeded from the
Father and the Son—double procession. The quarrel is all about something of
which no one can know anything, and is of no practical importance to anybody.
From diagrams shown to us, we Theosophists can infer that both sides are right,
but neither will welcome the suggestion.
In Buddhism, to take another example, two large
sections of co-religionists are divided by the question as to whether the
platform erected on the water for the performance of certain ceremonies should
be composed of three planks or of four. They have to perform their ceremonies
separately on this account!
What does it matter whether Mars and Mercury belong
to our chain or not? We can be just as good men and women, just as good
citizens, just as earnest Theosophists, just as good servants of the Masters,
and one hopes just as good friends, whatever our opinions may be. Personally, I
study and observe as carefully as I can, and then give out what I know, as it
seems to me my duty to do, but I have never pretended to infallibility, and am
learning more every day. I should never think of finding fault with anybody who
disagrees with what I say. I have indeed more than once heard Dr. Besant
307
say how deeply she hopes that no one will ever make a
dogma of anything she has said, and put her up as an obstacle to future progress
in The Theosophical Society, and as a cause of division. If she has any anxiety
at all, it is in regard to this danger.
Theosophists are supposed to have given up the idea
of the infallibility of any particular source of knowledge. The question for us
when a new idea is promulgated is, "Does it ring true? Does it
inspire, elevate, illuminate? "—not, " Who said it? What book did you get that
from?" There are, however, some who, having given up blind faith in the Bible,
have transferred it to The Secret Doctrine, which, though a mine of wonderful
wisdom, is not perfect, as its author said. It is, she said, but a selection
of fragments of the fundamental tenets of the secret doctrine, paying special
attention to some facts which have been seized upon by various writers, and
distorted out of all resemblance to the truth. And she quoted the words of
Montaigne: "I have here made only a nosegay of culled flowers, and have brought
nothing of my own but the string that ties them." The Secret Doctrine will be
a treasure house for Theosophists for hundreds of years; let us not attach to it
the curse of dogmatism. No one can say the last word in occultism. The
knowledge that we have acquired up to the present is only like the lifting of a
little corner of a great veil; we have no idea of what may be revealed by the
raising of another part.
Before one can hope to pass this fourth portal, says
Aryasanga, one must have mastered she mental changes
308
in oneself. Moods come and go, and colour one's
outlook very effectually. It is difficult for a man to realize that when he is
in a cloud of depression the world outside is really no blacker than it was
before. When a great, upsetting sorrow has fallen upon him, it is with something
of a shock that he goes out and sees that the sun is still shining and people
are smiling and even laughing.
A man who is very miserable himself sometimes feels
quite angry at seeing others as happy as usual. He thinks the world is very
hard, and that it does not care much about him. He forgets that yesterday, when
he was happy, some others were distressed, and he did not care about them, but
went along quite comfortably. I know that depression is a very real thing, but
it is always self-created or self-permitted. Sometimes it comes from ill health,
over fatigue or nervous strain. At others it comes from the astral world, where
there are many so-called dead people in a state of depression. It is therefore
not always one's own fault that the depression should come, but it is one's own
fault if one allows it to stay.
Quite a large number of people seem to imagine that
their attitude towards things makes a difference. "Oh, no, you will never get me
to believe that!" such a person will say, imagining that his disbelief disposes
of the matter in question. But if a thing is a fact, it remains a fact, whether
he believes it or not. This is one of the queer little ways in which human
conceit shows itself.
309
One must also take care that casual thoughts do not
interfere with one's being of service, nor be blind to a chance of doing a good
service to a man because one does not like something about him—the way he cuts
his hair, for example. Such a thing sounds trifling, but it shows the condition
of one's mind and character. Often it is a thought about race, class or caste
that stands in the way. The Brahmana in India frequently neglects his duty to
others on account of this. Every one ought to have a fair opportunity to raise
himself socially and morally as much as is possible for him. Of course, one
cannot change the condition of millions of people very greatly in a short time,
but one can always show the greatest kindness and consideration to these people,
and help any one of them who can receive the help.
If thou would'st not be slain by them, then must thou
harmless make thy own creations, the children of thy thoughts, unseen,
impalpable, that swarm round humankind, the progeny and heirs to man and Ms
terrestrial spoils. Thou hast to study the void-ness of the seeming full, the
fulness of the seeming void.
The fulness of the seeming void is a phrase replete
with meaning. It applies to many different conditions. First one thinks of the
koilon, the aether of space. Commonly people think of space as something that is
empty, but the fact is that it is filled with a density of substance that can
scarcely be imagined. It is the apparently
310
solid matter that is " empty ". The matter that we
see consists of holes in the real matter, of bubbles blown in koilon.
The Hindus speak of root-matter or Mulaprakriti; of
which koilon is a densification, 1 think. They say that when the Logos realizes
Himself, when He differentiates Himself from the Absolute and looks back, as it
were, upon that Absolute, He does not see it, but a veil thrown over it—and that
veil is mulaprakriti. In The Secret Doctrine, Madame Blavatsky quotes the words
of Swarm T. Subba Row on this subject, as follows:
When once it [i.e., the Logos, ". . . the first
manifestation (or aspect) of Parabrahman "] starts into existence as a conscious
being, . . . from its objective standpoint, Parabrahman appears to it as
Mulaprakriti. Please bear this in mind, . . . for here is the root of the whole
difficulty about Purusha and Prakriti felt by the various writers on Vedantic
philosophy. . . . This Mulaprakriti is material to it (the Logos), as any
material object is to us. This Mulaprakriti is no more Parabrahman than the
bundle of attributes of a pillar is the pillar itself; Parabrahman is an
unconditioned and absolute reality, and Mulaprakriti is a sort of veil thrown
over it. Parabrahman by itself cannot be seen as it is. It is seen by the Logos
with a veil thrown over it, and that veil is the mighty expanse of Cosmic
Matter. . . -1
The Logos here mentioned is the Logos of our
Universe, in which are millions of solar systems—not the Logos of one solar
system. It was He who blew His breath into the root-matter, who dug holes in
space, so that the universe came into being. Fourteen thousand millions of these
bubbles make a physical atom, and eighteen of these make an atom of hydrogen,
which is the lightest of the chemical elements.
1 Op. cit., Vol. I, p. 462, See also ante, p. 69.
311
It is therefore a fact that all that we know as
matter is nothing else but holes in the real matter. The pressure of that
root-matter is several million tons per square inch. When men learn to exclude
this pressure, they will be able to use that tremendous force to run their
machinery. They will be able to utilize the force of the Logos that is in the
atom, which holds itself against that great pressure. But it will first be the
force involved in the disintegration of the physical atom that will be tapped.
The fulness of the seeming void and the voidness of
the seeming full can be studied in a variety of familiar experiences. The
atmosphere is full of the thoughts of other people and other beings. As it says
in The Occult World:
Every thought of man upon being evolved passes into
the inner world, and becomes an active entity by associating itself, coalescing
we might term it, with an elemental—that is to say, with one of the
semi-intelligent forces of the kingdoms. It survives as an active intelligence—a
creature of the mind's begetting —for a longer or shorter period proportionate
with the original intensity of the cerebral action which generated it. Thus good
thought is perpetuated as an active, beneficent power, an evil one as a
maleficent demon. And so man is continually peopling his current in space with a
world of his own, crowded with the offspring of his fancies, desires, impulses
and passions; a current which re-acts upon any sensitive or nervous organization
which comes in contact with it, in proportion to its dynamic intensity.1
Again, one may be meditating in a room that is empty
or full of other people. In the latter case, it may be empty for him, because
those other people are not
10p.cit., p. 111.
312
greatly affecting him. In the former case it may yet
be full of powerful unseen presences and influences attracted there by the
meditation, and engaged in pouring out their force upon him who seems to be
alone.
Something similar is to be seen in the varied
circumstances of life. Many seemingly big events pass over us and leave us
unaffected, while some tiny occurrence may affect the whole life. The death of a
near relation, or the loss of one's fortune, looks so great when it happens that
one thinks it will make a permanent landmark in one's life, and yet it may make
scarcely any difference in the end. That has been my experience. As a young man
I lost all the considerable money which I possessed, in the great
financial-disaster of 1866. It seemed a great event at the time; yet it has made
no difference to me. But my meeting casually with a person who told me about
Madame Blavatsky has made all the difference to my life. The meeting seemed to
be by chance, but it must have been intended and arranged in that seeming void
that is 'really so full in every possible way.
In the same way, a passing Deva looked in upon me one
Sunday morning when I was giving a talk to some Theosophists at Adyar. He showed
me some of the ways in which the Devas would influence men through religion in
the beginnings of the sixth root-race. I then thought it but the kindly act of a
friend passing by, but now I am sure it was much more than that, in view of what
has resulted from it. It led to our knowledge of
313
very much about the beginnings of the new race, to
the investigation on which the second part of Man: Whence, How and Whither was
based, and a little later to joint investigation by Dr. Besant and myself, which
resulted in the first part of the same book. Looking forward into that community
of the future, I saw that she would be remembered by that book when all that she
has written before it will have been forgotten.
O fearless aspirant, look deep within the well of
thine own heart, and answer. Knowest thou of Self the powers, O thou perceiver
of external shadows ?
Purity is a great thing, but it is not enough. The
little baby is pure, because it knows nothing of good or evil. Knowledge also is
needed in order that we may act, and also the will to put that knowledge into
action. The animals are purer than man, the vegetables purer still; they have
not the imagination of man, that causes him to seek material pleasure in
defiance or disregard of natural laws. Yet it is necessary that man should go
through this experience with matter in order that he may have knowledge, and may
then return to the Divine from which he descended, regaining his purity. We come
out from the Logos a divine cloud, but return to Him a divine being with
definite powers.
The man on the Path has recognized the divine Self in
himself, and is emerging from the influence of the world of shadows. Their
reality is only relative, and
314
is now no reality to him beside that of the
indwelling life, which offers him a far richer field of conscious experience
than the excitement produced by the impacts of external things. He has thought
the shadows to be real, absolutely real, more real than anything else,
throughout many incarnations, and it was all necessary, for without their
attraction he would never have awakened, never have paid attention, never have
learned anything at all.
If thou dost not, then thou art lost.
For, on path fourth, the lightest breeze of passion
or desire will stir the steady light upon the pure white walls of the Soul. The
smallest wave of longing or regret for Maya's gifts illusive, along
Antahkarana—the path that lies between thy Spirit and thy self, the highway of
sensations, the rude arousers of Ahamkara—a thought as fleeting as the lightning
flash will make thee thy three prizes forfeit—the prizes thou hast won.
Aryasanga is now talking about vairagya, and he says
that when one is striving to perfect that, the least response to the
attractiveness of things, or desire for them throws one back again into the
ranks of those who are disturbed. This recalls the simile of the soul as limpid
as a mountain lake in the second Fragment.1 Here he takes the simile of a lamp
to express the steadiness that must be attained in this stage. Even
1 Ante, p. 203.
315
casual thought will throw one back; that is true, but
we must remember the qualification: if it is one's own thought. As I have before
explained, if it is merely a reflection of someone else's thought, merely a
drifting thought-form that has attracted the attention, and that is not taken up
and made one's own, then there is not the same disturbance to one's purity and
tranquillity, to one's vairagya.
Sometimes very good people are distressed by such
passing thoughts, and they feel that they must be very wicked to have such
ideas. But if they do not take them up and nourish them and send them out
reinforced to do greater work of destruction, they have not really committed a
fault. It is quite true that we should not be conscious of an evil or impure
thought if it did not touch something akin to itself in us. But that is only
saying that we are not yet perfect. If a thought of that nature floated through
the mind of an Adept, he would not even notice it; but if there were many of
them round him, he might require to brush them aside, as one brushes away flies
and mosquitoes. Do not, therefore, be troubled unnecessarily about the
instinctive stirrings of anger, or selfishness, or undesirable stray thoughts;
they are a legacy from the past or they belong to your environment. But do not
adopt them, for if you do you will not only fail to attain vairagya, but will
forfeit the three prizes already won, and start climbing again from the very
beginning of the Path.
Antahkarana is here called the highway of sensations.
It is the mysterious means by which material things can
316
affect consciousness, the channel between object and
subject, that which causes an impact upon a sense organ to appear in
consciousness as a sensation. Such sensation, direct perception of things, is
more vivid than any description in words. To have heard, seen or felt something
gives one a greater sense of its reality than merely to have thought about it.
That is why clairvoyant perception of the other planes is worth so much more
than the descriptions that we can give. It is also the reason why the yoga books
say that all the testimony of others, and all his judgments about things as yet
unseen "by him, will at last have to be replaced by the aspirant with his own
direct perception, which alone can give a clear vision of the truth.
Sensations are here called the rude arousers of
ahamkara. Aham means "I" and kara is "making"; therefore ahamkara means the "
I-maker". The very vividness of that direct experience calls out the vividness
of our sense of our own existence by the contrast. And as this process occurs at
all levels, it calls out the vividness of the false personality while the man is
still in the world; but when he is well on the Path and the illusion of the
personal self has been quite destroyed, it calls out the Self that is the Atma,
the will, in the spiritual man. We have already studied this higher form of
ahamkara, often mentioned in Hindu philosophy, in the first Fragment.1
For know that the Eternal knows no change.
1 Ante, p. 71.
317
Briefly, one must be willing to give up the lower for
the sake of the higher; one cannot take worldly goods into the kingdom of
heaven. The laws and conditions of the higher world will not change to suit the
desire of any aspirant.
"The eight dire miseries forsake for evermore; if
not, to wisdom sure thou canst not come, nor yet to liberation," saith the great
Lord, the Tathagata of perfection, "he who has followed in the footsteps of his
predecessors."
The eight dire miseries are: malice, sloth, pride,
doubt, desire, delusion, ignorance and future lives. The last one seems curious
at first sight; but the meaning is quite clear—-that life in this world is
misery in comparison with what the higher planes have to offer us.
The title Tathagata is here translated " He who walks
in the steps of his predecessors". In Ceylon we were told that it meant "He who
has been rightly sent". That means one who has been sent by the Great White
Brotherhood as its Messenger to the world; and one so sent would necessarily
follow in the steps of those who came before him. That is why the story of
Initiation appears with little variation in the traditions of different nations,
especially in the form of what is called the solar myth.
Stern and exacting is the virtue of Vairagya. If thou
its path would'st master, thou must keep thy mind and thy perceptions far freer
than before from killing action.
318
Thou hast to saturate thyself with pure Alaya, become
as one with nature's Soul-thought. At one with it thou art invincible; in
separation, thou becomest the playground of Samvritti, origin of all the world's
delusions.
Then there is a long footnote explaining Samvritti:
Samvritti is that one of the two truths which
demonstrates the illusive character or emptiness of all things. It is relative
truth in this case. The Mahayana school teaches the difference between these two
truths—Paramarthasatya and Samvritti-satya (Satya, truth). This is the bone of
contention between the Madhyamikas and the Yogacharyas, the former denying and
the latter affirming that every object exists owing to a previous cause or by a
concatenation. The Madhyamikas are the great Nihilists and deniers, for whom
everything is Parikalpita, an illusion and an error in the world of thought and
the subjective, as much as in the objective universe. The Yogacharyas are the
great spiritualists. Samvritti, therefore, as only relative truth, is the origin
all illusion.
It is discrimination, the first of the four
qualifications, that can enable one always to distinguish between the real and
the relatively real which we sometimes call the unreal. Every time that one
pierces the unreal and sees the real it becomes easier to do it again, because
that by which we recognize the real is the God within us. The more that is
awakened the easier will it be to
319
see its purpose in all things, and its life
in other people.
The same pure Alaya, which is in us and also behind
the Divine Mind in nature, has been realized by the seers of all religions. A
learned Muhammadan once told me that the well-known sentence of Islam: "La ilaha
ilia 'llah", means not " There is no God but God," as it is generally
translated, but " There is nothing but God." He explained that the Arabic words
could be literally taken to have the former meaning, but the latter was the
esoteric meaning, imparted secretly among themselves. This is the true
proclamation of monotheism; not simply that there are many Gods, but one only is
worthy of the name, and of adoration. This esoteric interpretation, if accurate,
constitutes a strong link with Hinduism, which speaks of " One only, without a
second", the One in whom, they say, is both being and non-being.
All is impermanent in man except the pure bright
essence of Alaya. Man is its crystal ray; a beam of light immaculate within, a
form of clay material upon the lower surface. That beam is thy life-guide and
thy true Self, the watcher and the silent thinker, the victim of thy lower self.
Thy Soul cannot be hurt but through thy erring body; control and master both,
and thou are safe when crossing to the nearing " gate of balance ".
Nothing but the One is permanent. The personality of
a man lasts a very short time—till the end of his
320
devachanic period; the ego lasts through the whole
series of human incarnations, perhaps to the extent of a chain-period; the monad
no doubt lasts longer still, but even that is impermanent. Only the One remains.
Not that we shall lose ourselves. We can truly say, with Emily Bronte:
Though earth and man were gone, And sun? and
universes ceased to be, And Thou wert left alone, Every existence would exist in
Thee.
The Monad in man is a spark of the one flame. As long
as it is in time it will appear to be evolving. Speaking with the deepest
reverence, even the Logos appears to be doing the same. He answers to all that
is best and greatest in our conception of God, yet it is true that He will not
be the same at the end of the solar system as He was at the beginning; for that
to Him is an incarnation.
The " form of clay material " is only useful to man
in so far as it helps the development of the divine spark in him. The material
part cannot affect the divine spark in the sense of actually harming it, but it
can advance or retard its unfolding, which for it are the equivalents of help or
injury. Therefore it is called the victim of the lower self.
The fourth portal is here called the gate of balance,
as it concerns the middle principle in man. It is always a question as to
whether the outer or the inner will now gain the ascendancy; the candidate
having developed and purified his lower principles, physical, astral and mental,
must now put his weight on the side of the
321
higher principles, and make their
development his chief business.
Be of good cheer, O daring pilgrim to the other
shore. Heed not the whisperings of Mara's hosts; wave off the tempters, those
ill-natured sprites, the jealous Lhamayin in endless space.
There is a note to the word Lhamayin, which says they
are elementals and evil spirits adverse to men, and their enemies. There are no
creatures that do evil for evil's sake, but there are elementals who are harmful
to man; they are living their own life, and we get in their way. The elementals
are much like the wild creatures. They are riot man's enemies, but they dislike
man's intrusion into their domain, and they feel resentment because men have
treated them badly.
Nature spirits are joyous creatures; the worst that
can be said of them is that they play little mischievous tricks which are
tiresome to the people concerned. They object to man because he does so many
things which to them are odious and a source of trouble. They live a glad and
contented life in the countryside, and love to frolic about with the young of
the wild creatures, and they love them and the flowers and trees. They have no
trouble in their innocent life; and they feel no pressure of necessity, for they
need not toil for food and clothing as man has to do.
Into this sylvan happiness comes man; he hunts and
kills the animals who are their friends: he cuts down the trees they love, in
order to plant crops or build
322
houses: he pollutes the air with the filthy
emanations of alcohol and tobacco. All their beautiful country is made to them a
horrible wilderness, and they are forced to flee away. They may feel somewhat as
an artist .does when he sees some beautiful landscape spoilt and made hideous
with factories, whose chimneys belch forth black smoke and fumes kill the grass
and flowers and trees. We call it progress; it may be so for us, but the nature
spirit feels it differently, for his home is ruined and his friends are killed.
So it comes about that the nature spirits shun man,
and when a man takes a walk in a wood or along a lane they slip away at his
approach. He may be able to overcome this aversion of theirs, just as one can
sometimes overcome the timidity of the wild creatures. A yogi can caress the
wild animals that come near him as he sits in meditation. If one goes into the
country and forces oneself to lie quiet and still for an hour or two, the little
wild things, such as squirrels and birds, will come near. Similarly, if one
lives for a long time in one place the nature spirits gradually find out that
one is a harmless specimen of mankind, and in time will be quite willing to make
friends, and at last they will sport round one, and be quite proud of having a
human friend. In the astral plane these creatures regard men as intruders of a
troublesome and dangerous character, much as we should regard an invading army.
They therefore make it their business to try to frighten the newcomer. These are
not, however; tempters. It is principally the evil thought-forms of man himself
that play that r61e.
323
There are certain men, whom, we sometimes call the
black magicians, who work to oppose the spiritual progress of humanity,
believing quite honestly that our high emotions are not good things, but relics
of animal desires and sentiments. Such magicians may see a person in some
special situation, one who is making swift progress on the Path, and may at the
time be in a condition to be affected by them. It may then seem worth their
while to send against him an elemental calculated to upset him, and so cause a
disturbance which will block the Masters' work. This is the nearest thing that
exists to the tempting demon of popular Christian belief. Still, no aspirant
should fear these, for the worst black magician can do nothing to or through a
man who is one pointed, thinking only of the Master's work, not of himself.
Hold firm! Thou nearest now the middle portal, the
gate of woe, with its ten thousand snares.
Have mastery o'er thy thoughts, O striver for
perfection, if thou would'st cross its threshold.
Have mastery o'er thy Soul, O seeker after truths
undying, if thou would'st reach the goal.
Thy Soul-gaze centre on the one pure light, the light
that is free from affection, and use thy golden key.
Aryasanga may well speak often thousand snares, for
many times does the candidate imagine that he has achieved vairagya or
desirelessness, only to find that in
324
some subtle way he encounters the same snares over
and over again. Even the soul, the higher manas, has to be under the control of
the buddhic nature. As we have seen, at the first Initiation the buddhic life
begins, if not before, and the candidate treads that plane sub-plane by
sub-plane. This work can only be carried to perfection if the soul itself, the
higher manas, co-operates, becoming a servant in turn to that higher principle.
Then, when that work is done, and the candidate is ready for the next plane, he
will take his Fourth Initiation, and step over another threshold.
To be free from affection here means from being
affected; as we have already seen, that is the significance of vairagya.
CHAPTER 5 THE FIFTH AND SIXTH GATES
The dreary task is done, thy labour well-nigh o'er.
The wide abyss that gaped to swallow thee is almost spanned.
Thou hast now crossed the moat that circles round the
gate of human passions. Thou hast now conquered Mara and his furious host.
Thou hast removed pollution from thine heart and bled
it from impure desire.
C.W.L.—We must not misunderstand the statement that
the candidate's labour is well-nigh over. The Nirmanakaya, at his far higher
level, still labours, and the same may be said of the Logos Himself. But perhaps
a distinction should be drawn between the drudgery of the labour of getting rid
of the faults of the personality, and the glorious work that continues on the
higher planes after the personality is conquered.
The same thought applies to the question of strain.
Incessant work is a great strain on the physical body, but in the planes of the
ego work is pure joy; there is then no difference between work and play, such
326
as exists on the lower planes.1 Once a man has seen
the great sacrifice of the Logos, and the way in which the Masters throw
themselves into His work, there remains no possibility for him. but to plunge
into the stream of it, and do all that he can to help.
We are still considering a man who is not quite pure,
because he is still capable of a little selfishness. A thought is impure that
has the slightest tinge of self in it, however good it may otherwise be. There
may be a little thought of pride, such as: " People will think well of me for
doing this." That would be called impure, when we are considering this high
level of the Path. Not only must we keep impurity away, but we must see that it
never occurs to us at all.
But, O thou glorious combatant, thy task is not yet
done. Build high, Lanoo, the wall that shall hedge in the holy isle, the dam
that will protect thy mind from pride and satisfaction at thoughts of the great
feat achieved.
A sense of pride would mar the work. Aye, build it
strong, lest the fierce rush of battling waves, that mount and beat its shore
from out the great World Maya's ocean, swallow up the pilgrim and the isle—yea,
even when the victory's achieved.
Thine ' isle' is the deer, thy thoughts the hounds
that weary and pursue his progress to the stream of life. Woe to the deer that
is o'ertaken by the
1 Ante, p. 96.
327
barking fiends before he reach the vale of refuge— "
Jnana-marga," " path of pure knowledge " named.
To hold the position that he has now gained, against
' the strong pressure of the thoughts of millions of other people around him, of
which we have so often spoken, the aspirant now needs strong concentration and
positive power of thought. This strength is necessary before he can successfully
carry out that meditation which will raise him to the highest levels of the
buddhic plane.
The " isle ", Madame Blavatsky tells us, is the
higher ego or thinking self. From it all lower thoughts must be wiped out, so
that the higher may manifest. Yet one must become in no sense a medium. There is
a vast difference between making a place empty, and letting someone from the
outside enter into it and take possession; that is the difference between the
yogi and the medium. Here also lies the difference between the Theosophist and
the Spiritualist. Both agree that man is eternal and that his progress has no
limit. But the latter considers that it is good for a man to be a medium for
good spirits, while the former insists upon the preservation of his own positive
consciousness under all circumstances, and maintains that there is nothing which
passive mediumship can give which is not obtainable by conscious clairvoyance.
Aryasanga says, " Woe to the deer that is overtaken."
That means woe to the ego that falls into prejudice be cause he has been
overcome by the pressure of outside thoughts. He cannot then reach the place of
true
328
thought. Madame Blavatsky says of the path of pure
knowledge,- or Jnana-marga, that it" is literally the path of Jnana, or the path
of pure knowledge, of Paramartha or (Sanskrit) Svasamvedana, the self-evident or
self-analysing reflection." Jnana is, among the Hindus, the higher knowledge,
wisdom, not the lower knowledge concerning the world, which is called vijnana.
Ere thou canst settle in Jnana-marga and call it
thine, thy Soul has to become as the ripe mango fruit: as soft and sweet as its
bright golden pulp for others' woes, as hard as that fruit's stone for thine own
throes and sorrows, O conqueror of weal and woe.
Make hard thy Soul against the snares of self;
deserve for it the name of Diamond-Soul.
For as the diamond buried deep within the throbbing
heart of earth can never mirror back the earthly lights, so are thy mind and
Soul; plunged in Jnana-marga, these must mirror nought of Maya's realm illusive.
Of our personal sorrow Longfellow has sung:
But now it has fallen from me.
It has sunken into the sea, And only the sorrows of
others
Throw their shadows over me.
We must go a step further than that and not let any
sorrows cast shadows over us. When you merely feel the sorrow of another you are
not helping him, but adding to his trouble; but when you feel real sympathy you
are
329
pouring out vibrations of love, and are giving real
help to him. The Master always feels the sympathy, but never the sorrow. He
cannot suffer, even though he be truly one with those who are suffering, because
he is one with them and knows the joy of their existence on higher planes and
the wonderful glory of that state towards which they are evolving with unerring
certainty. The danger for most people is that when they cast out sorrow from
their hearts, they tend to lose sympathy as well, and in such a case they may
enter the left-hand path, the path of black magic. The brothers of the shadow
become perfectly callous to the feelings of others, as well as to their own;
they ruthlessly repress all feelings on the ground that they are a waste of
force.
When thou hast reached that state, the portals that
thou hast to conquer on the path fling open wide their gates to let thee pass,
and nature's strongest mights possess no power to stay thy course. Thou wilt be
master of the sevenfold Path; but not till then, O candidate for trials passing
speech.
It seems probable that the trials passing speech are
not dangers and difficulties so great as to be quite indescribable, but of a
kind unknown to ordinary men, and known only to the ego. The path along which
Aryasanga is guiding his people is an inner path for the ego. When the
personality has been conquered in the outer worlds, the ego has to scale the
heights of planes above him, and therefore has to do what cannot be described.
330
Another possible interpretation is that the candidate
finds himself now able to do what at first he was Unable to believe that he
could. The ordinary man would be inclined to say, for example, that the purity
and unselfishness of which we have constantly been speaking are beyond him, and
quite impossible of attainment, that they are a counsel of perfection. But some
day, if he tries to acquire them, if he keeps on desiring it and trying, he will
awake to find that it is perfectly natural and easy for him to have these
qualities.
The ordinary man says that a thing is impossible, and
so he does not try; but we have learned; like Napoleon, to erase that word from
our dictionary. It is not impossible for the reader of this page to attain
Adeptship within twenty-four hours; that would be possible if he had sufficient
will—a will, however, which no one seems to have. But leaving time out of the
question, it is possible for him to attain Adeptship; if he fixes his eye on the
goal, and -goes straight ahead without thinking about the passage of time, he
will comparatively soon find himself there.
Till then, a task far harder still awaits thee; thou
hast to feel thyself all thought, and yet exile all thoughts from out thy Soul.
Thou hast to reach that fixity of mind in which no
breeze, however strong, can waft an earthly thought within. Thus purified, the
shrine must of all action, sound, or earthly light be void; e'en as the
butterfly, o'ertaken by the frost, falls lifeless
331
at the threshold—so must all earthly thoughts fall
dead before the fane.
Behold it written:
" Ere the gold flame can burn with steady light, the
lamp must stand well guarded in a spot free from all wind." Exposed to shifting
breeze, the jet will flicker and the quivering flame cast shades deceptive, dark
and everchanging, on the Soul's white shrine.
Here is a poetical description of concentration—such
fixity of the higher manas that even on that plane nothing can enter from the
outside. This is the same thing as dharana, mentioned in the first Fragment,1
though in this Fragment it is called virya, which means strength —not physical
strength, of course, but the dauntless and unshaken manhood of the ego.
Dharana is called the sixth stage, in the first
Fragment, but here virya is the fifth portal. There is no confusion of numbers
in this, for the fifth portal leads to the sixth stage; in that stage the man is
using the quality which he acquired in the fifth stage to admit him to the sixth
through the fifth portal.
The same quality is the passport to the buddhic
plane; when the man has risen to this level he has silenced the higher mental
activity for the time, and now, instead of his own thoughts he feels himself all
thought —he is one with others, and their thoughts are his. At this stage he
feels the quality of unity of the Solar
1 Ante, p. 40.
332
Logos ; to him it is now a definite reality, a matter
of direct experience, no longer a beautiful idea or an occasional thrilling
inspiration. As to whether all this will come down to any extent into the
physical brain-that is another matter; most of it cannot. And the concentration
and meditation of these high stages are done for the most part out of the body
during sleep
We often talk of fighting earthly thoughts and
feelings. That is a stage in which one is putting oneself on .an equality with
them; but the stage of which we are now speaking is one in which they fall dead
at the threshold of the aura. The rates of vibration of the respective bodies
are so tremendous that the lower thought-forms are knocked aside and cannot
penetrate. There are many illustrations of this in the physical plane. If a
wheel is rotating slowly, one can throw a ball through the spokes, but riot if
it is turning rapidly. If a jet of water is sufficiently strong, one cannot cut
it with a sword; the weapon is thrown back as though the water were solid. One
of the well-known children's fairy stories tells of a man who could stand out in
the rain, and whirl his sword so rapidly above his head that not one drop could
get through the circle and fall upon him!
The quotation about the lamp is taken from the
Bhagavad-Gita. It further says: "To such is likened the Yogi of subdued thought,
absorbed in the yoga of the Self," 1 audioes on to explain that he then sees the
Self by the Self, and in the Self is satisfied, that he thinks
1 Op. cit.. VI, 19
333
there is no greater gain beyond it, and is not shaken
any more, even by heavy sorrow.1
This experience of the yogi is a true intuition,
because it comes from within, from a deeper part of the nature than even the
causal levels. How such an intuition will come down into the personality, if it
does so, depends upon the type of person who experiences it. There are two main
modes for its transmission—one which comes through the higher to the lower
mental plane, and the other direct from the buddhi to the astral body.
Which of these lines one will more easily follow
depends upon the manner in which one was individualized from the animal kingdom
long ago. Some attained that level through deep understanding, others through a
rush of high emotion, probably of devotion to a human master. In the former mode
it will come into the lower mind as a conviction, requiring no reasoning to
establish its truth at present, though it must have been understood in previous
lives or out of the body in the lower mental plane. In the case of those who
individualized by emotion the intuition is received through the feelings, not
the mind.
In neither case can these intuitions come through
satisfactorily unless the vehicles are steady. It is like transmitting a musical
note. If it has come not only through the air, but through a thick wall, it may
be muffled, and the sound may become quite different from what it was. If it has
to pass through some disturbance —a hurricane for example—it will be still less
clear
1 Ibid., VI, 22.
334
The latter simile very well indicates the case when
the astral and mental bodies are full of disturbance.
And then, O thou pursuer of the truth, thy mind-soul
will become as a mad elephant, that rages in the jungle. Mistaking forest trees
for living foes, he perishes in his attempts to kill the ever-shifting shadows
dancing on the wall of sunlit rocks.
I do not know whether such a thing as this really
happens in the jungle; but the idea is that when an elephant goes mad, he either
mistakes the trees for living foes or, what is even worse, charges against the
rocks and perishes. In the same way, some have had the experience that when the
mind feels the newly awakened energy of the higher Self coming from above, it
rebels with a last burst of ferocity against its new master, unwilling in its
pride and fear to give up its independence, which it has enjoyed so long. Then
it rages, and the last reserves of the army of doubts and suspicions are routed
Out from every depth and corner, and come forth to do battle against the light,
mistaking its every movement for a hostile foe. The mind is a stronghold of
pride, and what there is left of that quality rises up in hatred against its
superior, just as the persecutors of Jesus rose and killed him, unable to bear
the comparison of his purity and greatness with their own earthly mould.
Beware, lest in the care of Self thy Soul should lose
her foot-hold on the soil of Deva-knowledge.
335
Beware, lest in forgetting Self thy Soul lose o'er
its trembling mind control, and forfeit thus the due fruition of its conquests.
Deva-knowledge here refers, as before, to the
knowledge of the divine underlying all manifestation. There is » danger that the
candidate, anxious to see that he is going the right way, should become, not
selfish, but self-centred. There is a real distinction between these two. None
of us would willingly take anything for ourselves knowing that it would injure
another person. That (defect would be indicated in the aura by a dull
brown-grey. But there is a danger of being self-centred, taking things too much
from one's own point of view. That is indicated in the aura by a hardening of
the outer surface, which prevents impressions from coming in.
The other warning relates to the one Self, which must
not be forgotten. The aspirant must ever remember that all are one, that the
divine unity is in each. This is a practical instruction for every plane.
Physically a man must be clean, honest and true, so as not to contaminate
society; astrally and mentally his feelings and thoughts must be pure and lofty,
not that he may have the pleasure of being so, but for the sake of all around.
Beware of change, for change is thy great foe. This
change will fight thee off, and throw thee back out of the path thou treadest,
deep into viscous swamps of doubt.
The warning against change looks a little curious at
first, especially when we remember that we are all the
336
time changing and that in treading the Path we have
become that Path, and are thus very busily engaged in changing ourselves. What
is meant is that one must take care, during the period of change, not to change
one's basis, or essential attitude. There is a trying time when one gives up the
worldly things that one used to value, and has not yet a permanent hold on the
new and higher things. These latter have been visible in special moments when we
have been at our best, but we have fallen away from them again and again, into
that condition of spiritual dryness mentioned by so many mystics. What is
required is that one shall hold to the vision all through those fluctuations,
not changing that essential position.
These changes may be caused in several ways.
Sometimes it is merely that the physical brain gets a little congested or
anaemic; that affects the vehicles, but must not be allowed to affect the real
man. When the fluctuations come, we should say: " I knew this would come. I know
that I saw clearly before. Now the vision is dim and I begin to doubt; but I
know I shall come out of this depression, that it is merely a fluctuation in my
astral body."
Sometimes it is a great shock and trial for people to
give up the picturesque faith of their childhood, when they realize that it
cannot fit the facts of life, and can no longer satisfy the needs of mind and
heart. Then there often comes doubt of everything, and a rudderless condition
which has in extreme cases been known to last for several lives. In that case
one must listen and read
337
and think, and hold on to the hypotheses that best
explain the facts, until doubt has been laid to rest by the knowledge that
sooner or later will surely come. It is, of course, not necessary to pass
through a sceptical stage; it is quite possible to drop the accretions and widen
out one's religion little by little, until one arrives at the Theosophical
understanding of its message.
Prepare, and be forewarned in time. If thou hast
tried and failed, O dauntless fighter, yet lose not courage; fight on, and to
the charge return again and yet again.
The fearless warrior, his precious life-blood oozing
from his wide and gaping wounds, will still attack the foe, drive him from out
his stronghold, vanquish him, ere he himself expires. Act then, all ye who fail
and suffer, act like him; and from the stronghold of your Soul chase all your
foes away—ambition, anger, hatred, e'en to the shadow of desire—when even you
have failed. . . .
Remember, thou that fightest for man's liberation,
each failure is success, and each sincere attempt wins its reward in time. The
holy germs that sprout and grow unseen in the disciple's Soul, their stalks wax
strong at each new trial, they bend like reeds but never break, nor can they
e'er be lost. But when the hour has struck, they blossom forth.
But if thou cam'st prepared, then have no fear.
338
In the course of a footnote to this, H.P.B. refers to
the well known belief that every additional saint is a new soldier in the army
of those who work for the liberation of mankind, and that in Northern Buddhist
countries, where the doctrine of Nirmanakayas is taught, every new Bodhisattva
is called a liberator of mankind. We must remember, of course, that she refers
to all who have become Arhats, not only to the great being who rills the office
of Bodhisattva. Every one who makes progress makes it for all.
The candidate cannot have personal ambition on this
path. The idea of glory for oneself is selfish, and long before this stage is
reached the aspirant has set his will resolutely against such desires. The pupil
of the Master thinks not " What do I want? ", but " What does the Master want?"
When we realize that we are sparks of the divine Fire, we can think only of what
God wants. We are parts of Him; separately we can have no glory; so the idea of
glory for oneself is quite a delusion.
No man who goes on trying can possibly fail. He may
not succeed in doing just what he wanted to do at a given tune; but if he has
put force into his effort it cannot be wasted, and as action and reaction are
equal and opposite, every time he tried it reacted upon himself to give him
greater strength for the future. Further, every man who tries must succeed,
because the whole trend of evolution is on his side. He does not know what may
be the thickness of the karmic wall of obstacles through which he must break,
nor at what moment he may come through to light on the other side.
339
Under these circumstances it is simply foolish to
despair, or to stop trying, because as yet one has no visible success. In
Frederick Myers' grand poem, St. Paul, we find it said: " O man, why art thou
despairing? God will forgive thee all but thy despair." To despair is the sin
against the Holy Ghost; to despair of your own power is to despair of His power
that is working through you, so that you shut yourself off from Him.
Aryasanga tells the candidate to be like the warrior
who fights, and wins the battle just as he himself expires. He must hold out to
the very last, and never give in. The teacher knew that death is but a trivial
thing, not to be taken into account in our work. It will come to each of us at
its proper time; some who are old may still have many years to live, and others
who are young will be suddenly taken away. We shall go on with our work just the
same after it comes as we did before.
Henceforth thy way is clear right through the Virya
gate, the fifth one of the seven portals. Thou art now on the way that leadeth
to the Dhyana haven, the sixth, the Bodhi portal.
The Dhyana gate is like an alabaster vase, white and
transparent; within there burns a steady golden fire, the flame of Prajna that
radiates from Atma.
Thou art that vase.
We have here a wonderfully beautiful illustration—the
alabaster vase, with a steady golden fire within. It well typifies the buddhic
body or sheath, which is utterly
340
transparent and offers no obstruction to the unity of
life at the level. Dhyana is the higher meditation in that body—in which one
takes something and tries to understand its innermost meaning, or in which one
fixes one's thought upon a Great One and tries to understand oneself as part of
him. There is no longer any outer knowledge; no standing outside and thinking of
the object as apart from oneself; one realizes its nature by becoming one with
it, contemplating it from within.
Thou hast estranged thyself from objects of the
senses, travelled on the path of seeing, on the path of hearing, and standest in
the light of knowledge. Thou hast now reached Titiksha state.
O Narjol, thou art safe.
The same word titiksha has been applied, as we have
seen, to one of the qualifications, one of the points of good conduct, meaning
endurance. The term is now applied again at a higher stage. In a footnote Madame
Blavatsky says it means "supreme indifference; submission, if necessary, to what
is called ' pleasure and pain for all', but deriving neither pleasure nor pain
from such submission—in short, the becoming physically, mentally and morally
indifferent and insensible to either pleasure or pain."
That is not very clearly put. The candidate does not
act from considerations of pleasure and pain; he simply does what he knows to be
his duty. He still feels pleasure and pain in his vehicles, as other people do.
Yet it may be said that so great is the joy of this level, so intently
341
are the thoughts fixed upon the goal, that pleasure
and pain have lost their power. Though the Christ might feel to the full and cry
out, " My God, My God, why hast Thou forsaken me? " still there rings in his
heart the cry, " My God, My God, how Thou dost glorify me," as I have explained
in describing the Fourth Initiation, in The Masters and the Path.1
Op. cit., Ch. X.
CHAPTER 6 THE SEVENTH GATE
Know, conqueror of sins, once that a Sowani hath
crossed the seventh path, all nature thrills with joyous awe and feels subdued.
The silver star now twinkles out die news to the night-blossoms, the streamlet
to the pebbles ripples out the tale; dark ocean waves will roar it to the rocks
surf-bound, scent-laden breezes sing it to the vales, and stately pines
mysteriously whisper: "A Master has arisen, a Master of the Day."
C.W.L.—The Master of the Day means one who has become
safe for the present cycle; therefore it refers to the candidate who has taken
the first Initiation, as well as to him who has reached the further shore. That
all nature rejoices at such an event is the simple fact, which is here so
beautifully and poetically expressed. Many people at such a time find themselves
unaccountably happy, and sometimes are conscious of a decided spiritual thrill.
The majority of people are scarcely sufficiently sensitive to be conscious of
these events, but sensitive individuals might very well feel: " I am curiously
happy to-day. I wonder what
343
has happened." It is felt in nature in that way:—as a
general sense of well being.
Most people are busy developing the mind, and they
have in consequence lost much sensitiveness, which arises much more with the
development of feelings and emotions than with that of the mind. The higher
types of primitive people are far more sensitive in many ways, but usually only
in a vague and indefinite manner and without any control over their
sensitiveness. They receive impressions, and are often able to foretell events
in a general way. All this comes back to us, but in a clear and definite form on
a higher turn of the spiral, with the development of the higher emotions. When
that unfoldment comes we shall not only feel the sense of well being and
happiness of these great occasions, but will also know why we feel, and from
what centre comes the great song of joy. The rest of nature, although below our
level, is not yet centred on material things as much as many men are. Unless he
is busily occupied with a desire rising from hunger or some other need of the
body, an animal will generally be somewhat responsive to the thrill.
The great object of the Theosophical Society is not
so much to provide the mental development, as to raise those who are ready into
responsiveness to buddhic influences, to reawaken the sensitiveness of its
people on a higher turn of the spiral, and prepare them for the new race. It
does not deprecate mental development—far from it—but it prepares for the next
stage, when intuitional love will produce harmony and brotherhood,
344
and will employ the developed intellect to build a
new civilization, based on those ideals. Our Society, being in close sympathy
with the higher planes, is very sensitive to the forces liberated when another "
Son of Man " comes to birth. It receives the first touch of the great outrush,
and this gives it new impetus; its work increases and spreads, and there is an
advance in numbers and in brotherly feelings.
Sometimes, however, this stimulation of life produces
friction, due to a loss of the sense of proportion. Some great idea arises in
the mind of a member; the inrush of force intensifies it—and that is very good
if he is a well-balanced man, and can pursue his own ideas without depreciating
those of other people. But where there is unbalance and narrowness, differences
of opinion may be made stronger. We have our special lines of work in Theosophy.
Some take up one form of activity and some another, but danger arises when a man
begins to think that his line is the one which the whole Society ought to take
up and emphasize. When other people try to follow out their ideas, he tends to
think that they are not doing the best for the Society, because they do not come
and help him. It is not unnatural that enthusiasm should sometimes cause
friction in such cases, when brotherly love and real tolerance fall a little
behind.
Dr. Besant, has occasionally explained how she has
often worked with others at a " second or third best idea " of theirs. She knew
what was best, but would quietly yield for the sake of harmony, and that people
might have the experience of carrying out their
345
ideas. If a person comes to her with some plan of
which he is very full, though it is often not the best thing, she does not
discourage him, but says, " Go ahead, try it, and prosper." The man tries it,
and perhaps after a year or two he finds that it was not the best, and he
modifies it; but sometimes good results have been brought about in this way.
It is nearly always wise to let people try their
ideas, but always sad when they urge them too strongly upon others. Experience
tells us ever more and more that the most important thing in the Society is
harmony among the workers. Indeed, it may be said that harmony among the workers
is more important than success in any piece of work. So, let each man follow the
best inspiration that comes to him, but let him have the fullest possible
sympathy for others also in their individual ideas. If without peril to the
spirit of harmony which makes the Society a perfect channel for higher forces,
an open door to the Great Ones, we can engage in vigorous activity, it is well
indeed, but not otherwise.
The silver star mentioned in the text may also be
thought of as the star of Initiation. It is the sign of the thought and the
presence of the King. In the ceremony of Initiation the one who acts for Him,
the One Initiator, calls to Him to ratify that which has been done, and the
answer is the flashing out of the silver star.
He standeth now like a white pillar to the west, upon
whose face the rising sun of thought eternal poureth forth its first most
glorious waves. His
346
mind, like a becalmed and boundless ocean, spreadeth
out in shoreless space. He holdeth life and death in his strong hand.
Yea, he is mighty. The living power made free in him,
that power which is Himself, can raise the tabernacle of illusion high above the
Gods, above great Brahma and Indra.
Through the Great White Brotherhood comes to the
world all the Light that relieves the darkness of human life, and accelerates
enormously the evolution of mankind. Often the symbol of the East has been used
to typify the position of the Brotherhood, and the member thereof who has his
face turned to help the outer world may therefore be said to be turned to the
West.
The illusion referred to here is that of
separateness. The aspirant has now won his freedom from that illusion, and on
the Path he will raise himself step by step, plane by plane, until he has
destroyed the illusion on each of them, and is master of himself on all the
planes of human life. There seems to be no limit to the height to which a man
can rise, so the reference to Brahma and Indra is no exaggeration, though it is
no doubt intended in a general sense. It reminds us also of the line in The
Light of Asia: " Higher than Indra's ye may lift your lot." 1
A practical bearing of this illustration is to be
found in the change of ray, described in The Masters and the Path. It is
possible in the Hierarchy of our earth to advance further on the first ray than
on the second, and
1 Op. cit., Book the Eighth.
347
further on the second than on any of the remaining
five; so, anyone who has raised himself to the Seventh Initiation on one of the
last five rays must change to the second or the first ray, if he wants to go on
to the Eighth Initiation, and on to the first ray only if he wishes to go still
further. The Secret Doctrine compares Indra to the Second Logos, the Sun-God,
and Brahma is the Third Logos, the Creator. In the Hierarchy these two are
represented by (1) the Head of the second ray, the Buddha, and (2) the
Mahachohan, who governs the five rays, three to seven. The Lord of the World is
on the first ray, and He has raised His lot higher than that of the other two.
Now he shall surely reach his great reward!
Shall he not use the gifts which it confers for his
own rest and bliss, his well-earned weal and glory —he, the subduer of the great
delusion?
Nay, O thou candidate for nature's hidden lore! If
one would follow in the steps of holy Tathagata, those gifts and powers are not
for self.
Would'st thou thus dam the waters born on Sumeru?
Shalt thou divert the stream for thine own sake, or send it back to its prime
source along the crests of cycles?
Once more we come to the question of liberation from
the wheel of births and deaths, with its attendant idea of rest. At this stage
there can be no feeling of fatigue
348
and labour such as we have down here, but looking
from below the lot of an Adept who remains embodied for millions of years does
appear appallingly tedious. Still, the candidate to whom Aryasanga is speaking
is looking from below, and the Teacher desires that he shall have no
unwillingness to face that future, though he may at present be able to see only
the darker side of the picture. It is perhaps impossible for him to describe the
joys of that higher life; they cannot be expressed in terms of any worldly
happiness that we know; it is somewhat dangerous therefore to hold out its joys
as an attraction to the candidate, as it might cause him to fix his mind on some
lower form of happiness, all unwitting, and that would delay his progress.
Mount Meru or Sumeru, is the Mount of the Gods,
corresponding in a general way to the Olympus of the Greeks. All good flows from
that source; that stream flows into every member of the Brotherhood, and it
should flow through him to the world—otherwise he is literally damming up the
stream. But in that case, of course, he will become one of the failures.
If thou would'st have that stream of hard-earned
knowledge, of wisdom heaven-born, remain sweet running waters, thou shouldst not
leave it to become a stagnant pond.
Know, if of Amitabha, the Boundless Age, thou
would'st become co-worker, then must thou shed the light acquired, like to the
Bodhisattvas twain, upon the span of all three worlds.
349
On this Madame Blavatsky has the following note:
In the Northern Buddhist symbology, Amitabha or
boundless space (Parabrahman) is said to have in his paradise two
Bodhisattvas—Kwan-shi-yin and Tashishi—who ever radiate light over the three
worlds where they lived, including our own, in order to help with this light (of
knowledge) in the instruction of Yogis, who will, in their turn, save men. Their
exalted position in Amitabha's realm is due to deeds of mercy performed by the
two, as such Yogis, when on earth, says the allegory.
This is a little complicated, and requires some
explanation. Madame Blavatsky here makes Amitabha the equivalent of Parabrahman,
but it is difficult to see how that could be so, when the former is the
Boundless Light, the Boundless Wisdom, the Essence of all the Buddhas.
Parabrahman is the first member of the great Trinity, and Avalokiteshvara is the
second, which is also Amitabha, described as the " middle principle " of the
Buddha. With that second or middle principle it is possible for us to become
co-workers, but not with Parabrahman.
However, she often speaks of the two as one, as the
Parabrahman is the concealed wisdom, and He manifests as Avalokiteshvara, the
manifested Ishvara, the Logos. Looking upward from below, there is in us, and in
all, a God who is seen (the second of the Three) and a God who is concealed (the
first of the Three).1
1 Ante, p. 68.
350
The middle principle is also called the Bodhisattva
and is described as dual, male and female, namely Kwan-shi-yin, the male aspect,
and Kwan-yin the female aspect of Avalokiteshvara. The latter, it is said, "
assumes any form at pleasure in order to save mankind."
All the three worlds, says a footnote, refers to "
the three planes of being, the terrestrial, astral and spiritual." Madame
Blavatsky is here using the term " astral " in an unusual way, as she has also
done in The Secret Doctrine when touching on the present topic. She takes the
whole of man, from the Monad down to the material bodies, and divides him into
three parts, first the spiritual, which is the Monad; secondly, the astral,
which comprises our atma-buddhi-manas, or the rupa beyond sense; and thirdly the
material or terrestrial, •comprising our lower mental, astral and physical
bodies.
We may take the reference to the two Bodhisattvas
also in another sense, as referring to the two great Brothers, the Lord Gautama
and the Lord Maitreya, who represent the middle principle in the Hierarchy, the
former dealing with the higher worlds, and the latter_ turned downwards, as it
were, to deal with the personalities of men in the lower planes. The story of
the wonderful effort and sacrifice of these two Brothers has been told in The
Masters and the Path.1
But perhaps the most practical interpretation of the
allegory from the human point of view is this. Gautama became one with
Amitabha—that is, he became the
1 Op. cit., Ch. xiv.
351
Buddha. He continues his work on the higher planes,
but in the world of men he works through the dual Bodhisattva, whose male form
is Kwan-shi-yin, the Lord Maitreya, and whose female form is Kwan-yin, the
mysterious companion and shakti of the former in almost all religions.
Know that the stream of superhuman knowledge and the
Deva-wisdom thou hast won, must, from thyself, the channel of Alaya, be poured
forth into another bed.
Know, O Narjol, thou of the secret path, its pore
fresh waters must be used to sweeter make the ocean's bitter wares—that mighty
sea of sorrow formed of the tears of men.
The superhuman knowledge refers probably to the key
of knowledge which is given to the Initiate when he takes his first step. The
man who has passed through several Initiations has certain blocks of knowledge
which he is not allowed to communicate to others. He acts under that knowledge,
and necessarily it makes certain differences in what he does and the way he
lives. Others may observe these things, and follow them by imitation or through
devotion. Those who are natural protestants object to this kind of imitation of
great people. They draw attention to the fact that a person may be great in some
directions but not at all so in many others, that one who follows may easily
fall into superstition, as the people did in the story of the cat and the
bedpost.1 They
1 Ante, Vol. I, Part IV, Ch. 3, Tolerance.
352
also say that a life of self reliance develops
power. All! that is true; but there is benefit to be gained and danger to be
faced in both methods; so each should go the way that is natural to him, taking
care at the same time to try to understand and respect the man who follows the
other path. If we imitate the action of a person who knows a little more than
we do, it is not unreasonable. A child imitates grown-up people because he is
convinced that they know more than he does, and in most cases he is right. It
is just as well that the average child regards his father as the greatest man in
the world, and one would not think of telling him that his idea is wrong.
The Deva-wisdom is probably the Divine Wisdom, which
we call Theosophy. It is knowledge of the worlds as the dwelling-place of God's
life, not merely as external regions. Aryasanga always makes a distinction
between what one really knows and what one only believes. If he were speaking at
one of our Theosophical meetings he might say: "You ought to believe in the
existence of the astral and mental planes, because it is a rational necessity.
But you do not know it unless you have direct experience." Such knowledge is
superhuman only in the sense that it is beyond the reach of normal humanity at
the present time, though it will be within the reach of the average person in
due course.
Direct experience makes a great difference to one's
realization of these verities. I remember Mr. W. T. Stead once saying that he
had made extensive studies and investigations into things psychic, but one day
he had a clairvoyant vision which gave new colour and
353
reality to it all. He was falling asleep when he saw
before him a little picture of the sea shore, with the waves dashing against the
rocks. It was a small thing, but it taught him much. " Now," he said, " I
understand what a clairvoyant means when he says he sees this or that."
It made an enormous difference to Dr. Besant and
myself when we began to see the inner planes for ourselves. We were familiar
from the outside with facts about the astral and mental worlds, but direct
vision gave them life for us. Even with regard to physical plane matters, the
man who learns only from books has a cut and dried type of knowledge, but the
man who has lived his knowledge has it full of colour and light. I remember well
this difference among the Buddhist monks whom I used to meet in Ceylon. One
would be perfect master of the books, and could quote from them to illustrate
every point about his religion; while another, who had had some experience in
meditation, would quote less but say .far more.
Clairvoyance does not spring suddenly into existence,
in a form in which it can be relied upon. Much careful training is required to
enable a person to see accurately, to realize the significance of what he sees,
and to eliminate the personal equation. One may put a telescope into a man's
hands and expect that he will then know all about the stars—but he will know
very little until he- has been trained to use it properly, and has brought to
bear upon what he sees a great deal of knowledge and intelligence. Astronomers
have found that they must
354
also make allowance for the personal equation in
their -considerations.
In clairvoyance this appears in many forms—'One may
see things a little too large, a little too blue, or too red, and so forth.
Personal bias also is evident in the form of prejudice—one lady clairvoyant, for
example, who was also an ardent Christian, would persist in associating ideas of
baptism with any pouring out of water that she might happen to see, and she was
quite offended when others could not agree with her view. With all our efforts
we cannot see things fully, as would be necessary for perfect accuracy. It may
be that even at their level of Adeptship, the Masters make allowances for their
" personal equations " when working in the lower planes
The Initiate has, however, absolute certainty, from
experience, of a number of matters, which enables him to be a channel for the
higher forces. It alters the polarity of his mental and causal vehicles, so that
he can be used as others cannot, however highly they may be developed along
other lines.
Alas! When once thou hast become like the fixed star
in highest heaven, that bright celestial orb must shine from out the spatial
depths for all, save for itself; give light to all, but take from none.
It must not be assumed that the star is sorry to have
to shine; it does so because it cannot help it. " Beings follow their own
nature,- what shall restraint avail?" -says The Bhagavad Gita.1
Restraint always produces 1 Op. cit., III, 33.
355
sorrow; he who loves the world wants to shine upon it
for ever; the sorrow would be if he could not do so.
One great example of this is given by the mighty
entities who live in the forms of the rice grains or willow leaves of the sun,
in order that through them light, heat and vitality may be shed upon the system.
This is always spoken of as a sacrifice on their part. But it is spontaneous,
their way of expressing their inner nature. Instead of living a life of splendid
activity on some higher plane of which we have no idea, they keep physical
bodies, and live there for the benefit of the worlds which float around our sun.
They form a guardian wall in very truth, a channel through which Alaya may flow
into another bed.
Alas! When once thou hast become like die pure snow
in mountain vales, cold and unfeeling to the touch, warm and protective to the
seed that sleepeth deep beneath its bosom—'tis now that snow which must receive
the biting frost, the northern blasts, thus shielding from their sharp and cruel
tooth the earth that holds the promised harvest, the harvest that will feed the
hungry.
The simile of the snow is very beautiful, but must
not be pushed too far. The disciple has to become like pure snow—white,
stainless, spotless. No doubt when Aryasanga spoke of this to his disciples, he
pointed to the snow-covered peaks which were always in. sight.
The snow is unfeeling not in the sense of being
harmful in any way, but as being not itself affected by the
356
cold. No matter how much colder the temperature of
the air may become, the snow remains just the same. Because it is itself
unaffected it is able to protect the earth from the more intense cold. That is
the position to which the aspirant must rise. He must be unfeeling only in the
sense that he does not mind if he himself is troubled or injured by any outward
thing, whatever it may be, but he must remain protective to the seed that sleeps
below.
The seed is the deity in man. It is beginning to
awaken in all those who are turning their attention to higher things and are
striving to develop themselves. It is this seed that must be cherished in
others. An Upanishad tells us that in the acorn exists the oak tree potentially;
it has only to unfold itself, and draw in from the air, the earth and the
sunlight that which will enable it to manifest. In the same way the divine spark
within us, the Monad, has the whole possibility of the Logos that we shall be
one day, but it has still to unfold itself.
We must provide for those divine seeds the conditions
under which they can best unfold themselves in the lower worlds. We must
therefore receive the biting frost, the northern blast, so as to shield the
other people, who might be affected and kept back by it. There are some who are
ready for spiritual teaching, and they must be fed with spiritual food. These
are the hungry, and we must give them the food they need for growth. They do not
quite know what they want, but as soon as it is put before them they grasp it.
That has been the
357
experience of some of us with regard to Theosophy.
The moment that it came before us we felt: "That is exactly what I have been
waiting for," although before we heard of it we did not know what we wanted.
There are many other people waiting in the same way to recognize it, and we must
be like the snow, whose function is to protect while the cold lasts, and then,
when the sun shines, to melt away and efface itself.
That is exactly what we do for children in the home;
when times are hard or there is trouble of any kind, we take, care that the
children do not know of it. If there is a lack of food the children are fed
first, and the father and mother go short. Mercifully there is so much of the
divine instinct in us that 'we know that it is our duty to protect the young and
helpless.
The same spirit has to be carried into other branches
of life. We are a little ahead of the people who know nothing. They are the
people to be pitied most, not those who think they are in great mental trouble
and difficulty, struggling towards the light, such as the people who are worried
because their religion does not express to them all that they need; these are
not the people who most need sympathy, because at least they are awake and
struggling towards the light. It is the great orphan humanity, those who do not
know there is anything to struggle for, who most need sympathy. We Cannot do
much for them. The only thing one can do for a chick in a shell is to keep it
comfortably warm. The warmth is the life that we can pour out. We must be
kindly, brotherly and upright. When they need teaching, we
358
can give it to them; but we can always give them love
and make beautiful thoughts for them, for though they will not receive the exact
thought they will feel the warmth, as the chicken does in the egg.
It has been said that it is very well to preach and
teach, but the greatest of all sermons is a noble life. One reason for that is
that such preaching affects the people who do not yet know what they want. The
mass of people are engaged in making a living and looking after their families,
and they do not trouble themselves about Theosophy or religion. la England, the
accommodation provided in places of worship is insufficient for one-tenth of the
population. The churches and chapels of various kinds are generally not even
half-full, so we may say that not more than a twentieth of the population
habitually attend any sort of religious service. Our beautiful Theosophical
lectures make little or no impression on this mass of people; one might just as
well whistle a tune or read a piece of poetry. But the man who leads a good,
honest, pure, unselfish life is actually preaching all the time to all those
people who cannot be affected by anything that is said.
An objection to many missionary efforts is that they
put preaching before example. A missionary settles, for example, in a bungalow
in an Indian country town. Nearly all the Hindus round about are strict
Vegetarians and teetotallers; but the missionary has meat killed for himself,
and generally he keeps a decanter of whiskey or other strong drink at hand, even
when he does not share in the shooting of
I
359
birds and small animals in which his European friends
indulge. Then he preaches the purity and love of Christ, and sometimes dares to
abuse the objects of worship of the people. Usually he produces no effect,
except among some hypocrites who can obtain material benefits through connection
with him. In schools, he often manages to undermine the children's religion
without implanting his own. He rarely converts a good Hindu into a good
Christian, which in any case would be no advantage, but occasionally he changes
a good Hindu into an indifferent Christian. It would be better if he would set
himself to live a saintly life such as the Hindus can understand, and then speak
of Christ as his divine Guru, who has inspired him and made him what he is. Even
for his own purpose this would be better propaganda, because the Hindus are
broad-minded, and are generally willing to allow those whom others worship a
place beside their own Divine Incarnations.
We often hear people say that Eastern lands are being
rapidly Christianized when what is meant is that they are taking up modern
civilization—-such as electric light and sanitation, and are dropping certain
social customs, such as the seclusion of the better-class women and early
marriage, which were common enough in Christian Europe a century or two ago.
Perhaps they forget how the orthodox Christians in Europe fought against science
and social reform, and how these improvements had to win their way in the teeth
of the kind of ''Christianity" which the missionaries are themselves for the
most part still preaching. The situation
360
would be comical, were it not both
hypocritical and cruel.
Self-doomed to live through future Kalpas, unthanked
and unperceived by men; wedged as a stone with countless other stones which form
the Guardian Wall, such is thy future if the seventh gate thou passest. Built by
the hands of many Masters of compassion, raised by their tortures, by their
blood cemented, it shields mankind, since man is man, protecting it from further
and far greater misery and sorrow.
Withal man sees it not, will not perceive it, nor
will he heed the word of wisdom ... for he knows it not.
But thou hast heard it, thou knowest all, O thou of
eager, guileless Soul . . . and thou must choose. Then hearken yet again.
I cannot help thinking that Aryasanga's pupils must
have been rather inferior in certain ways, because again and again he seems to
find it necessary to reiterate that they must not expect anything for
themselves. That has been said to us too, but I venture to hope that we who are
students of occultism, have reached a stage where we do not mind being unthanked
and unperceived by men.
The idea of wanting these recognitions seems to be
significant of rather a lower stage. One is not looking for any thanks or
pleasure in connection with the results of one's work, yet one acts carefully
and with prevision.
361
It is the duty of the occultist to see beforehand
what will be the probable consequence of his action or speech, and not to do
anything rash. It is our business to do our best, and to see that failure is not
due to our lack of effort, but it is all the same to us whether we see results
or not.
Suppose, for example, that a member of our Society is
sent out to start a Lodge in some new district. He gives all the devotion that
he has, shows all the tact at his command, and does his best in every way. Then,
whether many or few join does not trouble him. It would be foolish for him to
say regretfully: ' If somebody else had been here they would have succeeded."
The man was sent there to do his own best, not that of some other person. It is
a mistake for a man to compare himself with others.
The expression " Guardian Wall " has caused a great
deal of misunderstanding. It is a beautiful symbol, but, like other symbols, it
must not be pressed too far. There is no evil of any sort menacing humanity
which is not of its own generating. We ourselves are our only possible enemies.
No one can hurt a man save himself, and no one can really help him save himself.
Others can only put him in the way to learn how to help himself, or put him in a
position where if he is not careful he may injure himself. The man in the outer
world says that he is injured by another man who defames him; but the fact is
that when he is angry the man in his anger injures himself. He need not feel
angry. People say that it is natural to do so; that may be so for the
362
undeveloped man, but it is not so for him who has
learned a little more.
The expression "since man is man " is capable of two
meanings. It may be taken as indicating that the Guardian Wall has existed ever
since man became man, or it may mean that it was brought into existence because
man is only man, and is therefore liable to injure himself very seriously,
unless he receives help and protection and guidance from above. Probably both
meanings are true. We know that the Lodge of Adepts is very ancient, that it
existed long before our humanity reached the level when it could produce Adepts,
and in those days they belonged to other and previous chains.
CHAPTER 7 THE ARYA PATH
On Sowan's Path, O Srotapatti, thou art secure. Aye,
on that Marga, where nought but darkness meets the weary pilgrim, where torn by
thorns the hands drip blood, the feet are cut by sharp, unyielding flints, arid
Mara wields his strongest arms —there lies a great reward immediately beyond.
Calm and unmoved the pilgrim glideth up the stream
that to Nirvana leads. He knoweth that the more Ms feet will bleed, the whiter
will himself be washed. He Chynoweth well that after seven short and fleeting
births Nirvana will be Ms ...
Such is the Dhyana path, the haven of the Yogi, the
blessed goal that Srotapattis crave.
C.W.L.—The term Sowan is another Buddhist expression,
which has the same meaning as Srotapatti—the man who has taken the First
Initiation. At the end of what is here called the path of dhyana, the meditation
by which he steadily works his way upward through the levels of the buddhic
plane, he takes his Fourth Initiation, and immediately enters the nirvanic
plane.
364
He does not rest at that point, however, but then
treads the Arhat path to the gate of Prajna. That term is no doubt connected
with the casting off of the last fetter, which is ignorance or avidya. It has
been suggested that the translation ignorance, which is so common, is somewhat
unfortunate, and that unwisdom would have been better. The idea is that no
matter how much knowledge about things as seen from the outside a man may have
he is still ignorant; but when he realizes those things from within, when he has
realized the same Self, the One dwelling equally in all, he can see the inner
side of all these things, and then he has wisdom. Jnana is wisdom, and the jna
in prajna has the same meaning, the pro being a prefix implying activity or
moving forth. Therefore prajna is sometimes translated consciousness, and
sometimes intelligence, discernment or simply wisdom.
It means in practice not that the Adept has all
knowledge, but that he is in a position to obtain the result of any knowledge he
wishes. For example, the Master Morya, when first I had the privilege of meeting
him, spoke English very imperfectly and with a strong accent. Since then he has
acquired far greater fluency in English, though something of the accent still
remains. The Master Kuthumi has always, within our experience, spoken English
with the greatest fluency and without any trace of accent, but at the same time
with one or two little peculiarities such as any man might have, which enable
-one to identify his style.
I remember an early experience when one of the
Masters wished to send a letter in the Tamil language.
THE ARYA PATH 365
As he did not know that tongue, he instructed a pupil
of his, who did know it, to think what he wanted to say; then he watched in that
man's mind how the thoughts would be expressed, and so precipitated a letter
which was correct, though he did not in his body know the meaning of the written
symbols used.
I remember that my inner feelings of devotion and
reverence received a little shock at the idea that a Master did not know Tamil;
but I discovered very soon that it would not be worth while for an Adept to know
everything from our point of view. I remembered a remark made by an exceedingly
clever man with regard to some matter of astronomy or some other science. A
friend of his had expressed surprise when he showed ignorance of the matter, and
said: "What, do you mean to say you didn't know that? " He replied: " No, I did
not know it, and even now that you have told me, I shall put the thought aside
and probably forget all about it. My brain will hold only a certain amount of
information, and I am going to be a specialist on my own line."
Brain capacity is limited, and to acquire a vast
amount of information that has scarcely any bearing on our life and work is not
wise. I once knew a young man who told me that he had been a very ardent reader
of the books of a large reference library in the north of England, until one day
he made a calculation as to how long it would take him merely to read all the
books that he wanted to study in that particular library alone. His computation
showed that it would take him about five
366
hundred lifetimes if he spent eight hours a day in
that occupation! He then decided to select his future reading very carefully.
It is one of the big problems of life to decide just
what knowledge one should try to acquire. Karma brings within our reach all that
we need to know for our immediate progress. It is possible for us to go beyond
that and spend our time and energy on study which is not useful in our lives,
though it may be of importance to someone else. The more we learn the more we
realize the paralyzing immensity of things; we are like small insects in a great
room, looking at it from one corner.
We realized something of this immensity when looking
up a long series of lives. For the long time involved we had to use the
precession of the equinoxes to mark periods of tune; the astronomers make that
period about twenty-five thousand years, but higher vision showed it to be
thirty-one thousand. The inexactitude of scientific information in these matters
is due to the limited period of time over which the investigations could
extend—a few hundred years, or a few thousand if the records of the Chaldeans
are to be taken into account. The observations have thus been limited to a very
small arc of a circle, from which the dimensions of the whole had to be
calculated, so the least error in approximation becomes multiplied many times.
But that is nothing beside an Age of Brahma, with its 311,040,000 million years.
And the greatest distances we can clearly imagine are naught besides the light
years which separate the stars.
367
We can Imagine two kinds or types of learned men. One
might become learned by acquiring an immense amount of knowledge; another, by
surrounding himself with a well-chosen set of books and having the knowledge how
to turn to those books and get from them the information which he needed. The
knowledge of the Adept is somewhat of the second type; he does not necessarily
possess books, but he has the power to get at any knowledge that he wants almost
in a moment. If the Adept wants knowledge on a particular subject, he can make
himself one with it and get at the core of it instantly, and then observe the
surrounding details as he may require them.
The Adept approaches the subject from a higher plane,
and therefore it might appear to us on lower levels that there were many things
which he did not know. It seems to me possible that if an Adept moved among us
now, we might find that we knew more than he along certain lines; but if we came
to deal with realities, with the core of the matter, with the real grasp of its
essentials, the Master would know more than any of us. Let us try to understand
it by considering the study of geology. The student buys a number of manuals,
and studies the subject month after month, and perhaps year after year. What
would a Master do if he wanted to know geology? Somewhere on the buddhic or
nirvanic plane, he would grasp the idea that lies at the back of the science and
make himself one with that; then, from that point of view, he would reach down
into any details he might require. Therefore,
368
while undoubtedly some of us may have detailed
information of which a given Master is not possessed, he has powers of knowledge
different from ours.
An Adept, wishing to occupy his physical energies and
time with the very definite purposes that he always has in view, may very well
put aside many things and not bother abut them. But in addition to that, we must
take into account the fact that his consciousness is not only definitely greater
than ours, but also different in kind, and no doubt quite indescribable to us
who have not yet reached that state.
The Arhat has still seven lives before him as a
general rule, before he attains Adeptship, but they need not be lived in a
physical body. He must descend as far as the astral plane, but the taking of a
physical vehicle for those seven lives is quite optional. While in the astral
body he may at any moment that he chooses enjoy the nirvanic consciousness, but
as in the physical body it is only possible for one to reach a plane below the
highest that one can reach while in the astral body, the Arhat incarnated
physically can have that nirvanic experience only when he leaves his body during
sleep or in trance. The normal home of the Arhat's consciousness is the buddhic
plane. If he were speaking -to any one on the physical plane, or doing a piece
of work that required attention, his consciousness would be fixed in the
physical brain, but when he turns aside and rests for a moment it slips back to
its normal home. He has a number of planes open to him, and can focus his
consciousness at any particular level, as he chooses, although
369
there will always be a background of the buddhic or
the nirvanic consciousness.
One must be careful not to misjudge people who
habitually use the higher consciousness. There have been cases where such a
person was misunderstood by some people who spoke to him and did not immediately
get a comprehensible reply, because of the fact that his attention was
abstracted at the time. Sometimes people have got an impression of coldness or
aloofness under these circumstances. It is wiser to be on the alert to
understand what is happening, and if we receive a preoccupied answer, to go away
and try another time Many a time I have approached the Master in his home, and
noticed by the appearance of his aura that he was preoccupied; in such a case
one waits until the Master has finished, or one goes away to do some other work
and then returns.
All the symbolism, in this and similar passages,
about the weary pilgrim being torn by thorns and washed with blood and so forth
is rather unpleasant to me. It is, of course, a materialistic way of symbolizing
difficulties which all aspirants feel to some extent, but I should prefer to
employ more agreeable illustrations. People differ, naturally, and one
recognizes that what seems almost repulsive to some is taken very much as a
matter of course by others. I have never been able to bring myself to like the
Sufi symbolism in which they speak of drinking wisdom as wine, or some parts of
the Symbolism in the Puranas typifying quite materially the devotion of the
Gopis to Shri Krishna. Of course I,
370
know what the Sufi means—that just as the man is
entirely filled with his wine and forgets everything else, so must he be filled
with the divine wisdom until it is everything to him. I would rather say, with
the Psalm, " As the hart panteth after the water brooks, so panteth my soul
after thee, O God."1 Nevertheless, we do not wish to criticise those who use a
symbolism different from our own.
Not so when he hath crossed and won the Arhata Path.
There Klesha is destroyed for ever, Tanha's roots
torn out. But stay, disciple . . . yet one word. Canst thou destroy divine
compassion? Compassion is no attribute. It is the law of laws— eternal harmony,
Alaya's Self; a shoreless universal essence, the light of everlasting right, and
fitness of all things, the law of love eternal.
The more thou dost become at one with it, thy being
melted in its being, the more thy Soul unites with that which is, the more thou
wilt become compassion absolute.
Such is the Arya path, Path of the Buddhas of
perfection.
In footnotes to this passage Madame Blavatsky writes:
" Klesha is the love of pleasure or of worldly enjoyment, evil or good," and "
Tanha, the will to live, that which causes rebirth." The kleshas are technically
considered
1 Psalm, 42, 1.
371
among the Hindus as five forms of attachment to the
world which are the great troubles and obstacles of the path. They have been
dealt with in our comments on the first Fragment.1 Tanha, as explained before,
is the thirst of the ego for the strong vibrations of material existence, which,
in the early stages of his evolution, help to awaken him to a more vivid
realization of his own existence.
There is also a footnote on the subject of
compassion, .as follows:
This compassion must not be regarded in the same
light as " God, the divine Love" of the Theists. Compassion stands here as an
abstract, impersonal law, whose nature, being absolute harmony, is thrown into
confusion by discord, suffering and sin.
I have always felt that perhaps our great Founder did
a little less than justice to the Theists there. She says that one must not
think of the Absolute Compassion as God, the Divine Love. I believe myself that
one should so think of it, only that one should make one's idea of God, the
Divine Love, a higher, a greater and nobler thing than many have made it.
In many devotional books it has been made very
personal indeed. In some of the Roman Catholic books of devotion, and in books
of the Quietists we find expressions such as " Christ, the Lover of his Church "
which are more suited to love between people on the physical 1 Ante, pp. 49-52.
372
plane. In India also those who follow Chaitanya, and
some others, employ similar material expressions; they:, speak of a love like
human love, though glorified.
Probably Madame Blavatsky was thinking of these
things, and warning us not to identify absolute compassion with that idea of
divine love. Divine love is. stronger than that, yet too abstract to be put into
words; it is not a quality of God, but it is He; He is all love and there is
nothing that is not love. So I think this compassion absolute is simply what we
mean by God, not a personal God, but the utter Reality which lies behind all.
And because that is absolute love we, being; one with all others in that, must
feel the need to help others.
Whithal, what mean the sacred scrolls which make thee
say:
" Aum! I believe it is not all the Arhats that get of
the nirvanic path the sweet fruition."
" Aum! I believe that the Nirvana-dharma is entered
not by all the Buddhas."
Yea, on the Arya path thou art no more Srotapatti,
thou art a Bodhisattva. The stream is crossed.
When it is said that the nirvana-dharma is not
entered by all the Buddhas, the term buddha is used in a general way, meaning
those who are illuminated or enlightened or wise. Madame Blavatsky said: "In the
Northern Buddhist phraseology all the great Arhats, Adepts and
373
saints are called Buddhas." And when it says " Thou
art a Bodhisattva " it means one who is preparing to become a Buddha in that
general sense, and may be taken as equivalent to the term Arhat. Here the text
speaks of the arya path, where before it said " the arhata path." The word arya
means noble, and it may "be that the term arhat applied to the path has a tinge
of its general meaning of worthy or venerable, so that it would be not simply
the path of the Arhat, but the venerable or noble path, as distinguished from
the other path, that of accepting nirvana, which, as we have seen before,
Aryasanga or His reporter is inclined to slight.
It has already been explained that the word
bodhi-sattva has at least three meanings, of which one is that it names the
office in the Hierarchy of the future Buddha who is the Teacher of Devas and men
for a particular root-race. In a footnote here Madame Blavatsky says that
popular feeling rightly places this great being even higher in its reverence
than a perfect Buddha. The Buddha is, of course, a higher official, but inasmuch
as the Bodhisattva who for our root-race is the Lord Maitreya, is the great
Teacher in the lower worlds, He-may "be said to be more directly and closely in
touch with them, and therefore may take a more vital and living place in their
devotion, in much the same way as affection and loyalty for some Prince who is
in charge of a province may be greater than that felt for the great Emperor far
away, who is seldom or never seen.
It has often been asked " Do the Buddhists worship
Buddha?" Colonel Olcott, when writing his Buddhist
374
Catechism had to deal with the question: "Was the
Buddha God?" To his answer, "No", the Burmese Buddhists raised objection, though
the Sinhalese Buddhists were quite satisfied. The Lord Buddha is regarded in
Ceylon as the Perfect Man, a Teacher towards whom the deepest gratitude is felt.
But in Burma the religion is more coloured with devotion, and the Lord Buddha is
practically worshipped. In a sense, both views are correct. All men are divine
in essence; in imperfect men the divinity is veiled, but in the Lord Buddha God
was shining forth.
These local differences of philosophical and
devotional outlook are due to the temperament of the people of the two
countries; Buddhism contains both aspects. Every great religion has begun by
providing for all types of men; but in each case as the centuries rolled on
certain portions or aspects of the teaching were allowed to fade while others
were brought into prominence. Christianity nowadays provides almost exclusively
for the devotional type of people; of the knowledge and philosophy that it had
in the form of the Gnostic teaching but little is left. The Islamic religion
also appeals principally to the devotional element, though there is philosophy
among the Sufis. The Jewish religion is in the same plight; in it, however, the
Talmud offers a philosophical system. Of all religions, it is perhaps only
Hinduism that at present shows out both the philosophical and devotional sides
with equal brilliance and fervour.
CHAPTER 8 THE THREE VESTURES
Tis tree thou hast a right to Dharmakaya vesture; but
Sambhogakaya is greater than a Nirvani, and greater still is a Nirmanakaya—the
Buddha of Compassion.
C.W.L.—We come now to the three vestures, on which
Madame Blavatsky has a very long note, which I will comment upon piecemeal. The
vestures refer to the lines of activity open to him who has taken the Fifth
Initiation. Very little has ever been said about the seven paths that lie beyond
Adeptship, but we have summarized what information is available in the following
passage:1
When the Human Kingdom is traversed, and man stands
on the threshold of His superhuman life, a liberated Spirit, seven paths open
before Him for His choosing: He may enter into the blissful omniscience and
omnipotence of Nirvana, with activities far beyond our knowing, to become,
perchance, in some future world an Avatara, or divine Incarnation: this is
sometimes called, ' taking the Dharmakaya vesture '. He may enter on ' the
Spiritual Period'—a phrase covering unknown meanings, among them probably that
of ' taking the Sambhogakaya vesture'. He may become part of that treasure-house
of spiritual forces on which the Agents of the LOGOS draw for Their work, '
taking the Nirmanakaya vesture '. He may remain a member of the Occult Hierarchy
which rules and guards the world in which He has reached perfection. He may pass
on to the next Chain, to aid in building up its forms. He may enter the splendid
Angel—Deva—Evolution.
1 From Man: Whence, How and Whither, pp. 14-15, 1971
edn.
376
He may give himself to the immediate service of the
LOGOS, to be used by Him in any part of the Solar System, His Servant and
Messenger, who lives but to carry out His will and do His work over the whole of
the system which He rules. As a General has his Staff, the members of which
carry his messages to any part of the field, so are These the Staff of Him who
commands all, " Ministers of His that-do His pleasure."
In earlier days, in the moon chain, these paths
probably opened before the Arhat, because that was the level of attainment set
for humanity in that chain. The line of those who remain in the Hierarchy on our
earth leads, to the Sixth Initiation, that of the Chohan, and still further to a
seventh, that of the Mahachohan. That is the last Initiation that is possible on
rays three to seven, but on the second ray a further step may be taken, that of
the Buddha, and on the first ray yet one more, that of the Lord of the World.
In the division of the seven ways into three sections
as given here, no doubt the path of work in the Hierarchy would be included
among those described as Nirmanakayas, along with the other path of the
Nirmanakaya proper. Our Masters, who keep their physical bodies for certain
purposes connected with their work, still give most of their help to men on
higher levels. They work habitually on the causal bodies of men, and sometimes
on the buddhic and atmic sheaths.
The Nirmanakaya usually retains his causal body, that
is the Augoeides, the glorified form which he has been building up in the course
of his evolution. With that he usually also retains the permanent atoms of the
lower mental and the astral and physical bodies, so that he can whenever he
chooses (which is a very rare thing)
377
make for himself a vehicle on any of those planes,
and show himself in it. Ordinarily, he lives in his causal body, and spends his
time in the generation of spiritual force, which is poured into the reservoir,
and is then distributed by the members of the Hierarchy and their pupils. Both
these classes, Madame Blavatsky said, " prefer to remain invisibly (in spirit,
so to speak) in the world, and contribute towards men's salvation by influencing
them to follow the good Law."
Further on she speaks of the Nirmanakaya as " that
ethereal form which one would assume when leaving his physical he would appear
in his astral body—having in addition all the knowledge of an Adept. The
Bodhisattva develops it in himself as he proceeds on the path. Having reached
the goal and refused its fruition, he remains on earth, as an Adept; and when he
dies, instead of going into Nirvana, he remains in that glorious body he has
woven for himself, invisible to uninitiated mankind, to watch over and protect
it."
Madame Blavatsky is here using the term astral body
in a quite a different sense from that in which she commonly employed it and in
which it is now used, but she used it in this way also in her article on The
Mystery of Buddha in the third volume1 of The Secret Doctrine. She there
explains that Shri Shankaracharya, who appeared in India shortly after the death
of the Lord Buddha, was in a sense a reincarnation of the Buddha, inasmuch as He
used the " astral" remains of Gautama, and she says, such "astral bodies" must
be regarded in the 1 Vol. V, 6 volume Adyar Edn.
378
light of separate or independent Powers or Gods
rather than material objects. She concludes: " Hence the right way of
representing the truth would be to say that the various principles, the
Bodhisattva, of Gautama Buddha, which did not go to Nirvana, re-united to form
the middle principle of Shankaracharya, the earthly Entity."1
In order to understand this mystery of Buddha we must
first realize the constitution of the physical atoms and then how these evolve
by being used in the human body both in a general way to build up its particles
and in a special way as permanent atoms. When you look at a physical ultimate
atom with etheric sight you first of all see that it resembles a wire cage;
then, looking more closely, you find that each wire is made up of a finer coil,
and that in all there are seven sets of such spirillae. One of these spirillae
is developed into activity in each round of evolution, so, as we are now in the
fourth round of our earth chain incarnation, there are only four spirilla? in
activity at present in the majority of atoms. In each round a new set will be
developed, so that in the seventh round the entire seven spirillae will be
active; the atoms will therefore be better atoms in the seventh round than they
are now, and the people who will live in that round will therefore find it far
easier than people do to-day to respond to inner things and to live the higher
life.
This awakening or evolution of the atoms is due to
their being used in the bodies of living creatures, from the
1 The Secret Doctrine, Vol. III, p. 38). (p. 368,
Vol. V, 6 Vol. Adyar Edition)
379
mineral to man. Everything is built of atoms, which
are floating around us in unthinkable numbers. There must be some of them which
have never been used at all, but others have frequently been taken into and
thrown off from the bodies of living beings. Some few have experienced constant
association with man, having been adopted as permanent atoms, to be carried from
life to life through the man's cycle of reincarnations. The atoms thus live with
us and form our bodies. It is said that once in seven years every particle in
the physical body is changed; some scientists have stated the period as three
years. It is probable that the bony structure changes much more slowly, but it
seems to me reasonable to imagine that the fleshy material is renewed entirely
in about three years. The constituents of the blood change more rapidly still;
one would not be surprised to-learn that they are entirely replaced every few
days.
All atoms absorbed into living things are changed
considerably. Those which form part of the earth are very little evolved by
that, but those which compose precious stones are considerably developed.
Vegetables and animals offer a still better opportunity, but the best possible
evolution for atoms is to be drawn into the bodies of human beings. Among men,
those who are living the occult life offer better conditions than men less
advanced, since they have purer bodies because of what they eat and drink (or
rather because of what the)' do not eat nor drink). As we evolve we also attract
better atoms and our bodies more and more tend to reject those less evolved.
380
When a man reaches Adeptship he cannot express
himself through the ordinary atoms that we find about us. They must be specially
advanced and refined atoms, because his various vehicles are required to be so
very much purer than ours, and capable of vibrating at rates which ours cannot
maintain. When a person reaches the level of a Buddha, it is quite impossible
for him to find atoms useful to him, except such as have been used as permanent
atoms, and have therefore been in the human body all the time, except during the
intervals between incarnations. Permanent atoms are very much more evolved than
others. They are at the fullest development of seventh round atoms in men who
are about to become Adepts. They are as highly developed as atoms can possibly
be, and are charged with all the qualities which they have brought over from
previous births.
All the permanent atoms of all who, in connection
with this world or probably even this chain of worlds, have attained Adeptship
and have cast them off, have been collected together by the Lord Gautama, or for
him. He was the first Buddha of our human race. All those who had been Buddhas
before him had come from some other evolution, and had no doubt brought whatever
they needed in the way of bodies with them. But the Lord Gautama, who was the
first really human Buddha, had to find his bodies from the material of this
chain. Therefore he, or some greater Ones for him, made these bodies. His causal
body was built up of the " remains ", or permanent atoms of all the causal
bodies which had
381
been used by such great Ones; his mental body was
built of the mental units gathered from such people, and his astral body was
made of their permanent astral atoms. There were not quite enough of these to
make the entire vehicle, so some ordinary atoms, the best available, had also to
be employed; but these were galvanized into activity, by the others, and they
are replaced by permanent atoms obtained from every new Adept who takes the
Sambhogakaya or the Dharmakaya vesture. Thus has been built up a set of bodies
which is absolutely unique. There are no other such bodies in the world, and
there is no material to make another such set. They were used by Gautama Buddha,
and afterwards preserved. We are now in a position to understand Madame
Blavatsky's statement that the principles of the Buddha were employed as the
middle principles of Shri Shankaracharya, but the physical Shankaracharya was
quite a different man, and the Atma of Shankaracharya was absolutely distinct
from that of the Buddha. These three intermediary bodies were used by
Shankaracharya, and are now being used by the Lord Maitreya. Madame Blavatsky
employed a curious nomenclature in her article. St. Paul divided man into three
parts—'Spirit, soul and body. By the spirit he meant what we call the Monad; by
the soul the ego, and by the body the personality, no doubt. Madame Blavatsky is
alluding to the same triple division; but she says that the Buddha is a person
so exalted that you cannot think of his component principles in the same way as
those of a man. So instead of speaking of the Monad of the Buddha, she
382
speaks of it as the Dhyani Buddha. Then she calls the
intermediate principles his Bodhisattva. Thirdly, she calls the physical body of
the Buddha the Manushya Buddha. And so we have these three things as the
principles of the Buddha: the Monad of the Buddha, which, because he is one with
it in a way which is not the case with us now, is called the Dhyani Buddha; the
Bodhisattva; and then the Manushya Buddha, which is his manifestation on the
physical plane. The astral and mental bodies, which have not been dissipated,
are also included in the Bodhisattva.
At first many of us were much confused by Madame
Blavatsky's terminology, but as the facts became more fully known to us we began
to see what she means when she says that the Manushya Buddha dies and passes
away, the Dhyani Buddha enters Nirvana, and the Bodhisattva remains on the earth
to carry on the work of the Buddha. The Bodhisattva means the principles of the
Buddha, which the present Bodhisattva uses. As the Lord Maitreya is using these,
it is not these which we see on the Wesak day, for that is called the Shadow of
the Buddha.1 It is but a reflection of him in the same way as the living image
is a reflection of the astral and mental bodies of the pupil,2 but he functions
through it and uses it.
I have explained in The Masters and the Path that the
work of the Lord Buddha was, in some way incomprehensible to us, not entirely
successful. He and the
1 See The Masters and the Path, Ch. XIV.
2 Ibid., Ch. V.
383
Lord Maitreya were both far in advance of the rest of
humanity, but at the time when the first human Buddha was needed, neither of
them was quite sufficiently advanced to take that high position. When the time
came, the Lord Gautama, in his great love for humanity, said that he would at
any cost fit himself to fill this position, that he would make the great
sacrifice necessary to push himself on very much more quickly.1
He did this, and the whole of the Buddhist world
venerates him for it to an extent which no one can understand unless he has
lived there. He lived the life of the Buddha and did the work, and it would seem
to us looking at it a wonderful life. It is impossible to find any defect in it,
to discover anything short of perfection in his life and teaching and work, and
yet it is said that some parts of it were not fully completed. In order to
compensate for whatever was lacking, two arrangements were made. The first was
that the Lord Buddha himself undertook to appear once a year and give his
blessing—he appears on Wesak day, and gives an outpouring of spiritual force
which helps the world very much. Then there was to be an incarnation almost
immediately after his death, and that requirement was fulfilled by the birth of
Shri Shankaracharya.
The first we ever heard about the occult relation
between the Lord Buddha and Shri Shankaracharya was from the teaching given in
Esoteric Buddhism, by Mr. Sinnett. In that he said that the Buddha
1 See The Masters and the Path, Ch. XIV.
384
reincarnated as Shri Shankaracharya, that
Shankaracharya was simply Gautama in a new body. Now very early we knew that
that was not so, for the reason— besides many others—that Shankaracharya was a
first ray man, and the Lord Buddha was the head of the second ray. Madame
Blavatsky quotes that remark of Mr. Sinnett's, and says that it is true in a
certain occult way, but that it was very misleading as it was put. She was asked
if Shankaracharya was the Lord Gautama under a new form. Her answer was that
there was the astral Gautama inside the outward Shankaracharya, whose Atma was
nevertheless his own divine prototype,, the heavenly mind-born son of Light.
When Madame Blavatsky says that Shri Shankaracharya
was a Buddha, but not an incarnation of the Buddha, she means that he is a
Pratyeka Buddha, that is a Buddha on the first ray. He still lives at Shamballa
in the body which he brought from Venus. The bodies of the Lords of the Flame
are not like ours at all. They do not change their particles, but have been
compared to bodies of glass; they look like ours, but very much more glorified,
and I suppose that they brought them entire from Venus, and that they are built
of the physical matter of that evolution. Madame Blavatsky says that
Shankaracharya was an Avatara in the full sense of the word, the abode of a
flame of the highest of manifested spiritual beings. As an Avatara is literally
one who " crosses over " or " descends ", not one of our humanity, the term is
strictly applied in this case, as he is one of the three Lords of the Flame from
Venus who
385
remain on our earth as assistants and pupils of
the Lord of the World.
To return to the general subject of the Nirmanakayas,
Madame Blavatsky's footnote further says: " It is part of the exoteric Northern
Buddhism to honour all such great characters as saints, and even to offer
prayers to them, as the Greeks and Catholics do to their saints and patrons; on
the other hand, the esoteric teachings countenance no such thing." By Greeks she
means members of the Greek Church—the ancient Greek did not usually make it a
custom to offer prayers, and certainly not to saints. When she says that the
esoteric teachings do not countenance prayer to the Nirmanakayas, she means that
no esoteric student would pray to a Nirmanakaya to give him help, because he
knows that they are not connected with individuals at all, but are fully engaged
in pouring out their splendid energies in their own line of work.
Still, it is said that these Great Beings, the
Buddhas of Compassion, are reverenced popularly more than those who have taken
the other paths. Madame Blavatsky also says " This same popular reverence calls
' Buddhas of Compassion ' those Bodhisattvas who, having reached the rank of an
Arhat (i.e., having completed the fourth or seventh Path), refuse to pass into
the nirvanic state or ' don the Dharmakaya robe and cross to the other shore,'
as it would then become beyond their power to assist men even so little as Karma
permits."
The main ideas here are perfectly clear, but the
terminology is a little confusing. Every Adept has crossed
386
to the other shore; that is the termination of the
path which he began to tread when he entered upon the stream. As is said in the
text, " the stream is crossed " before the choice of these three vestures is
made; and it is the Adept, not the Arhat in the ordinary sense, who makes the
choice. He who dons the Dharmakaya vesture crosses to the other shore, but in a
fuller sense.
The Sambhogakaya, Madame Blavatsky continues, " is
the same but with the additional lustre of three perfections, one of which is
entire obliteration of all earthly concerns," He enters a spiritual line of
evolution, and takes nirvana at a later stage. He retains the nirvanic atom, the
nirvanic body, but I think none of the lower atoms. He usually shows himself at
that level as the triple spirit. Included in this class is probably that order
of perfected men who have joined the Staff Corps of the Logos. They are no
longer especially attached to our earth, but are in the service of the Logos, to
be sent by Him anywhere within His system.
Then comes the Dharmakaya robe, which is " That of a
complete Buddha, i.e., no body at all, but an ideal breath; consciousness merged
in the universal consciousness, or soul devoid of every attribute." This means
that the man who takes the Dharmakaya vesture retires into the Monad. He drops
his permanent atoms altogether, and works only on high planes, the lowest for
him being the nirvanic. He burns his boats behind him, as it were, and starts
out on cosmic life, but I believe that if he chooses he may yet show himself as
387
the triple spirit, but he does not retain, I think,
even the nirvanic atom.
All through our evolution we keep the same causal
body until we are able to raise our consciousness to the buddhic plane, and then
the mere act of focusing oneself in the buddhic body causes the causal vehicle
to vanish. As soon, however, as one brings one's consciousness down again on to
the higher mental plane the causal body reappears; it is not the same as it was
before, because the particles have been dissipated, hut it seems ill every way
exactly the same body. A similar process takes place in the case of the
Dharmakaya vesture. The man has dropped his nirvanic atom, his manifestation on
the nirvanic plane, but I believe if he puts himself down to that level for a
moment he instantly draws to himself an atom exactly similar, a nirvanic vesture
through which he may manifest as the triple spirit.
Comparing the three, it may be said that the
Dharmakaya keeps nothing below the Monad, though what the vesture of the Monad
may be on its own plane we do not know. The Sambhogakaya retains his
manifestation as a triple spirit, and I think he can reach down and show himself
in a temporary Augoeides. The Nirmanakaya appears to preserve his Augoeides and
keeps all his permanent atoms, and therefore has the power to show himself at
whichever level he chooses. Yet the three are all equal in development; the
difference is only that he who casts aside the permanent atoms is therefore
unable to make himself visible on the lower levels, and
388
he throws them away because he no longer needs them
for his kind of work. The man who retains them has the power to come down to
those levels and work upon them, but it cannot rightly be said that those who
choose to do the other work are in any way less important, lower in value or
honour. We might think of him who is dealing at a higher level with great solar
forces as the more important, but that would be a mistake, for the whole solar
system is a manifestation of the Logos.
Madame Blavatsky speaks of all these kayas as,
buddhic bodies. In so doing, she is using the term buddhic as an adjective of
buddha, and is using buddha as the equivalent of our term Asekha Adept, one who
has passed the Fifth Initiation. We have restricted the term to those who have
taken the Buddha Initiation; our Masters stand two steps lower than that, but
they are spoken of as " living Buddhas " in Tibet.
The closing passage in the note says: " The esoteric
school teaches that Gautama Buddha, with several of his Arhats, is such a
Nirmanakaya higher than whom, on account of his great renunciation and sacrifice
for mankind, there is none known." We must not take this to mean that Gautama
Buddha and several of his Arhats make one Nirmanakaya, but that he is, such a
Being, and several of his followers have also taken the same line. Then it is
said that none higher is known to mankind. This statement is perfectly accurate
if it means that of our humanity no other has yet reached so high a level as the
Lord Gautama.
389
Even the Bodhisattva, the Lord Maitreya himself, •who
long ago was equal with him, as I have explained in The Masters and the Path,
has not yet taken the step which would make him a Buddha. Had he done so, he
could not occupy his present position as Head of the teaching department of the
world. He is often •called Maitreya Buddha by the Buddhists, but that is an
honorific title.
There is one level in. the Hierarchy, higher even
than that of the Buddha—-the level of the great King who is the One Initiator,
but as he is one of the Lords of the Flame who came from Venus, it remains true
that Gautama Buddha is the highest of our humanity.
Now bend thy head and listen well, O
Bodhisattva—compassion speaks and saith: " Can there be bliss when all that
lives must suffer? Shalt thou be saved and hear the whole world cry? "
Now thou hast heard that which was said:
Now thou shalt attain the seventh step and cross the
gate of final knowledge, but only to wed woe —if thou would'st be Tathagata,
follow upon thy predecessor's steps, remain unselfish to the endless end.
Thou art enlightened—choose thy way.
Once more Aryasanga brings forward his prevailing
idea, and urges his followers to take the path of compassion. He says one cannot
desert one's brothers
390
when they are suffering. We have already considered
the question of suffering quite fully, and realized that though the Arhat may
still work in the world that is full of suffering, his consciousness on the
higher planes, knows the glory that is behind it all, knows the heights of
happiness which all men will infallibly reach, so that it is impossible for him
to suffer as ordinary men do who see so little of the glory of life. The Arhat,
who is here addressed as a Bodhisattva, is in a position to share the triumphant
song of the Lord Buddha, so well expressed in The Light of Asia:
Ye are not bound! The Soul of things is sweet,
The Heart of Being is celestial rest; Stronger than
woe is will; that which was Good
Doth pass to Better—Best. I, Buddh, who wept with all
my brothers' tears,
Whose heart was broken by a whole world's woe, Laugh
and am glad, for there is Liberty!1
When Aryasanga urges his followers to remain
unselfish to the endless end, he uses an expression curiously similar to a
phrase which in Christianity is translated "World without end"; the Latin form
is in secula. seculorum, in the ages of the ages. It means until the end of our
set of worlds, or perhaps until the end of our present chain. The suggestion is
that we should remain in touch with humanity until the work of the present human
cycle is complete, and humanity has reached its goal.
Our own method of offering ourselves is a little
different from that; we have put ourselves completely at the disposal of the
Masters, not asking that they should
1 Op. cit., Book the Eighth.
391
send us to this work or that, but leaving it
absolutely to them, saying: "Here am I; send me." Aryasanga's desire was that
his pupils should follow the line that he himself had chosen. Perhaps he felt
that many more workers were urgently needed in that particular field. He was
speaking at a certain period of Indian history, in the reign of King Harsha,
when there seems to have been a decay of religion, when people were thinking
more of outward forms than of the real life behind, when everything had become
much specialized and somewhat artificial; under these circumstances perhaps he
felt the necessity for more teachers, for the revival of the religious life and
the ideal of service.
Finally he urges the pupils to be Tathagata, to
follow in the steps of the Lord Buddha. He tells them that they are now
enlightened and should choose their way. Next comes a line of dots—while the
person is choosing, apparently, and then he breaks out into a magnificent
peroration:
Behold, the mellow light that floods the eastern sky.
In signs of praise both heaven and earth unite. And from the four-fold
manifested powers a chant of love ariseth, both from the flaming fire and
flowing water, and from sweet-smelling earth and rushing wind.
Hark! . . . from the deep unfathomable vortex of that
golden light in which the Victor bathes, all nature's wordless voice in thousand
tones ariseth to proclaim:
392
Joy unto you, O men of Myalba. A pilgrim hath
returned back from the other shore. A new Arhan is born.
I have already spoken of the way in which all nature
rejoices when a new Initiate is born. In this, it is now said, both heaven and
earth unite. The spirit of the earth gains an added sense of well being. That
spirit is a great entity, not on our human line at all, for whom the whole earth
acts as a physical body. It is difficult to grasp the nature of such a being.
When we think of the earth as merely a huge globe, whirling through space,
without specialized organs, we might wonder how it can serve any being as a
body. But if all the creatures that live upon it contribute to the consciousness
of the spirit of the earth it needs no other eyes than theirs. It lives in their
life and so gains experience. Again, the earth moves on its way as one of a
mighty choir of planets, each one sounding its own note in the music of the
spheres, possessing within itself all the things which we have to reach out to
get.
This entity lives on a scale very different from.
ours. Our bodies happen to have a certain size and to live for a certain time;
that seems to us the correct standard, so a tiny creature with a small span of
life seems despicable, and a large creature with a long life-period is
respected. But size and length of life are no criteria of development or
advancement. Some antediluvian animals were enormously bigger than the elephant,
but they were much less intelligent, just as to-day the rhinoceros
393
and hippopotamus have less mind than the dog. We need
not assume, therefore, that because the spirit of the earth has a globe eight
thousand miles in diameter for a body, and because for him one incarnation is an
entire world period, he is more intelligent than we are. Consciousness is a
point in each of us. That of the spirit of the earth seems to be curiously
multiplex, and, notwithstanding his great size, to be less advanced in some ways
than that of many of the great Devas who move about his body.
If we stand upon a hill and look over the surrounding
country we find it permeated with something of the life of the spirit of the
earth. That life seems to divide itself into parts, temporarily or permanently.
A beautiful view, which has been admired by many people, is ensouled by a vague
individuality which is part of that spirit. Such admiration, whether from human
beings or great Devas, seems to excite the life in that portion, so that it
answers to the feeling of delight. When we admire a fine view it is acting upon
us, but we also are acting upon it. This response is in addition to what is felt
by the life in the mineral, vegetable and animal kingdoms.
When a man is initiated the influence to which he has
tuned himself on higher planes rushes through every part of his being. Though
there is little effect in the solids, liquids and gases of the physical plane,
there is a great deal of radiation from the etheric double, and from his astral
and mental bodies, and this is felt, as we have already seen by the kingdoms of
nature, and by such men as are in a condition to respond.
394
The fourfold manifested powers are those of earth,
water, fire and air—the four Devarajas or Maharajas, who are the administrators
of karma for us down here, the under-servants, as it were, of the Lipika, the
Great Lords of Karma. Their names among the Hindus are, it is said,
Dhritarashtra, Virudhaka, Virupaksha and Vaishravana, and each of them is at the
head of one line of development. Dhritarashtra is said to be the head of the
Gandharvas, the spirits of the air, the great Devas who express themselves by
music; to them is always assigned the east and they are always symbolized by the
colour white, as horsemen arrayed in white, riding white horses, and carrying
targets of pearl. Under Virudhaka come the Kumbhandas. They are the Angels
of the south, the spirits of water, so connected because the southern part of
the world has far more water than earth. They are represented as blue, the
colour of water, and are said to carry sapphire shields. Under Virupaksha are
the Nagas, Angels of the west, spirits of the fire, whose colour is red and who
carry coral shields. These Ezekiel described as fiery creatures full of eyes
within, and also as winged wheels. Then come the Yakshas,, ruled by
Vaishravana. To them the north is consecrated; they are the earth Devas or
Angels, and their colour is always gold—that of the gold hidden in the earth.1
Madame Blavatsky explains Myalba as " our
earth—-pertinently called hell, and the greatest of all hells, by the esoteric
school. The esoteric doctrine knows of no hell or place of punishment other than
a man-bearing
395
planet or earth. Avichi is a state, not a locality."
Although some people suffer after death in the astral plane, it cannot quite be
regarded as punishment. They are suffering from their own disordered
imaginations or low desires, and although things may sometimes be had on that
plane, the worst of it is not so mean and sordid as some of the things which
happen down here; all who have had experience on higher planes will agree with
Madame Blavatsky that there is nothing quite so bad as physical life anywhere
else.
'' A pilgrim hath returned back from the other shore
'! evidently means that someone has gained the higher level, but still chooses
to remain and work among men in this world. Generally we think of the other
shore as the Fifth Initiation, not as the Fourth, but here it is used in the
more restricted sense.
Aryasanga closes with the salutation:
PEACE TO ALL BEINGS
Similar blessings are to be found at the end of every
Buddhist or Hindu religious book. Aryasanga closes his book with very great
rejoicing. He has sometimes spoken of the path of woe, but he ends with a paean
of wonderful joy and beautiful peace.
-------------------------------
|